THE STYLOGRAPHY OP THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE BY Dr. BROJONATH SHAHA, L. M. S., Medical Officer^ Civil Engineering C allege ^ Sibpur$ Late Civil Medical Officer^ Rangamatij Sometime Govt. Examiner in Lushai^ Qr'c.j 6^c. ATJTHOB OF "THE GRAMMAR OF THE LUSHAI LANGUAGE," 'DEHATMIO TATTVA," A DISCOURSE ON MATERIO-SPIRITUALISM BASED ON SCIENCE AND RELIGION, AND "A DISCOURSE ON CAPILLARY BRUIT." &C. Edited by his son RADHIKA NATH SHAHA. Calcutta: PATRICK PRESS CO. 28, Convent Road. 1897. [The right of Translation and Reproduction is reserved.^ CALCUTTA : PBINTBD BY S. P. GHOSH, AT THE PATRICK PEKSS. 28 CONVENT ROAD. VEllll irii Co J. H. GILLILAND, M. A., Professor of Natural Science^ Presidency College^ Calcutta j Registrar and Fellow of the Calcutta University ; Qr'C., dr'C., &^C. THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED, AS A Little token of respect, and in recognition of great sympathy for the Author's work. 439 " Science is the detection of identity." " Whenever we form a class we reduce multipHcity into nnity^ and detect as Plato said, the one in the many/' — Jevons. " Scientific observation is snch as is at once full, precise, and free from unconscious inference." " Classification facilitates the operations of the mind in clearly conceiving and retaining in the memory the characters of the objects in question, as also to disclose their correlations." — Huxleij. PREFACE. This book is intended as a text-book for the Entrance class of our schools, but this system of Analysis and Parsing may be very advantageously and profitably taken up from the 4th class. As the Author of this work was unable from pressure of other engagements to revise his manuscript and to correct the proof sheets, that task fell upon me. In the performance of my task, I have always tried to make the book as useful practically as possible, avoiding too great diffuseness on the one hand, and obscurity from over- condensation on the other. When the Author was Secretary to the Government Boarding School at Rangamati, and in that capacity took an active interest in its progress, a discussion arose between him and the Head Master, the latter having expressed the opinion that Parsing and Analysis could not be done by students without a previous knowledge of the meaning of the words of a sentence. The present work is the outcome of an attempt to overcome such a difficulty. As yet the system of Analysis has been imperfect, cumbrous and not thoroughly scientific. But the present work is a thorough dissection of the English language. The Author has practically found that the arrangement is simple and thoroughly intelligible to juvenile readers by teaching two of his young nephews. If he has deviated from the beaten track it is not at the sacrifice of simplicity. The illustrations and classifications are clear, accurate and pers- picuous. The Appendix will be especially useful to Indian students. A rational course in Analysis and Parsing, whether for younger or older pupils, is something more than a mere assemblage of rules and statements of facts. Till PREFAOE. Stylography, however, begins from the beginning, helping the pupil to see and then think, to observe and then reason. In this way the youthful learner is made observant and not a mere stock of knowledge. The object is thus to develop powers of observation to enable students to appreciate the structural beauty of the English language, and not to force the student by cramming to learn statements and formulas by heart without teaching him to comprehend them. The stylographic system of Analysis and Parsing, I may add, is not an innovation but an evolution. Some typographical and other obvious inaccuracies, have found their way into the book owing to its scientific and mathematical nature. It is hoped that all these defects will be removed in the next edition if the system is taken to be intelligible and profitable by the public. The critic, it is hoped, will be good enough to overlook the shortcomings of the work in consideration of the origi- nality aimed at. Any suggestions or corrections by way of improvement of the work will be cordially received by the Author. Medical College ; The 8th December, \ RADHIKA NATH SHAHA. 1897, TABLE OF CONTENTS. LECTURE I. The Noun. (N) PAGE 1. Noun and verb — the principal parts of speech ... 1 2. Proxies of N, Substitutes of N, Derivatves of V, Analogues of N, Joiners and sub-joiners of N or V, Connective and Absolute parts of speech... ... ib. 3. Noun Table ; with symbolic and digital representation 2 4. Illustrations of the Noun Table ... ... 4 5. Compound Nouns, how formed ... ... 5 6. Illustrations of special Ante-joiners to N ... ... 6 7. „ of Noun possesive ... ... ib. 8. The noun formula, naked, clothed, & with NP ... ib, 9. Illustrations of N Formula, naked, clothed, with NP... 7 10. Conversion of joiners to N ,.. ... ••• 8 11. Enumeration of Ante- and Post-joiner words ••• ib, LECTURE II. The Verb. (V) 1. The Verb Table, the Verb Formula ... ... 11 •2. Illustrations of the Verb Table ... ... 12 3. „ of the Verb Formula ... ... 13 4. The Verb Formula with Auxiliaries ... ... ib' 5. Illustrations of A V Formula... ... ... ib. 6. IV Table, IV Table with A, IV Formula with A ... 15 7. Illustrations to IV Table ... ... ... 16 8. ,, to IV Formula ... ... ... 17 9. The PV Table and Formula .. ... ... 18 10. Illustrations of PV Formula ... ... ... 19 11. Enumeration of Aux. Vs, Regular, Irregular and Defec- tive Vs, and Bi-parts of «peech group of words ... 20 TABLE OF CONTENTS, LECTURE III. PAQK The Simple Sentence. (P) 1. Minimum Mono-simple sentence — its Formula ... 22 2. Illustrations of Ditto to formula ... ... 23 3. Formula of N Medium Mono-simple sentence. ... 26 4. Illustrations of Ditto to Formula ... ... 27 5. „ of Gerundial IV ... ... ... 29 6. „ to IV Medium Mono-simple Formula ... ib. 7. „ to PV Medium Mono-simple Fjormula ... 30 8. Maximum Mono-simple sentence Formula ... 31 9. Definition of Mono-simple sentence ... ... ib. 10. Illustrations of Maximum Mono-simple Formula ... 3^ 11. ,, of Compound Personal Pronoun apposition 34 12. IV Analogues of N as Ist term ... ... ib. 13. PV „ of N as 1st term ... ... 35 14. Alternate IV and PV as First term ... ... 36 15-16. IV Post-joiner of N ; PV Post-joiner of N ... 37 17. Alternate IV and PV post-joiners to N ... ... 39' Ox\ Absolute Structure. 18. Definition of Absolute structure ... ... ib^ 19. Illustrations of N | PV Absolute ... ... 40 20. „ of N I IV Absolute ... ... 41 21. „ of PV Absolute ... ... ... ib. 22. „ of IV Absolute ... ... ... 42 23. „ of Adjective Absolute ... ... ib^ 24. Governments of Ns and Vs, with illustrations ... 43- LECTURE IV. The Conjunction, (C) 1. The Apposition Ns in Mono simple sentence ... 45' 2. Development of Punctuation, the comma ... ib. 3. „ of Conjunction ... ... 4T TABLE OF CONTENTS. XI PAGE 4. Classification of Gonj. into Mono and Bi-groupal ; Strong and weak compound ; and co-ordinate ; Proto- type conjunctions 'and,' 'or' ; Compound symmetrical and Asymmetrical Conj. ... ... ... 48 5. Compound and co-ordinate increase of terms, joiners or subjoiners by comma and Conjunction ... 49 6. Definition of simple conjunction ; comma, a punctua- tive connective ... ... ... ... i&. 7. Illustrations of Symmetrical Mono-groupal conjunction between Ist terms ... ... ... 50 8. Illustrations of conj. bet. 2nd terms ... ... 51 9. ,, of conj. bet. 3rd terms ... ... 5)5 10. „ of conj. bet. 5th terms ... ... ih. 11. „ of conj. in joiners to Ns and Vs ... ih. 12. „ of conj. in subjoiners to Ns and Vs ... 56 13. ,, of conj. both in terms and joiners ... 57 14. „ of conj. both in joiners and subjoiners ... 58 15. „ oi Symmetrical Bigroupal con], in ierm^.,. 59 16. „^ of sym. Bi-gronpal conj. in joiners ... 61 17. „ of sym. Bi-groiipal conj. in sub-joiners ... 64 18. ,, of Apposition connectives, as and such ... 65 19. „ of Sym. Mono- and Bi-groupal conj. ... ih. 20. „ oi Asymmetrical Mono-groupal conjnnGtion between V and its post-joiner ... ... ih. 21. Illustrations of Mono-groupal C bet. N & its post-joiner 66 22. „ of asymmetrical conj. bet. V and IV ... 67 23. „ of asymmetrical conj. bet. Auxihary and V ih. 24. „ oi Asymmetrical Bi-groupal conj. bet. A &Y &S 25. „ of Symmetrical and Asymmetrical conj. ... 70 26. Equivalents of capacity in same and different terms 73 27. Difference between Equivalents and Appositions ... 75 28. A sentence of 11 terms ... ... ... 76 LECTURE V. The Interjection. (J ! J) 1. Interjection defined as an Absolute part of speech ... 77 2. The word Interjection structurally a mis-nomer ... ib. 131 TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE 3. Appearance of Interjections with the mono-sinQpIes ... ih' 4. The Yocatives, (Absolute part of speech) .„ ... 78 5. Union of Interjections to Narratives ... ... ib. 6. Imperative Expression, defined ... ... 80 7. Union of interjections to Imperatives ... ... ib. 8. Interrogative Expression, defined ... ... 81 9. Union of Interjections to Interrogatives ... ... ib* 10. Interrogative Relative in the Interrogatives ... 82 11. Definition of Exclamatory Expression ... ... 83 12. Union of Interjections to Exclamatory Exp.- ... ib. LECTURE VI. Transposition. 1. Emphasis, one factor of transposition ... ... 85 2. Transposition of Vs in the Narrative ... ... ib. 3. ,, of Ante-joiners of N ... ... 86 4. „ of Pronominal Adjective ... ... ib. 5. „ of Ante-joiners of Vs ... ... 87 6. „ of Ante-joiners of Vs with collateral transposition ... ... ... ... t6. 7. Transposition of P. A. Post-joiners to Vs. ... 88 8. Prevention of over-crowding, second factor ... ib, 9. Transposition of Preposition Phrase of Vs ... ib, 10. Perspicuity, and preservation of balance the 3rd and 4th factors ... ... ... ... 89 11. Transposition of PV post-joiner of N ... ... 90 12. „ of 3rd term ... ... ... 91 13. „ of 3rd term between Vand its po8t-]oiner ib. 14. „ of IV terms to Ist seat ... ... 92 15. Gradual Absolute formation from real transposition ... 94 16. Illustrations of PV terms to Ist seat ... ,„ ih. On Absolute Unions. 17. Independent IV Absolute ... ... ... 95 18. Adjective absolute... ... ... •.. 96 TABLE OF CONTENTS. Xlll PAGE 19. Transposition of the 4th Term witli following Terms ib. 20. TXm Ah solute formation ... ... ... 97 21. Transpositional interchange bet. 1st and 3rd terms ... ih. 22. Independent Prep, phrase Absolute & its union with Ps ih. On Conversion. 23. Of Active expression of 3 terms into Passive ... 99 24. Passive-active conversion ... ... ... 100 25. Conversion of Active Exp. of 4 or 5 terms into Passive 101 'i&. ,, of Active Exp. of 7 terms, how far feasible ... ... ... ... 102 27. Interchange between 1st and 5th terms in Active- passive conversion ... ... ... ih. 28. Preps, other than 'by' in Passive Exp. ... ... 103 29. Conversion of Progessive active into the Passive ... 104 LECTURE VII. The Parenthetic Ahsolutes. "( )" 1. llhistrations of Narrative-Parenthetics ... ... 105 The Reported Speech. 2. Distinction between Narrative-Parenthetic and Direct- Narrative ... ... ... ... 107 3. Illustrations of iiodtions of Narrative and Direct in Direct-Narrative ... ... ... ... ih. LECTURE VIM. The Subordinate Structure. C )' 1. Distinction between Incomplete and Complete Com- plexes ... ... ... ••• 110 2. Relative and Conjunction Subordinates, — R*, C*, their Character ... ... ... ... ih. 3. The initial position of Relatives in R* ... ... HI 4. Illustrations of Relative Subordinates — R»... ... 112 5. „ of Conjunction Subordinates — C* ... 113 ^IV TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE The Mono-simple Complexes. 6. Illustrations of PR* Complex by Fractional R* — initial, medial, and terminal ... ... ... 116 7. Illustrationss of PC* Complex by fractional C* ... 118 8. C* subordinate as apposition N... ... ... 119 9. R*— Subordinate to N ; C*— Subordinate to V ... 120 10. Illustrations of PR*, by integral R* Subordinate ... ib, 11. „ of PC* by integral C* Subordinate ... 121 12. „ of Relative and Conjunction of R* and C* understood ... ... ... ... 122 13. Complex of P by Di-Subordination (C* P C*) ... 123 14. „ of P by Bi-Subordination (P R* R2*) ... 124 15. „ of P by Di-bi, Bi-di, and Bi-bi Subordinates 126 16. „ of P by Poly-Subordinates ... ... 127 17. Combinative, locked, riveted Methods of Combination 128 18. Complex of P by c'C* Subordinate Co-ordinate ... ib. 19. „ of P by elliptical c'C"« Subordinate ... 130 20. „ of P by c'R"* Co-ord. Relative Subordinate 133 21. „ of P by Co-ordinate, sub-subordinated ... 134 22. „ of P by Substitutive Subordinate Complex ... 137 23. „ of P by Substitutive Co-ordinate „ ... 138 24. „ of P by „ Di-Complex Subordinate ... 139 25. „ of P by „ Bi-Complex Subordinate ... ib. 26. „ of P by 2nd Subordinate, Substitutive ... 140 27. „ oi Vhy Integral & Fractional ^nhordiinAiQQ.., ib. 28. „ of P by mono- and Co-ordinate Subordinate... 141 29. ,, of P by mono- and Co-ordinate Subordinate Sub-subordinated... ... ... ... 142 30. Illustrations of increased connectives in c'C"* ... ib. 31. Complex of P by an Absolute and Subordinate ... 144 32. „ of P by Mono-Bi-groupal Connectives ... ib, 33. „ of P by Riveted Relative Subordinate ... 145 34. ,, of P by Expression Subordinate ... 146 35. Illustrations of C* Subordinate as N Analogue ... 147 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XV PAGE 36. Interrogative relative Subordinate R* as N Analogue... 148 37. „ relative R* Complex hy Connective ... i&, 38. Apposition Ns to interrogative R* Relative Subordinate ih. 39. Conversion oi. C* into Co-ordinate c'C"* Subordinate ... 14^ LECTURE IX. The Absolute Structure. "(J—))" Subordinates. 1. R* and C' subordinate to the Absolute ... ... 150 Absolute Complexes. 2. Complex of the Absolute N or PV by R« or C* (united to a P) ... ... ... ... ih. 3. Complex of the Absolute independent of P ... 152 4. Ellipsis in co-ordinate Subordinates and Absolutes com- pared (three kinds of Ellipsis) ... ... 155 5. Complex of the P by Parenthetic Subordinate ... 156 6. „ of the P by elliptical C» Subordinate ... 157 Conversion of Reported Speech. 7. Rules for the conversion of Assertive Direct-Narrative . into continued Narrative ... ... ... 158 8. Rules for conversion of Interrogative Direct-Narrative 159 9. „ for conversion of /w^29era^^■^?e Direct-Narrative ... 160 10. „ for conversion of Exclamatory Direct-Narrative ih. 11. Conversion of Assertive Direct-narrative ... ... ih, 12. „ of Imperative Direct-narrative ... 163 13. „ of Interrogative Direct-narrative ... 164 14. ,, of Exclamatory Direct-narrative ... 167 15. Active-passive conversion of R» Subordinate ... 168 16. „ conversion of C* Subordinate ... 170 17. Proximate position of antecedents to R« ... 174 18. Recapitulation with regard to As, Vs, IVs, PVs ... ih. 19. Voice and Tenses of Verbs, six types o£ Vs ... 178 20. Voice and Tenses of IVs and PVs ... ... 183 3CV1 TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE LECTURE X. The Di-simple Sentence. (C'P C"P) 1. Di-simple principal, its character ... ... 184 2. Illustrations of Di-simple sentence ... ... ih. 3. ,, of Di-simple with 2nd co-ordinate conj. understood ... ... ... ... 186 The Di-simple Complexes. 4. Complex of the Di-simple by fractional Subordinate ... 187 5. The substitutive comhivation ... ... ... 188 6. Complex of the P by substitutive subordinate Di-simple 188 7. „ of the P by direct Di-simple subordinate ... 189 8. Di-simple principals as N Analogue ... ... ih, 9. Complex of P by Mono and substitutive Di-simple ... 190 10. 'Ref.erence on A kinds of substitutive Subordijiates ... ib, 11. Complex of Di-simple by integral C* Subordinate ... 191 12. Transposition of lut term of 2nd Co-ordinate ... ib. 13. „ of 1st term of 2nd subordinate Co-ordinate 192 LECTURE XI. The Compound Sentence. Symmetrical Compounds. 1. Of Mono- simple Ps by punctuation ... ... 194 2. Of Ps by conjunction (P + P.) ... ...195 3. Of Ps by punctuation and conjunction ... ... 196 4-5. Of Ps by increased conj. (copulative and adversative) 198 6. Of Ps by Expression Ps ... ... ... ib. 7-8. Of Subordinates— C% R*, ... ... ... 200 9. Of increased C* or R* Subordinates ... ... 201 10. Of co-ordinate Subordinates ... ... ... 202 11. Of Expression „ ... ... ... 203 12. 0/ Ps and Subordinotes ... ... ... 204 13. Of P and R« complex ... ... ... ih. 14. Of P and C* complex ... ... ... 205 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XVU PAGE 15. Of P and co-ordinate Subordinates ... ... 20ft 16. Of P and R« and C* both ... ... ... ih 17. Of P and R» and co-ordinate C** Subordinate ... ib. 18. Of Di-simple Ps (C'P C"P -+ CT C"P.) ... ... 207 19. Of either co-ordinates of Di-simple ... ... ib^ 20. Simulation of Di-sjmples to Compound ... ... 208 21. Of Compound Ps ... ... ... ...209 ASYMMliTKlCAL COMPOUNDS. 22-23. Of Ps and R», C«, Subordinates ... ... 210 24. Of Ps and P complex ... ... ...211 25. Of P complexes and P ... ... ... 213 26. Of PR* and P C» complex ... ... ... 214 27. Of Mono-complex and compounded Mono-complex ... ib. 28. Of Mono-co-ordinate complex... ... ... 215 29. Of C* P R» and C* c'C"2« P ... ... ... 216 30. Of Mono-complex and poly-subordinates ... ... ib. 31. Of Ps and CT C"P Di-simple... ... ... 217 32. Of CT CT and P c'C"« ... ... ... 218 33. Of Di-simples with compounded Ist co-ordinate .„ 219 LECTURE XII. Relation beyond tlie Period. 1. Personal pron., and Pron. Adj. relation ... ... 220 2. Demonstrative Adjective and Adverb relation ... 221 3. Preposition phrase and Mixed relation ... ... 223 4. Complex of P by Subordinate beyond Period ... 225 5. Co-ordinate of the 2nd co-ordinate in Di-simple ... 228 6. Compound beyond the Period ... ... ... ib. 7-8. „ Of P c'C"* complex an.l P ... ...229 9. ,, Of Complex and Complex ... ... ib. 10. „ Of P and CT CT Di-simple ... ... 2^3 11. Compound by other Conjunctions beyond the Period ••• ib. 3V1U TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE LECTURE XIII. The Paragraph. (^) 1. Structures with or without relation within Period ... 234 2. Structures „ rehition beyond Period ... ib. 3. Structures ,, relation between Paragraph ib. 4. Consecutive Independents in a Para ... ... ib. Parts of Speech and Phrase relation. 5. Personal pronoun relation between Paras ... ... 236 6. Pronominal Adjective relation between Paras ... 237 7. Adverb relation between Paras ... ... 238 8. Preposition phrase relation between Paras ... 239 9. „ Of "Place," of "IM me" ... ...240 10. „ Of "Number," and "Place" ... ... 241 Structural relation. 11. Para-complexes ... ... ... „, 243 12. Para-compounds ... ... ... ... 246 LECTURE XIV. Recapitulation. 1. RfiCAPiTULATioN.-The Mono-simple sentence, its extent ; (a) 0£ terms in Subordinates and Co-ordinates ; the behavior of Proxy parts of speech ; Antecedents of Relative, Compound relative and Pronouns ... 250 (6) The use of joiners, as N substitute ; IV and PV terms as joiners, Past participle as joiner and term (Joiner d; Term parts of speech) ... ,,, ib. (c) Antecedents of reference of ' the," Pron. Adj. and certain other adjectives and adverbs ... ... 251 {d) The three varieties of Government in Parsing ... ib, (e) The behavior of Absolute parts of speech ... ib. (/) The behavior of Parenthetic parts of speech ... ib, (jf) Analogues of N, and its relation to Direct-Narrative 252 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XIX PAGE (A) Transposition of terms and joiners ••• ... 252 (i) Inversion of Ist two terms ... ... ib. (j) Transformation of the Ist and 3rd terms ... ib. (Jc) The behavior of Direct-Narrative ... ... ib. (Z) Transformation of the "Direct" in Direct-narrative (of 4 expressions) ... ... ... ib. (m) Behavior of Connective parts of speech & their classification ... ... ... ... 253 2. Analogy between Conj. and Prep, as connectives 254 3. „ of dual connection of Prep., Conj., & Adv. ... 256 LECTURE XV. Transformation. 1. Transformation of N analoj^ues in P ... ... 257 2. „ of several Ps into a P and Vice-versa 258 3. „ of Complex into a Complex and a P ... 259 4. „ of Simple into Complex by change of joiners and terms ... ... ... ib. (a) P changed into PR* and Vice-vei'sa ... ... ib. {b) P changed into PC* and Vice-versa ... ... 261 (c) P changed into Pc'C* and Vice-versa ... ... 264 {d) Mutual change of a P into mono-complexes ... 265 5. Transformation of Absolute united to P into a' P, or Complex, or Compound ... ... ••• ib. 6. Transformation of Complex into Co-ordinate and Com- pound and Vice-versa ... ... ... 268 7. Mutual transformation of all structures ... ... 269 8. Transt!oruuition of more into le^s complicated structures ib, LECTURE XVI. Style of Subjects. 1. Philologico-structural feature of an Author ... 272 2. The various subjects necessitate various Styles ... ib. 3. Table of subjects with their distinguishing structures... 273 TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE 4. The subject of Mathematics ... ... ... 274 5. „ of Science — Botany ... ... 275 6. „ of Zoology ... ... ... 276 7. ,, of Experimental Physics and Chemistry ... 277 8. „ of Law — Indian Penal Code ... ... 278 9. „ of Medicine — Pharmacopoea ... ... ib. 10. „ of Poetry— Rhyme and Blank- Verse ... 280 Examination Cluestions on Stylography ... 282 APPENDIX. Recognition of Words and their Classification i — xxxviii Classification of Pakts of Speech ... xxxix Nomenclature of Structures and FouMULiE ib. THE STYLOGRAPHY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. INTRODUCTION. rriHE basis of this work is observation — pure philological observation drawn from examples in writing of possibly diversified character ; and its humble pretension is chiefly to arrive at some short, intelligible, and at the same time throughly illustrative system of teaching, by which students, even those who have not made much advance might become capable of comprehending simultaneously the Parsing and Analysis of the English language, by certain mathematical reasonings. The demonstrations of the govern- ment in Parsing and Structure in Analysis are the two principal objects kept in view ; these demonstrations are made to depend upon observation, and scarcely any deeper intellectual consideration has been its scope. Observation being prior to reasoning, it has been thought proper to burden the student with its weight antecedent to that of exercising the intellectual powers. The deeper intellectual consideration of any writing, or in other words its rhetoric, is an after-worh that would be easier with the knowledge derived from this condensed but observational sort of study, which this book seeks to lay before beginners. Language when brought into writing is nothing more than a mathematical demonstration of thought, the alphabet being the basic symbols, an arrangement of grouped symbols its words, a systematic arrangement of* these its phrases, while a combination of words, or words and phrases, constitutes the sentence-chain of symbolic thought. Its punctuations on i^e other hand may be considered as brackets of mathe- matics. Language, therefore, is mathematics in its elementary stage, but unlike the higher sciences, not yet abbreviated into still smaller compass or '•'•formuW for comprehension. If, therefore, I have borrowed symbols from chemical formulse, powers and brackets from algebra or conies, perpendicular lines from music-charts, and dots, digits and the plus signs from arithmetic, —leaving the pwictuations intact and applied them according to circumstances to formulate writing, it is only because I wish to introduce mathematical reasonings in literature, or, in other words, to substitute condensation for expansion. Attempts have been made at the outset to symbolize the materials of structure, for which two kinds of stones or bricks have been introduced : tliese are the Noun-stone with symbol N and the Verh-stone with symbol V . As the structure of a sentence is continued by elongation, juxtaposition of these stones one after the other, is all that we have to make, the bonds of union being sidewise, and there being no binding material whatever between them. The V brick with its auxilliary A is founjd likewise to exist in two other subsequent varieties of bricks — the Infini- tive Verb IV and Participle Verb PV. There are, therefore, HI four essential symbol-bricks that have been used — the one of N and the three of Vs excepting their auxiliary. Ante- and post-joiners, called modifiers or qualifiers to the chief N and Y bricks, have likewise been brought in, and the V brick with its preceding auxiharies may have also an intermediate set of inter-joiners between them and between the two or three auxiliaries. These joiners are applicable to all Ns and the three varieties of Vs wherever they may be seen. Ante- and post-joining Adverbs may be considered as sub-joiners to Adjective-joiners of Ks, while Prepositional Phrases may sometimes be sub-joiners to other prepositional phrases or to adjective post-joiners of Ns too. Adverb post-joiners of V may sometimes be sub-joiners to other adverbs or adjective post-joiners of Vs, while Prepositional Phrases may sometimes- be sub-joiners to other prepositional phrases, or to adjective or adverb post-joiners of Vs too. Digital representation of the Joiners and Sub- joiners and the Symbolic representation of the bricks have been framed for the four essential Formulce of Ns, and three Vs. One grand, almost general rule however pervades the whole as regards the arrangement of materials used in structure, and this is the alternate juxtaposition of the N and V bricks to the extent of the 9th Term, i.e., four-and- a-half pairs of them — unless increased by tke same alternate arrangements by the addition of IV or IV | ^N" and PV or PV | N, i.e., 10th or 10th and 11th terms. This construction (Structure 1) is the simplest one, and is called the simple or IVCoilO-simple sentence in its narrative or assertive character, the word "mono" being used with reference to the first pair of N | V in contrast with two such first pairs in Di-simple or Co-ordinate sentence. From IV the minimum, medium and maximum number of such groupai arrangements, these sentences have been named Mini- muxn^ Medium and Maximum simple sentences with their respective rational formula3 as P2, P^, Pg. One variety of Medium and two varieties of Maximum sentences may, however, be incomplete when their Vs are wanting in their N governments. Increase in the number of terms or bricks of each set or kind, or increase in the number of joinefs (qualifiers or modifiers) or sub-joiners (qualifiers or modifiers of joiners) of each variety or their respective analogues even, necessitates the use of cement or mortar, i.e.. Conjunctions, in these simple sentences. As exceptions of the modifier class, Pronominal Adjective, Adjective, Adverb and Prepositional Phrases are repeated where no conjunctions beconie visible, while their absence between the two IT bricks of a term so increased, with or without an Article to the second IT whether preceded or not by a comma, indicates that they are apposition Ns. In these Ns, therefore, the first development of a punctuative comma appears in their midst. Appositions by the connectives ' as', by past participles 'called' or 'named' and both by past participle and connective 'known as' are also shown. Apposi- tion Ns are equivalents of capacity in one and the same term, while equivalent Ns are but apposition Ns in different terms with intermediate V term of ' Be' or 'the Passive form' as the case may be. Conjunctions of Mono-simple sentences are met with in two distinct groups — the mono-groupal and the bi-groupal — the former is seen as single, dual, triple or phrasial ; the latter as dual-separate or co-ordinate. The first co-ordinate, however, when the post-joiner of V is increased jOT compounded by two or three words, is repeated in as many places as the jnumber of those words are when compound conjunction 'and' of the mono-groupal variety combine with the last of the 1st co-ordinates forming here the conjoined bi- mono-groupal variety ; and hence Conjunction connectives may become tri- or quadri- groupal when viewed along with the second Co-ordinate. Conjunctions of simple sentences have likewise been called 'minor or simple conjunctions' (Conjunc- tion, Class 1), firstly — the mono-groupal variety which place themselves between similar terms, joiner or sub-joiner Parts of Speech and Phrases, or between such parts of speech and their analogous phrases, and secondly — the bigroupal variety, which form similar or dissimilar Unions. Similar Minor Co- ordinate Conjunctions form similar unions in the dual increase of a term, joiner or sub-joiner one before each such increase, while Dissimilar Co-ordinate Minor Conjunctions, one before Adverb and another before Adjective, are seen with post-joiners of Vs, the latter being subordinate to the former. Similar posi- tions of first co-ordinate Conjunction before an adverb, or an adjective, or both adverb and adjective after Vs and the second co-ordinate before the subordinate and governed IVs, are seen ; thus showing, that besides Parsing government a term may be subordinate to its predecessor. When Term Subordinations of this kind exist, extension of the Principal Sentence P beyond the 9th term is visible. Then again, when the increase in terms or their joiners is beyond two or more than two in number, both punctuative and (compound) conjunctional intervention becomes necessary, — the punctuative comma between all but the last of their pairs and the Conjunctions between the last pairs of such consecutive increase. Now as to the recognition of words for their Parts of Speech it is to be remarked that except the Ns, the Vs and their adjective-joiners (for adverbs derived from adjectives are easy of recognition by the suffix ^ly*) the number of words in the remaining Parts of Speech are but a handful (151 + 119 = 270) in the language, while they themselves are most numerous and constitute its main bulk. It is a fortunate cir- cumstance, however, that though adjectives may appear plentiful and difficult to be grasped by beginners, their suffixial and prefixial recognition with such list given, is enough for learners to know them on the whole, while strange to remark there are only 285 unrecognizable words of this kind (of which a lislt is also given for complete reference) and thus the great bug-bear of recognizing Adjectives has been made to disappear. The same method of suffixial and prefixial recogni- tion of Ns and Vs given in lists being adopted, there remain but 1,181 pure Ks and 562 pure Vs whose lists are also given. The Bi-tri-quadri-quinque Parts of Speech group of words are, 1,930 in all as given in the appendix. In the whole range of words, therefore, the English language presents but 4,228 unrecognizable words which beginners may commit to memory when learning their spelHng and fortunately too these are mostly or all mono-syllabic. Loose, emphatic, or absolute, ungoverning or ungovemed bricks of different nature, allied or not to those already des- cribed, are sometimes seen beginning the simple structure '(Interjection, Vocative Pronoun, Vocative Noun) but they are Belf-sufficient and do not hold any bond of union in Parsing to the main structure, and either remain loose there or under certain circumstances go at its termination in different ex- pressions. These Parts of Speech have been called Absolute ones, for they neither join any term nor have any Parsing relation with the main sentence. Nevertheless they begin to ^ sliow forth traces of union to P by way of development from loose absolute bricks to those of the Absolute Incomplete Structures that go to unite with them.- 'And', the proto-type of Conjunction, is seen between the Vocative Nouns which ^o take their ante- and ^osi-joiners and these latter also in their turn may take ' and ' too, according to necessity. Loose incomplete structure with N but without V and followed by PV and its suite are seen and they are the absolute N | PV incomplete structures th-at take their place either before or after a simple sentence. Analogous to the N I PV Absolute, N | IV Absolute exists. They form inde- pendent unions but no subordinate combinations to the Ps. The alternate arrangement of the bricks is departed from, however, in the first pair of N and V, by inversion into V and N, by the system of arrangement called ^Trans- position' — seen even in the Narrative Expression under certain conditions, (as first position of certain Adverbs, and Pronomi- nal Adjectives) but as a rule this inversion is methodic in the Imperative, Interrogative., and sometimes in the Exclamatory Expressions in their simple form. When in the Interrogative ^nd Imperative, V has an auxiliary seated bef are it, N takes its seat between them. Transposition of the bricks or joiners in a simple sentence with or without inversion is only possible either by reason of emphasis, preservation of balance, vhen there is an absolute or incomplete structure, or for prevention of elongated repetition of post-joining phrases of V by overcrowding. Adjective modifiers of first IN" alone change its seat by emphasis from ante to post-position. This variety of transposition is Trans- position posterior and must be recognized from the general method which is anterior. Other transpositions amongst ante-joiners of the N are also visible. Transposition of V itseK separating from its auxiliary to the first seat in the sentence, inseparable adverbs or prepositions of V, its separate adverbs, adjective or post-joining prepositional phrases may also obtain their first seats in the sentence by virtue of emphasis or prevention of overcrowding, or when the N at the end of a preposition phrase-joiner to Y, requires enlargement by Relative or Conjunction Subordination. A second N may have by emphasis this first seat likewise. It may have its seat between V and post-joiners, especially when the second N is a Personal Pronoun or when it has its ante-joiner only. P V or IV may get transposed with its suite of government to the first seat in the sentence as independent stone by emphasis or always retaining its first seat by sequence or precedence of action of V to that of PV or IV in which cases they are Absolute. When PV is seen to follow any N it becomes its post-joiner. IV likewise becomes post- joiner to any N. Unlike the algebraic a;, N is a fixed but varied quantity. Substitute or proxy bricks for the Noun-brick or their analogues together with their symbols have also been mentioned : — (Pars. Pron.)^, (Adject.)^ (Pron. Adj.)^ (IV)^ (PV)^ (R'Y, (C0^ iC''>C"'y, (quotation)^ The N may be substituted by PP (personal pronoun) or when it becomes absent it is represented by such of its ante-joiners as the adjective or PA (pronominal adjective) ; IV and PV with their suites may also take the functions of N. The three subordinate sentence-substitutes or sentence-analogues of N IX have, moreover, been considered, and later on quotation analogues are shown as N substitutes. In structural consideration a Mono-simple sentence has been seen to be made up of N and Y in a group of two terms or such repetition to 4J groups or nine terms ; but when Parsing is to be considered, we must look upon them in groups of firstly of two, subsequently of three for three times and lastly of two again as depicted in this formula and diagram : — Complete Maximum Sentence. A , 2nd. Maximum Sentence. 1st. Max. Sent. Medium Sentence. Minimum. I j Sentence. \ | 1 2 3 4 4^- N I V,| N I IV I N I IV I N I IV I N- O) . >H O ^ o £ s '^'b a 1234567 8 9.. .Terms. 2 3 3 3 2 ...Groups in Parsing. PVs may take the places of IVs in the above term. Also second or subsequent N bricks may be wanting when they form a group of two instead of three in the aforesaid Parsing group. The first term governs the second term as shown in the diagram, the second governs the third and fourth, the fourth governs the fifth and sixth, the sixth governs the seventh and eighth, and lastly the eighth governs the ninth term only. Ante-, inter-, and post-joiners should be parsed as joiners to Ns and Vs the independent bricks, and the sub- joiners as joined to the joiners. In the prepositional phrase-joiner or sub-joiner the Preposition governs the ending N, personal pronoun PP, pronominal adjective PA, or the adjective. Having thus considered the structure of a Mono-simple sentence and its government in parsing, we have taken up the consideration of other structures. A Mono-simple sentence has been observed not to begin with a Relative or with a Con- junction but that a N stone is its basis in its untransposed form. Structures of the same Mono-simple type are seen, however, to begin with a Relative-stone or Relative-joiner or with a Conjunction mortar ; but they never remain alone and are always placed after or before the Mono-simple sentences already described. Hence they are Mono-simple Subordinates and have been styled the Relative Subordinate R* (Structure 2) and the Coi\junction Subordinate C* (Structure 3) both being subordinate to the principal or chief Mono-simple structure. Both these Subordinates may be subordinate to the whole of the Principal or subordinate to certain terms or joiners (Parts of Speech) in the Principal. Hence they are Integral or Fractional Subordinates with two distinct sets of mono-groupal Conjunction (Conjunction Class 2, Integral Subordinate), (Conjunction Class 3, Frac- tional Subordinate), one respectively for each. Relative Frac- tional Subordinates unconnected by any conjunction to the Principal are subordinates to N, PP, or PA and Adjective taking the functions of N. They are subordinates to such chief Ns or such minor Ks in post-joining prepositional phrases of Ns and Vs. At the blending of the Antecedent and the Relative in the Compound Relative Pronouns ' what \ Whoever' &c., a distinct and riveted variety of combination of tiie principal to the subordinate structure is shown ; and all these by single C« or R* are complexes by Mono- Subordinate with rational formula as for instance : — (a) P^C^ ; P2 2C*4 ; {b) F^W^ ; PglR^s- Conjunction Subordinates are subordinates to Vs and to such post-joiners of Ys, as Adjective or Adverb or to both by mono-grourpal conjunctions. Subordinates to Adjective positive and Adjective superlative which are the post-joiners to verb ' Be' are also shown. The Adjectives here being analogous to Past Parti- ciple verbs, form the ' passive ' by their sense. All the above are the mono-groupal subordinate structure series — Fractional and Integral. Subordination to joiners in the Principal also occurs by bi-groupal or co-ordinate conjunction (Conjunction Class 4, Co-ordinate) ; and the Subordinate sentence (Co- ordinate Conjunction Subordinate) elliptical or non-elliptical, becomes subordinate to adjective positive compared in its own positive state (comparison of equality) or to positive adjective or adverb un-compared or to un-compared adverb and adjective combined, (the Subordinate being non-elliptical here) all of which are nevertheless post-joiners to Ys in the Principal. Here the first co-ordinate conjunctions take their seat before these post-joiners of Ys and the second co-ordinate conjunction begins the Mono-simple Subordinate with rational formula as for instance : — F^c'^G"'^. The first co-ordinate conjunction, however, when the post-joiner of Y is increased or compounded by two or three words, is repeated in as many places, as the number of these words are, and hence conjunction connectives may become tri- or qmtdn-^rotipal when viewed along with the second co-ordinate which begins the sub- ordinate sentence. Besides the pure conjunction co-ordinate, the adverb and conjunction or z^/ce t^ersa co-ordinates, compara- tive adjective and conjunction co-ordinates exist. The com- xu parative prefixes and suffixes of diminution or excess, or the irregular and regular comparative adjectives themselves co- ordinate with the pure conjunctions of the elliptical or non-elliptical Subordinate Sentences. Certain Pronominal Adjective, co-ordinate with certain Relative Subordinates too with rational formula as for instance — PgC'^R^^g, All these are the (Structure 4) Fractional Co-Ordinate Subordinate Structures. In combination again of the Principal P'and the Subordi- nate S, the fractional Relative and Conjunction Subordinates, besides being Initials or Terminals, are Intermediates @ to the Principals. Conjunction Subordinate sentences simple when intermediately placed in the Principal are in fact apposition-sentences to the chief (1st) ISTs of the Principal. When Mono-simple Subordinates are terminals or when such terminals can be made into initials to the P, we have called these combinations respectively as Simple Combinative (P)(S) or Permutative (P)(S), (S)(P). The co-ordinately subordinate combination has been called ''^Locked'' (gj|) in contrast to the Simple Combinative or Permutative which are outside the pale of the P. Instances have been shown that simple Co-ordinate Subordinate sentence might be dissolved into the simple Combinative variety of integral Subordination by the first Co-ordinate Conjunction going to approximate the second Con- junction Co-ordinate and thus become an Integral Conjunction Subordinate. Again Co-ordinate Subordinate structures may simulate Mono-co-ordinate Principal structures by taking this first Co-ordinate Conjunction in its transposition by emphasis to the first seat in the P. Combination by Riveiment (|jg), occurs in the P and Compound Relative Subordinate when the antecedents in the compound relative go to terminate or Xlll begin the P and the relative to begin the Relative Subor- dinate structure. The basis C and R of the two kinds of Subordinates has been shown to remain ' understood ' thus showing analogy of their structural combination. Punctuative isolation is absent in both from the Ps when they are understood ; but when expressed, it is in R* that a comma may sometimes precede it. By the different kinds of combination (the Terminal or Simple Combinative, the Initial or Terminal Permutative, the Intermediate, the Locked, and the Riveted) of the Subordinates to the P, the structures so combined are called Complex Of the Mono-simples- When both initial and the terminal Conjunction Subordinations exist to the V of the P principal sentence with rational formula as for instance : 2C*3P2 2C*4 or when a medial R" to N first term and a terminal C* to the V term of the P with rational formula as for instance : — P2lR*32C'4 or when a medial R« to first Nand another R« to post-joiner N of Vs or to subsequent N terms with rational formula as for instance : — PglR'sfR^ or PglR^SR*^ exist too — Complexity by Di-subordination happens. In this former instance both the Subordinates are subordinates to the one V thus differentiating the Conjunction Subordinate from the Relative Subordinate which cannot similarly be dual subordinate to the one N. Subordination of C* and R* singly, on either or both sides of P are the Mono or Di-Subordinate series. The compounds of Mono or Di-subordinates happen by repetion of the subordinates by Compound Conjunctions dealt with later on (R*-|-R* or C* + C*). Sub-subordination by a second repeated subordination to the first is also shown, the structure being then called Complex by Bi-sub» ordination with rational formula — P2 2C''3 2C^*3. The XIV word di- is used when there are two subordinates, one on each side, or on medial and terminal side of the P ; bi- is used when both subordinates are on any side but the second subor- dinate is sub-subordinate to the first. Both the Relative and Conjunction Subordinates follow the sadaoie rule oi this Sub-sub- ordination with rational formula for example : — V^B.'^^'R^'^; P22C*22C2*3. They are the Bi-subordinate series. Bat when the same repetition of Sub-subordination occurs beyond the second or third up to the fifth such repetition, the Relative and Conjunction Subordinatioa must alternate to bring them about to these terminations. They are the Poly- subordinate series. All these are Complexes by tri- and Quadri-Sub-subordinations with a rational formula as for instance :— P2 2€'q2C^\^B.^\2G^'qBII^\. 2>i-Bi- or Bi-Di-Subordination to the P happen also, the first one having a single Subordination before and a sub-subordinated Subordinate after the P, while in the second the Subordinate and sub-subordinate Subordinate are vice versa in their position to the P. Another class of complexity arises by substitution of a mono, di or co-ordinate Complex Structure in place of a Mono-simple Subordinate. Hence they are Complex of Complexes by mono, di- or co-ordinate Complex Subordinations with rational formula for example : — (1) P22C(P22C-3)-. (2) P22C(2C«3P22C»3)'3. (3) P22C(CT3C"PJ«. Wo come now to the next Structure in which two P structures of the Mono-simple type each headed by corres- ponding or Co-ordinate Conjunction (Conjunction Class 5, the XV chief Co-ordinates) are seen (Structure 5). They have been called Di-simple or IMLonOi^o-orclinate Principals in contrast to the Mono-simple P variety and these Di- simple principals are co-ordinate compounds of Grammarians with rational formula as : — CPgCPg. By increase of the second co-ordinate conjunction at times by a third or more of the same, Di-simple P may be termed Tri-ox Poly-co-ordinates. Certain complexities of each of these Ps, by subordination analogous to the Mono-simple Ps, have also been shown to happen equally or unequally with rational formulas as for instance : — (1) CT3fC%, C'T,p^3. (2) C'P^, C-P22C»3. Sub-subordinations and Compounds of subordination in these Ps, do also occur and these are not rare with rational formulse as for instance : — (1) C'P2,C"P2fR*33R2«22C»22C2«22C3*2. (2) CT,2CVfC%,G"P,4C''3. Substitution of a Mono-co-ordinate like the Complex Subordinate in place of a Mono-simple Subordinate already described is likewise seen with rational formulae as for instance :— P22C(CT2C"P2)'. Mono-co-ordinates by 'wheather-or' are always subor- dinate to Ps, and at time the analogue of N with rational formulee as for instance : — (1) P22C(CT2 C'T^)* (2) (C'P3 C'Psf in a P,. Mixed complexity both by Mono-simple and Mono-co- ordinate substitutive subordination are visible which might be XVI reckoned as belonging to the Di-subordinate variety with rational formulae as for example :— 2C*^P22C(C'P2C"P2)». The next structure (Structure 6) is the Mono-COm- pound sentence Pg + P^ in which two or more Mono-simple Ps alone or with their respective Mono-subordinates as in P22C'3 4-P2lE*3 or Substitutive subordinates as in two or more Mono-co-ordinates first or second as in (1) CT + C'P,C"P3 (2) C'PgC^T^Tc^P,, both the complexes of Mono-co-ordinates as in CT22C*3 + CT3lR''3 +C'T22C'3 + C"P3lR*3, and other Complexes might be brought in union (but not combined as the above described Complexes or Co-ordinates) each to each or with each other by certain conjunctions called Compound or uniting conjunctions (the Compound conjunction, Class 6). The compound unions besides being conjunctional may be punctuative by — , ; : or both punctuative and conjunctional. The differentiation of the powerful or strong compound conjunctions from others of its class is that they are omissible by punctuative substitutes, while no others admit of this omission and substitution. The less powerful or strong compound conjunctions among them unite only two structures, while the more powerful or strong ones unite two or more. In considering the combination and union of structures we have till now observed only the ' Period ', the note of In- terrogation and Admiration that terminate each variety. But XVll pronominal parts of speech relation as those of PP and PA besides being within the period, might also go heyond it, while independent or distinct sentences or sentence, each ended by a ■period, may so combine or unite according as the Conjunctions are Integral Subordinate or Compound, to form Complexes or Compounds. The consideration of period has led again to call sentences as Mono^ Ui- and Poly singles in the same Paragraph. Analogous relations, unions, and combinations do likewise occur in consecutive Paragraphs. Parenthetic words, phrases, and sentence structures go between the details of the P, and like loose stones or incom- plete absolute structures, bear no relation or rarely apposition relation in Parsing with the P. Parenthetics are Narratives thrown between Narratives [Narrative-ParentTietic) and ana- logous to them are the Direct-Narratives, the Narrative in which exactly plays the Parenthetic roll — being itself mostly a (Minimum) Mono-simple Pothrown at the end. A modification of it, the Narrative-Direct, occurs in which the Direct speech is thrown at the end of the structure, so that the whole Direct might be considered as a third Term in continuation of the Narrative. The exact counterpart of a Narrative-Parenthetic in Direct-Narrative with medial Narrative is very frequent. Transformation of Active Expressions into Passive in Ps and Subordinates and vice versa and the Direct-Narrative or Narrative-Direct into Narrative have been shown. Classification of Conjunctions and Structures have thus been shown to go hand in hand, and this dual method of recognition, I believe, would not be a small gain to beginners in learning the roll which conjunctions play in the various structures. Apposition of Terms and Joiners to form the Mono-simples ; of 2 Di-simple sentences each headed by a Co-ordinate Conjunction to form the Mono-co-ordinate ; the substitution of Relative in place of Noun and initial or co-ordinate position of Conjunc- tions in Mono-simples again to form the different Subordi- nates to both Mono-simple and Mono-co-ordinate Principals ; the combination of a Mono-simple and a Mono-co-ordinate . Subordinate to a Mono-simple Principal to form a Mixed Com- plex ; and the Compounds formed by uniting conjunctions in Mono-simples, in Mono-subordinates, and in Mono-co-ordi- nates have all been thus shown to be in gradual series of development — the l^nowledge or comprehension of the one bringing on knowledge or comprehension of the other. How far or to what extent Conjunctions, Prepositions, and Adverbs are connectives have also been shown by way of analogy. And lastly Transformation of various structures one from the other or between each other so far as is structurally feasible or in other words Casting and Recasting of Structures have been shown. Having thus related in philological bearing the various structures that constitute writing, it becomes necessary now to dwell cursorily on the symbols, digits, brackets, and powers used in this work for favouring the art Of Stylography. In the Detail or Graphic Formula? the symbols are but initial letter or letters of the Parts of Speech. The brackets large, and small at the same time single, double, and triple have been used as distinctive indicators of eacli variety of sentences, the different Principals and Subordinate- ; ami the ' p)0wers to indicate their principal and subordinate character in each combination or union. The small plus or c expresses 'minor or simple conjunction' which is mono-groupal, and c' c" bi-groupal (co-ordinate), within simple sentences. XIX Large C C" before each P indicate the Co-ordinate Principals. The large plus alone remains isolated as distin- guisher of really compound or united sentences, Principals, Subordinates, or Co-ordinates &c. Dashes ' and " are put above each of the Co-ordinate Conjunction. Perpendicular lines have been used as separators of individual stones or terms, being large in simple, and small in subordinate and in sub-subordinate structures. Small figures between perpendicular lines and one on each side of symbols denote Parts of Speech and Phrases and italics or thick symbols have been put or made to point out the relation firstly — of Ante- cedent and Relative ; secondly — of Parts of Speech or Phrases or a part of speech and its analogous phrases on each side of a minor Conjunction ; thirdly — in apposition Ns. A large Asterisk in the middle of a sentence between per- pendicular lines shows the position of chief brick removed by transposition to initial or other places in the sentence which again begins at the transposed place with its indicative asterisk. In case of transposition of joiners a small one is thus utilized. To prevent elongation of a Graphic Formula, the repetition of analogous and apposition parts of speech, phrases, terms, and sentence structures has been written digitally, or symbolically one beneath the other in different lines being followed by conti- nuation of its suite if any. Figure before R* or C* in the Rational formula indicates the respective Term in the P to which R* or C* is subordinate. The numerator of fraction in like place indicates the same but its denominator or sub-deno- ininator indicates joiner or sub-joiner to which R* or C* is subordinate. In the Rational or Abstract Formula figure beneath and a little in front of the Structure symbol, re- presents the number of Terms in the Structure. XX Thus is shown the stylographic demonstration or general appHcation of digits, symbols, symbolic powers, and brackets to writing ; with the Detail or Graphic Formulae of Parsing and Analysis combined through these agencies and eventually the different character of the writings of different authors by the H>ational Pormulae alone. It may be pertinently remarked that Sentences are but Sums for work, Detail or Graphic Formulae are the Processes of work and the Abstract or Rational Formulae are but Answer's worked out. Criticism on Detail or Graphic formula and the Abstract or Rational formulae concludes the peculiar or general character of the writings of individual authors as regards structure and thus these conclusions are arrived at, I might be permitted to say,, by mathematical reasonings based upon examples and pure observation^ The chief utility of this work besides its conspicuousness on points of Philology, is as help to memory, recitation, and composition by showing forth gradual landmarks in each. This would, I may venture to say, be a great gain to students ; while^ the teachers will derive the same amount of relief in their Works during the hours of literature as they do now when engaged in teaching mathematics. How far I have succeeded in giving mathematical reasoning to philological demonstration of any writing, remains for the student to grasp or the teacher to im- press upon the student, but all I desire is that they should not desert this method of scientific demonstration till they find it practically useless or beyond juvinile comprehension or till the teacher cannot invent modification and addition moiv intelligible. r.^ ^nt^^'^y^'^'^Von. \ THE AUTHOR. The 25th Dec. 1894. j LECTURE Students and Gentlemen, It is known to all that the principal Parts of Speech in a language are the Noun and the Verb, all others being their Proxies, Substitutes, Derivatives or yarieties, Analogues, Joiners^ Sub-Joiners and Connectives, while an independent series exists also which may be called the Emphatic or Absolute series. With a view to arrive at a complete method of the process intended to demonstrate gradually on the arrangement of all these with reference to Parsing: and Analysis in the English language, by means of symbols, signs, and formulae, you have first of all to work up a Noun Table and then base upon it the Noun rormula. You will find with very little trouble of observation that a Noun may be alone, or that it has got certain other Parts of Speech qualifiers or modifiers as Ante-joiners, and the same with phrase complements as Post-joiners in series. Taking, therefore, those that place themselves before, as well as those Ihat come after in groups, the expanded table of a noun may be struck as follows : — Proxies of N : Personal and Relative Pronouns. Sitbstitutes of N : Pronominal Adjectives and Adjectives, when the Ns are absent ; Adverbs. Derivatives or Varieties of V : Infinitives and Participles. Aiialogues of N : The IVs and PVs. Joiners of N : Article Adjectives, Pronominal Adjectives, Possessives and Prepositional Phrases. Joiners of V : Adverbs, Adjectives, and Prepositional Phrases. Sub-joiners (joiner's joiner) : Adverbs to Adjectives ; Prepositional Phrases to Adjective, Adverb, and other Prepositional Phrases. Connectives : Conjunctions. Absolute Series: Interjections. STYLOGRAPHY OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5S No SP .^ Ho ' ffl +3 ft _ !4 © H3 © 'T3 fl jl O ^ d 03 © '^^ o ^ © • rg O (D .;_ rj .Pi I- c3 3 w 'S "H 00 OQ P 3 55 f-SOo'iJc«SO©SO©_^©'rtO(D 0<»d®wSaM2 Sicw d »i5 o « LECTURE I. 6 Remarks : — It is seen that the ditferent series placed before the Noim are series of distinct Parts of Speech while those that follow it are combined series of parts of speech and phrases. Pronominal Adjectives, Adjectives, Adverbs and the Preposition Phrases may be repeated to certain consecutive numbers though the preposition phrases in some instances might admit an adverb, an adjective or both between them. It may be remarked also that an Adverb alone cannot exist as ante-joiner to a Noun but that an adjective must always follow it to which it is direct- ly joined. Hence this series may be called the sub-joiner series. Adjective rarely takes its place alone (unless for emphasis)' after a noun or with its predecessor adverb. When an adjective is placed after a noun it has sometimes to be followed by a preposition phrase. In parsing, therefore, the Adverb beforef and the Preposition Phrase after an Adjective, should be joined to it but both collectively should be joined to the Noun. Eepetitions of preposition phrases occur as Sub-Joiners to their predecessor and when an adverb, adjective, or both intervene ' between them these become Sub-Joiners to the final N of the preceding prepositional phrase. Sub-Joiners, therefore, should be hyphened together to show their qualifying or modifying character to the joiners in general writing. A noun alone or with its ante-joiners if preceded by a preposition becomes the Preposition Phrase and when so formed has always to come after a noun. A preposition phrase, there- fore, cannot precede a noun. When so found it must be under- stood that it is placed there by transposition as will be seen afterwards, in consideration of emphasis on them. As an exception to the general rule a Preposition Phrase, the suV)stitute of an Adjective, may take the ante-place of an adjective. Ante- and post joining adverbs may be considered as sub-joiners to adjective-joiners of Ns, while preposition phrases may sometimes be sub-joiners to other preposition phrases or to adjective or adverb post- joiners of Ns. Adverb post-joiners of V may sometimes be sub-joiners to other adverbs and adjectives, while preposition phrases may sometimes be sub- joiners to other preposition phrase or adjective or adverb post-joiners of Vs as will be shown later on. Let me now illustrate the Noun Table to examples. STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. . o ® pin o V-^ CN < ffi S a O 'Si) ^ cS -2 ^ i t^S ■© '=^ c3 c3 g O +3 c3 e*H Oi rr r-i ^ ^ o ^ -:^ S^ O. ^ p 53 S V-,~Ci c- CO c S I; '^ . g i s^ J^ n3 ^ ri4 O o <^ o o ^ »-i N* CC rfl »0 :0 l> O) oi . '^ -=3 !-; «e _C 13 <1 H H <5WH 2. 2 = 2 + 3 „ 3. 2 = 3 4. 2 (of compd. N) = 3 to the 2nd N 5. NP = 3 JV.B. Adverb, adjective, and NP are convertible to Pre- position Phrases. Illustrations of the above. 1. An intellectually-weak nian=A man weak-in-intellect. ll 1 2 N =ii N 2 3 (3 sub-joiner to 2). = A man of weak intellect. 2. A delightful entertainment = An entertainment full-of de- ii 2 N 1^ N 2 3 light (3 sub- joiner to 2). 3. An intelligent person =A person of intelligence. ii 2 N ii N 3 4. The sun-beams =The beams of the sun. 1^ N • - 1^ N 3 5. A man's life =The life of a man. 1^ 1^ N 1^ N 3 It will not be out of place here to enumerate the words of each series of the noun table so far as they can be known or recognized. The first or special ante- joiner series have but 42 words and one variety of words in all. Tluis — 1. Article Adjective A A has 3 words ") Non-recogniz- 2. Pronominal Adjective PA 25 do. > able. 3. Personal Pronoun PossessivePPP 14 do. J (SeeAj^pendix) 4. Noun possessive NP"| 1 Variety of words 5. Pronominal Adjective > (Recognizable by suffix's &c.). Possessive PAP J LECTURE I. 9 The Sub-joiner series (Adverbs) have but 15 words and one variety of words as follow : — 15 words non-recognizable, (See -Appendix). One variety of words recognizable by suffix 'ly'. The second ante-joiner series (Adjectives) very plentiful in number have the following methods of recognition : — A.— Adjectives (recognizable). 1. Suffixial 80 varieties. 2. Prefixo-suffixial 54 words. ' 3. Prefixial with Roots 31 varieties. 4. Prefixial with words (non-recognizable first group) 9 words. B.— Adjectives (non-recognizable). 1. Pure, Regular 285 words ; Irregular 54 words. 2. Irregular Past Participial Adjectives 27 words. 3. Irregular Past Participle with adverb Prefix 9 varieties. The Noun itself also very numerous may be recognized by the following methods. A.— Recognizable Nouns. 1. Suffixial 158 varieties (Derivatives and Observational). Word Suffixial 9 varieties. 2. Prefixo-suffixial 1 3. Prefix with Roots > 140 varieties. 4. Prefix with Words j B.— Non-recognizable Nouns. 1. Pure 1,181 words. 2. Participle, Present 1 variety. 3. Do., Past 1 variety. 10 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. The Post-joiner first and second Series are recognized as the Ante-sub-joiner and 2ad series. The third series of Post-joiners are recognised by their initial prepositions which are 55 non-recognizable words and one recognizable variety. References for all recognitions should be made at the Appendix, Besides the above reference another important point for recognition of words are their position with' reference to the different series, the recognition of either the one that precedes or the one that follows being sufficient for the purpose. Lastly the Dictionary or the teacher may be consulted as the case may be. The proxy "part of speech of iVis the Personal Pronoun which is always naked. As first term or chief N its number is only 8. For the Substitutes or Representatives of N we have the parts of speech Pronominal Adjective and Adjectives, the former always anteriorly naked but the latter ante-joined by 'the' while both may have their Post- joiners like those of Noun. The proxy of N belongs to the class of independent parts of speech while the substitutes are but from the class of Ante-joiners of N both belonging to the Adjective class un-inflexible or indexible. Analogues of N in IVs and PVs and in different kinds of sentence structures and Quotations will be dealt with in their proper places. IV and PV alone or with their suites of government will also'.be dealt with after their descriptions in the simple sentence. LECTURE IL Students and Gentlemen, It has already been shown to you in the preceding table and formula that the Sub-joiners and second Joiners of Ante- and the first and second of Post- joiners o£ Nouns are alike. Analogy and observation will lead you now to construct the Verb Table and the Verb Formula, the verb being the next independent and important part of speech we have to deal with. You have thus the following as the verb table : — Ante-joiners. Post-joiners. (Parts of Speech and Phrase (Parts of Speech and Phrase Series.) Series.) ( ' ^ ( * — > Special first Joiner. 1st J. or 2nd J. 3rd J. or Sub-joiner. Sub-joiner. Adv. Prep. Phrase. Verb Adv. Adj. Prep. Phrase. Remarks : — The only Part of Speech that precedes a Verb is the Adverb. It may be single or dual ; it alone is the special ante-joiner to the verb. Sometimes a prepositional phrase may become its substitute. The joiners that follow a verb and are almost exclusive for it, are the combination of the adverb with the prepositional phrase. The other combinations (1 2 3) are alike to Ns and Vs. We may have all, any, or some of them absent from the Verb as we have remarked before regarding the joiners of the Noun. The repetitions of prepositional phrases are alike common to Ns and Vs. In Parsing these joiners should be joined to the Vs, and the Sub- joiners to the Joiners. Joiners of other varieties of Vs and Ns should be so parsed anywhere. 'From the table we come now to the V formula ; it is as we have done with that for the N. Thus :— - Naked : (1) | V | ; Clothed : (2) ] i 3 V i 2 3 (. 12 6TYL0GRAPHY OF ENGLISH LAxNGUAGE. c3 ^ rg .2 w O o P^ I—I g rca £ CS rH E-i -s (D a> *0 <; > -iJ OJ o OQ ,>; f2 O - n:3 <<-i <5 o ^ o •l-t -♦^ a o •l-l r— « e* ,Q p< ;h <1 bD s o J3 t-l 1 ^ Q O (D f-i tj rCj .M i 1^ . •^ o o fl "S © ^ S O a bD o o Oh , E3 02 S O ^ •5 m o :3 cerC 'fe^ **-• 5 o o !> O O ^ -M s © o ^ o ■ s s •rH Q © O O 'S ^ ^ ©5H a o : % rg I; «> j- S =0 I (a CO <» s o CO Q s» 5s « • lis O '5J /J ^ iS ^ V ? S « S CO 5- <=> O ° 00C5O LECTURE II. 13 Application of illustrations to Verb Formula. Illustrations. Graphic Formulae. 1. — stood on the floor- of the great saloon ... | V 3 3 | 2. — now bloom on the spot ... ... | 1 V 3 ( 3. — was very numerous ... ... | V 1 2 j 4. — thronged to the capital ... ... | V 3 | 5. — presided in person over the assembly- of his own kindred ... ... ... | V 3 3 3 [ 6. — supped with him last night ... ... | V 3 3 | 7. — perhaps only feels by tits ... ... | 1 1 V 3 | 8. — is clever within the limits- of our own acquaintance ... ... ... | V 2 3 3 I 9. — are guilty of a very uncharitable censure- upon the rest- of the world ... ... j V 2 3 3 3 { 10. — is so true in the present instance ... | V i 2 3 | 11. — ran into the hall for a hoe- with a long handle ... ... ... I V 3 3 3 | As the Noun Formula had to suffer modification by a second formula for NP, the V Formula has to do the same on account of the Verb auxiliaries As. This modification brings on another set of joiners, the Inter-joiTiers. They may place themselves between the A and V or between any two of the three As that are their maximum grouping. Taking into consideration also the rare substitution of prepositional phrase as ante-joiner the expanded V formula with Auxiliaries would run thus : — I13A13A13A13V123I Application of illustrations to AV Formula. Illustrations. Graphic Formulae. 1. — had now arrived.,. ... ... | A 1 V | 2. — could ever have expected ... ... | A 1 A V | 3. — loas reported to him ... ... | A V 3 j 4. — would dine with him the next day ... | A V 3 3 j 5. — could not possibly have apprehended ... | A 1 1 A V j 6. —were not wanted at the guns ... | A 1 V 3 | 3 14 8TYL0GRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 7. — had better gone down ... ... | A i V i | 8. — was wrapped- up in its one strong purpose | A V 3 I 9. — was very much overcome by her kindness | A 1 1 V a | 10. — should be at once revised ... ... | A A i V | 11. — had so often dreamt ... ... I A 1 1 V I 12. — was so much exhausted by the strength of her feelings ... ... ... | A i i V 3 3 I 13. —had been so kind to her ... ... j A V i 2 3 | 14. — had been issued for her father's pardon... | A A V 3 I 15. — might not be attempted ... ... | A i A V | 16. —had been very little regarded ... | AA 1 1 V | 17. — would probably have easily been saved ... | A 1 A 1 A V ( 18. — shall quickly fall into their hands ... | A 1 V 3 I 19. — 7nust be entirely free from minor errors | A V 1 2 3 | 20. — can be successfully extricated from the region of hypothesis ... ... | A A 1 V 3 3 I 21. — may be contemporary in the same country | A V 2 3 I 22. — do not lie very deep in the Hindu mind... j A 1 V i 2 3 I 23. — is seldom very much mistahen ... | A 1 1 1 V I 24. — were in some way related to the present inhabitants of Thibet ... ... I A 3 V 3 3 | 25. — was no- doubt adopted in its fullest develop- ment directly from the Persian ritual ... I A 1 V 3 1 3 I You see, therefore, in the AV Formula in Which the anti- joiners of the simple V formula changed into inter-joiners, the introduction of Prepositional Phrases besides the Adverbs. We come now to the two other independent Parts of Speech which are but varieties or derivatives of V. They are the In- finitive verb IV and the Participle verb PV. One peculiarity is that they have blended with them Intimate Prepositions that go before each. This intimacy is so much in the case of IV that to think of its preposition apart would be sin and in case of the PV to think of any intimacy at all not to exist on the bare face of analogy would be sin too. In IVs after certain Vs and in certain PVs these prepositions do not exist at all. We shall have, therefore, to respect these intimate prepositions before framing the formulas. LECa^BE II. 15 o i ■73 e» > P4 .^ — P-i 16 STYLOQRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE, r .s *o •I— » CQ o M a n I I J3 •Pi 2 Ph o •I— » <5 «H O I ^ o o ©-MO f IS Q hi > o a o ^3 00 «H .O DD >t .X> OD "S 2ag:^a-o :2a §2^.2 I II P a> .S . O) • * 3 0.2 ^ ^ € ?. •* ^ 03 S o •f'-I.A <3 o o 11. 00 C ^ O O O O "« "iS to ■« >» i 2- P o S^ ±> o I I I I I I M M I I I I I i-H (N CO •^ O «0 t^ CO CS O tH e^ CO rt< lO LEOTUBE II. IT Application of illustrations to IV Fornmla. Illustrations. 1. — to he executed ... ... „, 2. — to he prolonged under tortures 3. — to he haunted by the ghost- of the un- fortunate pedagogue 4. — not to he discovered 5. — still to he heard in that church -6. — to have prevailed from very early times ... 7. — chiefly to he attributed v8. — virtually to have connected ... 9. — to have led eventually to very surprising results 10. — to he ever in affinity- with scientific truth 11. — m-ox&Qx-to have foreseen 12. — to have been predicted ... ... 13. — to he done for the sake- of the agent's everlasting happiness hereafter 15. 16. 17. — to have studied accordingly ... — liable to he rohhed oi the fruits- of his labour „, — to have heen very greatly miHunderstood 18. — with-a-view to have said enough on the subject Graphic Formulae. A IV I A IV 3 I A IV 3 3 I iAIV| 1 A IV 3 I A IV 3 I lAIV I iAIV| A IV 1 3 I IV 1 3 3 I 5 A IV I A A IV I A IV 3 3 1 1 AIVi I 3 A IV 3 3 [ AAiiIV I 8 A IV 1 3 I In chief Vs the three consecutive Auxiliaries are visihle while in IVs two are seen. This points out that auxiliaries •other than *Have' and 'Be' are distinct in their capacities. They may be considered as chief Vs forming compounds with other •chiefs or auxiliaries and chiefs. 18 STYLOQBAPHT OF ENQLISH LANGUAQE. In V Ft>rroiila with auxiKariee a pjist pftrtieipic of chief V is seen after 'Be' to form the Passive so is seen a present participle to form the Progressive. An adjective after ' Be' is analogous to these participles and hence the lYs have been seeji ante- joined in excess by adjectives when we consider the * Be' to have ended by itself and the adjective to have begun the IVs. The extra appearance of the adjectives is thus explained in the rV Formula. Before we proceed to frame the Tahle and Fornmla of the Farticiples certain remarks seem desirable. Like the present and perfect Infialtiv^s the Purtioipies teke or do pol tafce under circumstances intimate prepositions but unlike the IVs the^ have an additional tense, the Past. This Past Participle goes to- be joined to auxiliaries of ' Have' to form different tenses andt to those of ' Be' to fonn the Passive and thus become the chief V whose iUustratien has already been shown in the V Formula. But when the past participle becomes apparently independent or separate part of speech after Neuter Verbs, jt always drops, i.€.j not requires its intimate preposition and becomes analogous to adjective (Joiner). PV Table and Formula. Ante-joiners. Inter^ joiners. Post-joiners. p 1 < < ^ Aux. g Aux. 5 PV 3 5 a;. (rarely !• becomes ante- joiner to PV in its N capacity). Forn)nU.:-i-J. ; t a A i A i PV i a a | N.B, — Here the ante- and post- joiners coincide. LBQTtlBE n. J? Application of iltotrations to PV Formula. Graphic Formula. PV 2 1 1 PV 3 1 PV 1 8 1 PV 1 3 k |Pll3| li PV 3 3 3 j 1* j 1 2 PV 1 IllustratioDs. h -rrin^emjf bituminous 2. — vibrating at the eaiue rate 3. —pushed onwards from behind 4. — in going northwards to Canada 5. — by going still further to the north 6. — stretching-across from Prince Patrick * Island by Bathurst Island to North Devon ... 7. r-Bcarcely capable qf pioving 8. '—only doubtfully recognized in Spitz- bergen alone ... 9. — capabale of living in a considerable amount- of cold 10. — continued into the cretaceous rocks ... 11. •—in8te(jL(i of remaining at home 12. — most-convenient /or finding-out from them 13. — without being struck with the simi- larity- of the two sets- of artificers ... 14. — not having been ^kipped hy the side 15. — in not having come to conclusion 16. — in passing 'from the liquid to the solid state (co-ordinate prep, phrases) | PV 3 s | 17. — separating-up into smaller parts | PV 3 | 18. rr-|^:^eja while for the last time alluding to it| i i a PV 3 I' I 1 1 PV 3 1 1 I 2 PV 8 3 || I PV 3 I I PV 3 I I 2 PV 3 I I A PV 8 3 3 |] I 1 A APV 3 |i I A 1 PV 3 |: 20 STTLOGPAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. It may be remarked here that Adjectives do not go to form as ante-joiners to Vs but they may in certain cases be considered as such to IVs, when the V is ^ Be' and followed by an apparently adjective post- joiner. In cases of PVs both the ante- and post- joiners can coincide as in IVs. This is bilateral symmetry. Partial, but not whole, bilateral symmetry in ante- and post- joiners of Ns is visible too. The recognition of verbs of the auxiliary series is done as follows : — {See Appendix.') A.— Non-recognizaWe irregular Auxiliaries As. 1. Those Principal As that take Past Participles : — 14 woWs (Have 6 and Be 8). 2. Those Principal that take un-modified V : — 5 words (Do 5). 3. Those As that take un-modified V : — 17 words (will, can, must, shall, may). 4. Combination of the above 17 with Have and Be : — Group Duals. 5. Combination of the 17 with conjoined Have and Be : — group Triples. The total of Auxiliaries : — 70 words; Single, Dual, Triples. B— Defective Verbs. 1. Both Auxiliary and Defective : — 1 word. 2. Only Defective : — 6 verbs. C— Irregular Verbs. These are 176 words. N.B. — All words mentioned above are non-recognizable and 252 in number. D.— Regular Verbs. These are recognized by the following methods : — {See Appendix.) LECTURE II. 21 (a). — Verbs, recognizable. (Derivatives and Observational.) 1. Suffixial - ... 13 varieties. 2. Prefixo-suffixial ... 3 varieties. 3. Prefix with roots ... 13 varieties. 4. Prefix with words ... 63 varieties. (6). — Verbs, Non-recognizable. Pure Verbs ... 478 words. Bi-parts-of-speech group of words. (a). — Verb and Adjective. 1. With common suffix ' ate' 2. Non-recognizable 3. Ditto. (6). — Noun and Adjective. 1. With common suffixes 2, With common suffixes ... 19 words (verb aud adjective and vice versa). ... 10 words (verb and adjective). ... 59 words (adjective and verb). ... 62 varieties of different words. ... 28 varieties of the same words. (c). — Noun or Verb. 975 words (non-recognizable), (c?).— Verb or Noun. 716 words (non-recognizable). LECTURE III. Students and Gentlemen, In the two preceding lectures I have shown you naked and clothed formulee of N, naked and clothed formulae of V, and those of IV and PV. I have shown you the Post-joiners of all these to be one and the same and that the Ante-joiners varied substan- tially in N and V though very little in the different varieties of V, IV, and PV. I have shown you that the ante- joiners are all dependent Parts of Speech but solitarily a Prepo&itional Phrase in the case of the Vs, IVs, and P Vs ; for, the prepositional phrase and the adverb are to be borne in mind to be analogous joiners. In the present lecture I go now to relate to you of the combinations of these four Formulaa and thuja get up structures known as sentences. The combinations by apposition of the naked or unexpanded and of the clothed or expanded formulas respectively of N and V constitute the Minimiiin Moiio-siinpI& Sentexice, the word 'minimum' being used in reference to no more than these two terms of N and V ; the word ' mouo' being u^d in reference to Di- and Poly in which this first group of N I V I multiplies %o two or more than two , and the word 'simple '^ being used in reference to combination of parts of speech and not of structures : the first in contrast to medium and maximum, the second in contrast to Di-simples, or Poly •simples which are the Co-ordinate structures, and the last in contrast to Complexes and Compounds (structures)— i^ll Qf which -^^ill be considered in their gradual series of development. The Formulae of Minimum Mono-simple sentence, therefore, run to : — 1. Naked or unexpanded :— | N | V | 2. Clothed or expanded : — I Jl (i a N » J» I 1 s V J »8 I Si LECTURE III. J?- 3. Clothed or expanded with NP to N :-^ |\ll2NPl2Nl23|l3Vl23| 4. Clothed or expanded with Auxiliaries to V : — I \ I12N123I 13A13A13A13V123I 5, The fully expanded, Logical : — I \ V 1 2 NP 12N123I13A13A13A13V123J From the naked to the fully expanded formula there exist all sorts of gradation and the fully expanded one is only a matter of inferential myth. In the Abstract or Rational Formulae below, P is for Mono- simple Principal and Integer 2 represents the number of Term» in it. Application of Minimum Mono-simple sentence illnstrations tp Formula. With Graphic arid Rational Formula respectively. 1. John I sleeps. I N I V | = P„ 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 2. He I runs (here N is represented by Proxy). 1 ' a |N|V|=P, 3. Good I might proceed from evil (N represented by 1 ' 2 Adjective). | N | AV 3 |=?Pj, 24 STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. This I is desirable (N by Pronominal Adjective). 1 2 I N I V 2 |=P, 1 2 5. The flames I are within a quarter- of a mile of us. 1 ' 2 I ii N I V 3 3 3 Up. ' 1 ' 2 ' . 1 6. The interior of the vessel I is hollowed. 1 '2 I ii N 3 I AV |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 7. The experience of the trapper | was in the right. I ii N 3 I V 9 |=P2 ' 1 '2 ' S. The subtle element I seized with avidity upon its new fuel. 1 ' a I ii 2 N I V 3 3 |=P5 9. The old man I was rather perplexed. 1 ' 2 I ii 2 N I A 1 V |=P2 10. The light combustible I kindled at the flash. 1 ' 2 I i» 2 N I V 3 |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' il. The eyes of many of the lower animals | are doubtless very beautiful. I i» N s 3 I V 1 1 2 |=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 12. It I may be compared to the cup of an acorn. I N I AAV s 3 |=P, • 1 ' 2 ' LECTUBE III. 25 13. The eyelids I may perhaps be better compared to a pair- of 1 ' 2 outside shutters- for this window. |iiN|AiAiV333 Up, ' 1 ' 2 ' 14. We I are most-familiar with this portion of the eye. I N I y « . 3 a |=P, 15. Its empire over time I is scarcely less bounded. 1 ' 2 I i3 N 3 I A 1 1 V |=P2 16. A furnace fire I would not last long. 1 ' 2 I ii 2 N I A 1 V 1 |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 17. Some of these elements I are more- abundant in vegetables, 1 ' 2 I N 3 I V 2 3 |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 18. The woman's boat | is usually about twenty feet long. I ii NP N I V 1 3 2 |=P2 ' 1*2 ' 19. Animals of this class | swarm in countless millions in all the 1 ' 2 Northern Seas. I N 3 I V 3 3 l = P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 20. Many a brave life | has thus been given away. 1 2 I 2 ll 2 N I A 1 AV 1 |=P2 " 1 ' 2 ' 21. The ship I was fast breaking-up (Progressive). 1 ' 2 I ii N I A 1 V |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 22. They I were ] all I hanging-on by ropes to the ship (First N . 1 ' ' 1 ' 2 is dual here). | N | A | N | V 3 3 |=P2 ^6 STYLOGBAPHY OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE. It will be obervefd that the thdoght in the Minimum Mono- simple sentence is narrowed only to two terms consisting of the Government of N only to V but its expansion necessitates increase in the number of these terms. An increase by a third and a fourth term of the Independent Parts of Speech, being the dual complete Government of V, thus becomes visible in sentences which might properly be called the Medixim HonO- Simple sentences. You see the third term to be an N, the fourth to be an IV or PV. Thus comes the grand observation that if the combination of the N and V Formulae is to be extended it must be done by the recurring process of the same two N I V Formulae one after the other, the only difference being that the Vs are IVs or PVs. You will find the third term to be a single N, a dual N, or a dual of N and its Proxy Parts of of Speech. The expanded, Logical or Beau-ideal Formulae of the N Medium Mono-simple sentence are, therefore, as follow : — With single second N irrespective of NP and Auxiliary in the Formulse :•— T2M2Nl23|l3Vl23|l2f ^3 > 1 2 ;^3 >■ 1. I With dual second N : — 2. 1 2 N 1 3 1 2 N 1 2 3 I l2 fl2Nl23|l3Vl23|l2( 1* 3 1' ) 1' ) il^ fl2Nl23| 1* 3 With dual second N and its Proxy, Personal Pronoun :— . , l2 K 2 N 1 2 3 I 1 3 V 1 2 5 I l2 ? ^ - N 1 2 3 I LECTURE III. 2t Application of the N Medium Mono-simple Sentence illustrations to Formula. With Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, 1. The chiefs of both i were I men already of honurable fame* 1 ' 2 ' 3 I I. N 3 I y I N Z 3 | = P3 2. The portion of the heights nearest the town on the west I is 1 ' called I the Plains of Abraham. 2 ' 3 |llN333|AV|llN3 |=P3 3. The rowers | scarcely stirred | the water | with their oars. |i>N|i'v*|i'N|»3|=P, 4. This beautiful animal I resembles in shape I the common 1 ' 2 ' fox of England. I i2 2 N I V s I i^ 2 N 3 1=?, 3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 5. They I gave I him a faithful servant I for a conductor 1 ' 2 ' 5 3 ' (Pronoun-Noun, dual third Term). I N I V * I PP ii 2 N I *3 |=P3 6. It I keeps I the earth itself I moist (Noun and Compound 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' PP, Apposition third Term). I N I V* I ii N PP I * 2 |=:P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' ' 7. I gave yesterday I Ram two rupees (Noun-Noun, dual 12 ' 8 3 third Term). 1 N I V 1 I N 2 N UP3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' 8. The tire-women were preparing I her for the night's rest. 1 2 ' 3 1 1. N I A V . I N I * 3 I * Indicates transposition of a Term or Joiner. 28 STYLOGRAPH Y OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. You have seen in the Minimum variety of examples a ' Be* verb as independent and the same as Auxiliary forming the Passive and the Progressive. You have seen besides in those examples other Verbs, called Neuter, and in all of them there was no necessity of the second N, for the thought was limited. But here you see the same ' Be' verb, the same Passive as well a& Progressive, and another variety of V called the Active which requires the second N for completion by an increased term of the thought. The second N recurs because its necessity arises from the Voice of the V and its character regarding Case is explained thus. When the second N is absent the V is Neuter ; when this is present and retains its Nominative designation the V is the verb ' Be' (in which case the third Term becomes equivalent to the first) ; when it takes its Nominative or Objective designa- tion the verb is Passive or Progressive and is recognized by the presence of the Auxiliary of ' Be'. When however ' Be' in any shape is absent and still the V has this N after it, it is an Active V. We thus come to the conclusion that while the first N is only Nominative, the second is either a Nominative or Objective. It is a general rule to be remembered now that every Proxy, Representative or Analogue of N may take the capacity of this second N as it did in the case of the first. So far as the formula has till now been shown to extend to three terras in consideration of the present stretch of thought the government in parsing of these terms may be regulated thus : The first term or first N has but one government only> i.e., upon the second term V but V except the Neuter has its government on the third term or second N. Unlike the single government of the first N upon V and the first V upon second N, there exists but a second set of V's government upon V, e.e., its government on the fourth or the IV or PV term. You must remember, therefore, that N has hut one set of government but V has got two. The government upon IV or PV is of all Vs, LECTURE III. 29 the Active, Passive, Progressive, and Neuter. These are action government of Vs while the N government are ohjecf govern- ment of Vs. The third or odd Terms when equivalent to first or other odd terms after ' Be', are governing and not governed terms. When the third Term of a Mono-simple is absent the fourth term IV may be determined as a Gerundial, or even in the presence of a third term, if the IV could be considered as a post-joiner to the third term, it is still a Gerund. For example — 1. He I came I to dance. 1 ' 2 ' 4 I N|V|IV = P4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 2. They I obtained I a net I to fish- with. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 I Nl V liiNllVl =P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' Application of illustrations to IV Medium Mono-simple Formula. With Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively/. 1. The lieutenant I told I his men I to halt. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 I ii N I V I i3 N I IV Up, -J 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 2. The natives I seldom learn I to shoot (minus 3rd term). 1 ' 2 ' 4 |xN|iy|iy|=p,.3,. 3. Three Spanish line-of-battle ships in the upper part- of 1 Gibralter I were observe i I also to be in motion. 2 ' 4 I 222N3-3 I AVl lIVs | = P4.3,, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 4 30 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. They I made I him I start back. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 |N|V|N|lVi|=P4 5. Justice required this assent to be given. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 N|Y|i^N|AIYi=P, 6. This was sure to have led to the accident. 1 ' 2 ' 4 |N|y = |AlV»|=P,.,. 7. His whole action I seemed to have been upon the impulse- 1 ' 2 ' 4 of those- around him. |l3l2N|V|AlV333|=P,.3,, -12 4 Application of illustrations to PV Medium Mono- Simple Formula. With Graphic and Rational Formulos respectively. 1. The naturalist I stood I looking at the awful spectacles with 1 ' 2 ' 4 composure. |llN|V|PV3 3|=P,:3,, ' 1 ' 2 ' :4i ' 2. He I may continue I his progress through the night I un- -- iJt 1 ' 2 ' 3 interruptedly | certain of reposing. I N I AV^tl i3N3 Uil 2PVUP4 ' 1 ' 2 ' . 3 ' ' 4 ' 3. He I saw I his own proud flag I still floating everywhere. 1 ' 3 ' .3 ' 4 LECTURE III. 31 4. He I gently chided | her | jov not having informed of her 1 wishes in time. N liV I N I 1APV33UP4 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' ^ 5. One I affirmed I his having lived half a century back. 1 ' 2 ' 4 |N|V|l3APV3l|=P4.3,, 6. The animal I seemed i to be reviving slowly. 1 ' 2 .' 4 |iiN|V|APVi|=P4-3.. ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' In the Minimum Mono-simple you saw the last term to be a V, so in the Medium you have seen the IVs or PVs as terminals too. In the Medium, additional governed terms — the 3rd and the 4th have been seen added to the Minimum for its complete formation and it is by the same addition or repetition of N and IV or PV terms that you hope to arrive at the Maximum Mono-simple sentence. Only you are to repeat the N and IV or PV terms to the final IVs or PVs, The continuation or alternate and continued repetitions are, however, allowed to certain number of these pairs, say 2 more to the Medium and an additional half pair by N for its last term. The naked, Logical Formula of a Maximum Mono-simple sentence, therefore, by terms may be depicted thus : — I N I V I N I IV I N I IV I N I IV I N I From, the Formula we might generalize a definition of the Mono-simple sentence thus : — A Mono-simple sentence is one that starts with an initial N which governs the next V and this final V of its minimum variety in its gradual expansion of government, increases the structure by governing and adding to it the subsequent pair of 52 STYLOQRAPHY OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE. N and IV or PV, complete or by halves (medium) and this IV or PV alternately, or alternately and continually, governs and thus adds to it in its turn subsequent half or complete pairs of N and IV or PV up to the extent of two such groupal additions and a half (maximum). The IVs may continue thrice while PVs only twice in the above arrangement. You may thus view the structure as made up of N| V groups and consider all Ns as odd terms and all Vs as even termSy not that 2nd or subsequent Ns may not be absent and thus show an apparent advance to the next reduced number of IV or PV terms, for, their consideration as even terms remains the same. Extension by N means extension by half a group and extension upto the IV or PV just after it, a full group of extension. We thus have structures that are formed by one group of N|V in the Minimum, 1^ to 2 in the Medium 2^ to 3 in the 1st portion of the Maximum, 3^ to 4 in the 2nd portion of it, while ^ completes the structure by half a group^ of expansion in the 3rd Maximum portion. Further extension I have seldom been fortunate enough to hit at without the intervention of connectives but when it does it is to be by the game recurring process of groupal addition. Application of illustrations to the Maximum 1st, 2nd and 3rd Mono-simple sentence Formula. With Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, I. — Maximum First (up to 6th Term), 1 They I requested j my brother | to tell | them the story of the ghost. |N|Vii3N|IV|Ni^N3|=P5 •I'a' a' 4*5 6 ' 2 The trapper | was I the first | to shake-off | its influence, I i^NlVl i^NllVl i'NUPs I 1 • 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 ' LECTURE III. 33 3. You I may hear I the fire I begin I to roar already. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 |N|AV|i'N|lV|lVi| =V,.,a l' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 ' II. — Maximum Second (up to 8th Term). 1. His companions try to dissuade him from attempting 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' 6 this dangerous feat. i^N V IVlNlPVl 122NUP7 ' l'2'4'6'6' 7' 2. The captain of the Terrible I suddenly shortened I sail I in- 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' order-to allow I his consort I to join I him. 4 ' 5 ' 6 ' 7 I ii N 3 I 1 V I N I IV I i3 N I IV I N |=P7 ' l'2'3'4' 5'6'7' 3. Candles I are lighted I to give I us light I to see i to 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 E ' 6 ' work at night. 8 In I AV I IV I NN I IV I IV3l=P8 -4. Governments i employ I the military I to assist I in keepin 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 the laws I from being broken. T ' 8 |N|V|z'N|iy|PV|i;N|PV| = P3 III.— Maximum Third {up to 9th Term). 1. Thouzel I called out I to entreat for some drink I to enable I 1 ' 2 '4 ' 6 ' him I to endure I the stifling. 7 ' 8 ' 9 lN|Vi|lV3|lV|N|lV|iiN \=V, 'l'2' 4'6'7'8' 9' 84 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. She I cheerfully went about her work all-day I endeavouring 1 ' 2 '4 to prevent I her father I from perceiving I their injuries. «5 ' 7 ' 8 ' 9 iNliVssI PV|lV|i3N|PV|i3N=Po 'i' 2 ' 4'e' r's'g I have shown you second or subsequent Ns to be duals distinct, but emphatic parts of speech as the Compound Personal Pronouns render all Ns dual by emphasis. These Compound PPs may be considered as in apposition to Ns. Illustrations witTi Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, 1. Ram himself \ had I to do I this work. 1 1 ' 2 ' 4 5 In n|v|iv|i2n|=p5 ' 1 1*2' 4 ' 5 ' 2. It I keeps I the earth itself] from becoming I a waste. 1 ' 2 ' 33' 4 ' 5 |N|y|i'NN|Py|x>N|=P, You have been told already of the Proxy and Representative- parts of speech of N, I go now to show to you the Analogues of N in certain terms and their continuation. Such Analogues are the 4th terms alone or with their suites as phrases or continued terms as seen in the Maximum Formula. IV Analogues of N as first Term. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectiveli/, 1. To forgive I is divine. 1 ' 3 |IV|V2|=P, LECTURE III. 35 2. {To believe in objective truth)'^ | is | to throw | ourselves^ forward upon the partially mastered subjective. I IV3 I V I IV*| N I *13 UP5 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 ' ' 3. (To hnoio \ the god of nature | in part)^ I is la poor thing I 4 5 1 ' 2 ' 3 • in-comparison- of knowing | the laws of nature in full. 4 6 I IV*|iiN3|*3 V i\2N PV i^Nss =?- '1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 5 ' 4. {To retreat from the world to a monastery | there to await I 4 6 the awful event)'"' I seemed I the only course. 7 1 ' 2 ' 3 |IV3 3 11 IV I 1I2N I V I ll2N|=P3 5. {To have said \ a word for the heretic)^ would have 45 1 been I to incur I imminent risk of the fate of the heretic. 2 ' 4 ' 5 AIV ii^Ns AA V IV 2N33 Up. ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' 6. {To watch \ an Amoeba | literally flowing from one shape to 45 6 another)-'' I is I to behold I one of the most perplexing 1 ' 2 ' 4*5 sights. I IV 1 1^ N I 1 PV 3 3 I V I IV I N 3 |=P5 '1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 ' PV Analogues of N as first Term. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulm respectively, \. Riding | is | a pleasant exercise. 36 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. (His betraying \ the secrets of Government | to the enemy)^ 4. 5 * 1 has rendered I him I highly treasonable to the eye of 2 3 the people. r \ I 1^ PV * I ll N 3 I * 3 I AV * I N I » 1 2 3 3 1=?,. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' • 3. (The refining of the fine arts)^"^ I was vehemently under- 1 ' taken by the mass about this time. 2 I iipvs I A1V33 Up. ' 1 ' 2 ' You see in these examples, PV the naked analogue of N, you see also the first series of special ante-joiners of N placed before it to exhibit its N character and you see again its PV character by its suite N as sub-term. In conclusion I have to point out to you that the same IV and PV terms respectively alone, or their suite as in the Maximum may be post-joiners to N or its Representatives. In the follow- ing Graphic Formulae small iv and pv andn is used as symbolic representations of sub-terms. Alternate IV and PV as first N. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. 1. To leave the cottage for even a minute without one of us 1 staying with her | was impossible. I IV 1 1' n I 3 3 3 pv 3 V 2 =P., ' 1 '2 In this example the intimate preposition of a PV joiner has admitted also its formation into a preposition phrase, thus giving its dual functions together. LECTaRE III. 37 IV Post-joiners of N. Illustration with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, 1. The thought to proceed to England by the next mail I had I 1 ' 2 ' thus to be abandoned by him. I i^Nivss IVl 1 AIV3UP4 '1 '2*4 ' 2. The idea to analize the structure of the English language 1 by means of scientific Formulae | originated with the author. I 1^ N iv 1 1^ n 3 3 3 I V 3 I =Po '1 ' 2 ' " 3. A man to reach Chittagong from Kangamati by peda- 1 strainism I will take but I 24 hours in all. ' 2 ' 3 iiNiv|n3 3 I AVil 2N3 UP3 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4. This i« the easiest method to learn. 12 3 I N I Vl ii2Niv |=P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 5. You I ought I to inculcate to the boys I sound principles to 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 base their future career upon. I N I V I IVsl 2Nivi3 2n | = P5 In the first two examples you might consider the IVs not only as N analogues but take them as dual 1st Ns though they are apparently as post-joiners. PV Post-joiners of N. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formula} respectively. 1. This very pride, in not toishing to accept unfair emolu- ment I did I the cause all the good in the world. (PV as '2*3 3 N analogue by apposition to N). I i2 2 N I pv I iv I 2 n I V I 1^ N i2 ii N 3 |=P3 38 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. The traveller hemmed-in between their steep precipices | 1 ' sees only I the dark grandeur of the chasm. 2 ' 3 I i^Npvs I Vi| 1I2N3 |=P3 3. Every island I is I a Paradise accommodated to its respective 1 ' 2 ' inhabitants. i2N I Vl i^NpvsUP, 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4. That melancholy intermittant now capable of being expelled by excitement I was not allowed I to be interposed-with. '2 ' 4. ll2N212pV3 I AiVl IV|=P. 1 '2 ' 4 ' 5. The valleys of Nepaul besides being very narrow I belong 1 ' 2 rather to the region of the lower hills. I l^Nsip VI2 I Vl3 3|=P2 6. No mortal foot | has yet ascended to the highest springs situated in the most elevated recesses of the mountain. I I 2 N I A 1 V 3 n pv 3 3 I =P, ' 1 ' 2 I - 7. Our only chance then remaining of accomplishing our ends, I was I to be united again. ' 2 ' 4 I i3 2 N 1 1 pv I pv I i3 n I V I IV 1 I ='P, '1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 8. I Ni^er having now suddenly paused \ had again cast i his '1 ' 2 ' net. I Niipv I AiV I i^NUP, 8 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' LECTURE III. 39 Alternate IV and PV Post-joiner of N. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formula respectively. 1. j A Bishop issuing forth to convert the heathen I evolves I a Church I from himself by his apostolic power. 3 ' 1 1^ N I pv 1 1 iv I 1^ n I V * I 1^ N I * 3 3 I =P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' Thus you see now that both the IVs and PVs have their Present and Perfect Tenses. The IV has got no Past Tense of its own, while the PV has got its. You have seen also the chief roll played by the Past Participle in the 2nd term of the formula, being preceded by auxiliaries of ' Have' to form the different Perfect and the Pluperfect tenses and by the auxi- liaries of * Be' to form the Passive. As an independent PV in the fourth term, whose peculiarity of never being followed by a fifth term and always getting an advance to apparently the third term, proves that it belongs to the Adjective class and is really not a term but a post-joiner to second term V. In fact there is no independent past participle as a term unless as Absolute, to be dealt with afterwards. The next great roll played by it is as post-joiner to N only presently shown to you. Examples, therefore, of all the three tenses of Participles have been shown as post-joiners of N though its perfect tense as such bears semblance to Absolutes. When the first term N is followed by a fourth term PV alone, clothed or with its suite, provided there be no second term in the Formula, an incomplete structure is formed which is known by the name of N incomplete Absolute structure. This absolute structure is never alone but precedes or follows a Mono-simple sentence. For it, this *cj S' bracket is used and the larger digits within it in the Rational formula indicate the number of Terms. 40 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Application of illustrations to N Absolute formula. Illustration vnth Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. 1. The sua | appearing on the horizon, C| I ii N I PV 3 I [)=cj N PV [) or c| 1 4 |) 2. His dreams of royalty | being at an end, Cj I i3 N 3 I PV 3 I |) = (^ N PV -^ or (J 1 4 J) Illustrations of Union of the 1st N Absolute structure and the Mono-simple sentence with their Formulce. A.— Initial 1st N Absolute to Mono-simple. Illustration with Graphic and Rational Formula respectively . 1. cNight I approachingS { my guide I conducted I me I to a • 1 4 ^ 1 ' 2 3 ' hut for shelter }.* C;,N|Pyi>S|i3N|V*|N|»33|J=c;i4>P B. — Terminal 1st N Absolute to Mono-simple. 1. {We I walked-out of the house } (J all the entreaties of the 1 ' 2 ^ ^ 1 owner | being of no avail | to detain | us I for the night there. J 4 6 ' { I N I V 3 I } (Jl i2 ii N 3 I pv 3 I iv * I n nt 3 1 l') = P2d 1 4 6 7 S 'l'2'T 14 67 ^ ^ ^ C— Both initial and terminal N Absolute to Mono-simple. 1. ciThe day | having dawnedS { only two of the company I ^1 i ^ 1 ' left I the Restaurant } (J the rest | being still in bed under the influence of mighty sleep. S C^ii N I pv iS 1 1 2 N 3 I V I i^N I } c! I i^N I pv 1 3 3 3 I S * Large braces enclose mono-simple Principals. LECTURE III. 41 PV being analogous to IV, N | PV Absolute must have its analogy in N | IV Absolute. For Example :— 1. (jThis method of practical teaching | in-order-to be con- demned by our staff of teachers S {their sole endeavour I ought I to be I to give I it a thoroughly proper exercise 2 ' 4 ' 6 7 7 upon the pupils I before pronouncing I such a judgment I at ' 8 ' 9 ' all upon it.} C; I l2 N 5 I IV 3 3 iS {l3 2 N I V I IV I IV I Nil 1 2 N 3 I ^ 1 4 ' l'2'4'6'7 7' PV*| i^iiN I ^t3 3 I }=cj 14|)P9 PV has been shown to be a governed Term to V, IV, or PV ; or PV has also been shown to be a post-joiner to N ; it has just lately been shown as a suite N Absolute. I go now to show you that it is an un-governed term or absolute incomplete structure by its initiative. To recognize it as such you will find it almost generally drop its intimate preposition : and its action to be distinct and antecedent or subsequent to that of the Principal V, whose action is but a sequence or precedence. Its position with regard to P is analogous to that of the Absolutes. 1. d Saying | nothing | in the mean time to any one j, { he I went in the evening to the garden-house.} 2 (J I P V * I N I * 3 3 I [) { I N I V 3 3 1 } = cj4 5 J) P2 2, (^Before comunicating | the happy news | to his wifeS {h& ' 4 5 • 1 I went out personally I to enquire into its truth.} CjPV » ui 2 N I » sj) {N I V 1 1 1 IV 3}=(j4 5j)P, 42 STYLOGEAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. PV absolute by analogy brings us to IV absolute. Thus : — 1. C To mark also | his gratitudeS { he | recommended | the honest Jew I to various European Sovereigns.} 3 ' {|N|y|x'.N|3|}=<46>P3 Absolute with Adjective initiative is also seen though it may be considered as a PV absolute with an understood PV before the Adjective. Thus :— 1. (" (Being) Indignant at Uberto, S { he | passed | the sentence I in very insolent terms.} 3 (;(PV) 2 a)) { I N I y ^ 1 1^ N I .3 I }=C;(PV)2 3;)P3 2. (J Weak, unwell, j { Vincent was sold cheap to a fisherman.} (;(pv)-2 2)) { N I Av 2 3 1 }=c;-2 2>p. The first developmental combination that P Mono-simple goes to make, is thus shown by its union with the absolute, un-governed and incomplete structures and phrases. Absolute parts of speech unions to P by the Interjections, Vocative Nouns, and Prepositional Phrases will be shown after finishing the consideration of the different expressions, the Narrative, the Imperative, the Interrogative, and the Exclamatory ones. It must be borne in mind as a philological fact that Absolute Parts of Speech, Phrases, and Structures are Independent Incomplete Unions to the P while Complete (R* and C*) Structures are Combinations^ subordinate to it. The combination of the P by way of increased develop- ment deals with complete but so-called Subordinate Struc- tures and rarely with such elliptical ones, which will be LECTURE III. 43 considered later on. Subordinate unions occur within all the Absolutes except Interjection Absolutes, thus showing that interjections are only isolated vociferations, while the other Absolutes approach gradually more to complete Mono- simple Phrases. You have been told before, that in Parsing Ist N governs the Ist V (Isf government, of single upon single terni) and this and other Vs (IVs & PVs) govern their subsequent Ns and IVs {2nd government, of single upon double terms'). You will see here exceptionally that a 2nd and a 3rd term conjointly govern the 4th (3rrf government, double upon single term). In these instances, however, the 4th may also be considered as Post-joiner to the 3rd term. 2nd and 3rd Terms governing 4tli Term : — 1. Dr. Kane I Tiad sent out I parties I to make I stores of 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4*6 provisions at various intervals. |NlAVi|N|lV|Nao|=P, 2. She I wanted I a volume I to illustrate I her thought. 1 • ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 5 |N| y|i.N|iy|x3N=p, 3. They I tooh \ three-fourth of an hour I in going I the distance. 12*3 '4 5 I N I V I N 3 I PV I i2 N=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 '4 ' 5 Lastly comes the 2nd term with its Post-joiner 3 that governs the 4th Term : — 1. A sledge | was despatched with eight men I to arrange I one 12 4 6 of these depots for future use. I i^N I AV3 I IVl N33|=P, • 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 ' 44 STYOGRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE, 2. Many a life I has been lost in the attempt I to discover I th& 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' North-west passage. 6 I 2iiN|AA V3|lV|ii3N 1=?^ The 4th term here may also be considered as Sub-Post- joiner to the N of Post-joiner 3 of 2nd term {3rd government^ of single with its post-joiner upon single). LECTURE IV. Students and Gentlkmen, In the N Formula you have seen double or triple increase in words of the pronominal acljective and adjective classes ; you have seen even, more repetitions of preposition phrases in the same. You have seen also dual Ns, or dauls of N proxy and N, in the third or subsequent odd Term of the Mono-simple Formula. You have been shown again duals of any N, the second being the emphatic Compound Personal Pronoun series. In all these, however, you do not see the interference or develope- ment of any mark of Punctuation or connective classes of words — the Conjunctions. I go now presently to show to you another class of N dauls in which comma may take its first appearance. These are duals hy apposition of like Cases of N — the Nominative or Objective, Mark that this second N is either preceded by a comma and followed, by a preposition phrase, or the comma dropping is preceded by the Article adjective 'The'. The comma may again be followed by ayy of the A A and the second N sometimes by preposition phrases, or that the second N is represented by one of the pronominal adjectives and followed by a preposition phrase ; mark also that these two Ns may suffer inversion in position and these points will settle with you about their recognition. Application of Apposition Ns in Mono-simples. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formula respectively. 1. Charles I, king of England I was beheaded by the order of the first-formed Parliament. I N2, N.3| AV3 3|=Pa ' 1 1*2 ' 46 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE, 2. Cicero the orater I lived in the first century B.C. 1 ' 2 I Nl^N I V33 |=P2 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 3. Babu Hurry Podo Ghose, a member of the Meeting 1 I seconded I the proposition. ' 2 ' 3 I 2N, i^Ns I V I i^N | = P3 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4. Dr. King, the great Botanist I is | Professor of Botany 2 12' 3. in the Medical College, Calcutta. I 2N, ll 2N I V I N333 UPg ' 1 . 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 5. Mr. Roy, an individual of great renown in the city 1 1 I spoke in favor of widow-marriage. 2 I N, 1IN33 I V33 |=P<, '1 1 '2 ' - 6. The District Engineer, Bahu Sasibhusan Dutta I left I 1 1 ' 2 ' this station I on inspection duty. 3 ' I 1I2N, 2N| V*| i2N I *3 |=P3 J J ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ■ 7. Thomas Clarkson, owe of the students \ took \ Tpams \ to 11 ' 2 ' 3 ' acquire I information on the subject. 4 ' 6 I N, N3 I Vi N I IV I Ns |=P5 '11 '2 3 ' 4 ' 6 ' 8. He I .asked for some trifling thing — a pair of gloves. '"' ' ' I N I V3n-iin3=P2 ' 1 -s 9. The you;th i is named I'Crawf ord— a relation to Sir George 1 ' 2 '' 3 3 Mornay. I iiNl AV I N-1IN3 |=P3 LECTURE IV. 47 10. Lady Cornelia I is I a nice girl, the eldest daughter 1 2 ' 3 3 of Thomas William Steven Conway, Marquis of Sittingbourne. I N I V |ii2N, iisNsn, n3| = P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' 11. Crawford I beheld I the partner of his villany — Eeving- 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 stone. I N| V| i1N3-N|=P3 12 8 3 It may be remarked here that Apposition Ns of 3rd or subsequent odd terms generally take ' dash' in place of comma before them. You see also that Apposition Ns are but Equivalents of capacity to Proper nouns in one and the same term. Consequently, their government in parsing is the same. In .V terms again you saw similar repetitions of adverbs and preposition phrases between which no punctuative comma nor conjunction became visible. All these repetitions it must be borne in mind were but repetition of implied connection between themselves and did not necessitate the advent of punctuations and conjunctions. It is, therefore, that when unconnected words are increased in any N and V terms or in their joiners and sub- joiners they require the intervention of conjunctions and sometimes punctuations or both. We thus arrive at the development of conjunction in Mono- simple sentences. Before we proceed to apply them to illustra- tions and then formulate the latter we must remark that conjunctions are— 1st, grOTipal— Mono-, and Bi-, the former single, dual, triple, and phrasial, the latter in the Bi-groups consisting of pure and pure, adverb and pure, pronominal adjective and pure, comparative adjective or adverb and pure, adverb and 48 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. adverb, compound adjective or adverb and the same — both preceded by Article adjective 'The'. . 2ndly, that they are links between all, except the Article adjective and Interjection (the latter to be dealt with afterwards). 3rdly, that they vary in their capacity as regards union, certain compounds being present between all varieties of increased terms^ joiners and sub joiners ; some being, such as the Examplary variety, only fit to unite with Ns and others being special to Vs. 4thly, that there are very few strong compounds only^ which form the connecting link not only between the maximum number of varieties but between the maximum number of words in each variety, being mono-groupals. Others being sup- posed to be uniter of a pair only in each variety — weak com- pounds and co-ordinates, being both Mono- or Bi-groupals. Conjunctions with maximum capacity of placing them- selves between varieties as well as between maximum number in each variety maybe called the proto-types of conjunctions. * And' as well as ' or' belong to this class. 5thly. Besides the above Uniters of Symmetry in a pair or more, another class is visible which is Asymmetrical, i.e. which place themselves between different terms or different varieties in a term or between a preceding joiner and a subse- quent term. Hence proceeds the following classification : — f I. In Compound increase of terms, I joiners or suhjoiners (^Cumulative, Alterna- tive, Adversative &g). J II. In Co-ordinate increase of terms, I joiners and suhjoiners. III. In conjoined Compound and Co- ordinate increase of terms, joiners or suhjoiners. Bnr. .i.-„^r. ( III Semblance Subordinate increase . CJonnectives ii- j-«! ^ ^ i^ » i ^t , . J between different terms — between A and V between •< i . j- ^r • • i i , lor between precedmg V loiner and a subse- asymmetry. / . iat * p "^ •^ ■^ (^quent IV term &o. A. Connectives between symmetry. LECTURE IV. 49 In compound increases, the terms, joiners or subjoiners are increased to two or more than two of each ; in cases of four or more even numbers they may be joined in pairs. In the former instances of more than two increases of each, a comma intervenes between each pair and the connective between the last; while in the latter instances of four or more even pairs, connectives may place themselves between each pair followed by comma in cases of joiners and subjoiners, except that of the last which may sometimes be punctuated by a period, colon, or semicolon at the end. Co-ordinate increases are only in a pair unless in the consecutives of compound pairs in the Co-ordinate when conjoined increases as described may be visible. What is good with connectives in terms, joiners and sub joiners in the Mono-simple sentence, will also be seen to hold good with structures. The uniters of the symmetrical, will be seen to develope into Compounds and Co-ordinates and those of the asymmetricals into Subordinate or (/O-ordinate Subordinate structures. Analogy leads us therefore to conceive that sub- ordination exists between terms or between joiners and terms ia the Mono-simple. The Proto-types alone admit ellipsis, their omission being represented by comma which is hence a punctuative connective. When these Proto-types or Compounds, as they are called, have to deal with increased number of terms or their joiners in a series of more than 2, comma takes its seat between all pairs except the last between which the conjunction takes its seat. Let the Conjunction in Mono-simples be called simple con- junction as they are between Parts of Speech or between Phrases and between parts of speech and their analogous phrases and let small 2^ius represent them in the Formula. Reference for these conjunctions might be made at the Appendix. 50 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A.— Connectives of Symmetrical parts. I.-BY MONO-GROUPALS. (a).— In Terms. (i.) — between 1st terms. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formuloe respectively, 1. (To tie I tin canisters I to the tails of dogs,) or (to canse- 4 ' 6 ' 4 I do2:8 I to worry i cats) or (to throw | stones i at birds, ) ' 6 ' 6*7+ ' 5 ' are I all o£ them cruel kinds of fun made for the purpose- 2 ' 3 3 4 of amusing ourselves. 6 7 (IV I 2 N I 3 3) ^ 4 ' 5 ' 1 + (IV I N I IV I N) , 4 ' 5 ' 6 ' 7 1 + (IV I N I 3)^ I V I N 3 2 N 3 n-pv pv n UP3 2. Lord Fan more and he I instantly recogrnised each-other. 1 + 1 ' 2 ' 3. James and Sophia accordingly proceeded some way into the 1 + ' 2 country. N+N I 1V33 | = P2 1 1 ' 2 ' 4. The shreiks of the old woman, the crackling of kindled 1 1 timbers, and the voice of the raging element, I were alone- 1 now for a short space heard. 2 I ii N s, 1^ N 3,+i> N 3 A 1 1 3 V |=P, LECTDRE IX. 51 5. All this a7id a good deal more I was speedily meditated. 1 1 ' 2 ; I l2N + ll2N2| AlV |=P2 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 6. ( I To enable I Miss Maxwell's fanaticism concerning the ' 4 ' 6 6 abjuration by a community of women to work-up 1)^ and \ 7 8 ' 1 + (its contemplated connection with a very questionable 1 mode I of raising I the necessary pecuniary supplies for ' 4 ' 6 the support of the novel institution to be carried-out | Y required I John Dimmock I to be thoroughly instructed in 2 ' ' the ramifications o£ the whole mystery). ( I IV i5 n 3 3 3 4 I y '4 * ' 1 +( I 1^ 2 ISI 3 iv 1^ 2 2 n 3 3 4 I )^ I V I Nl I1V33 \ = ?, ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' Here the 1st term IV and its suite and 1st term N have been compounded. (ii.) — between 2nd terms. 1. The revenue arising from his school | was small and would 1 , ' 2 + have been scarcely suflScient | to furnish | him | with daily bread. I ii N 4 3 I V 2 + AAV 1 2 I IV * I N U 3 =P, 'l'2 2'4.'5' ^ 2. The merchant | was astounded | and | for a space was iumb. liiNlAVU 3AV|=P, ' 1 ' a ' 2 ' struck-dumb. 2 52 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LAKGUAGK. 3. Men I started at the intelligence and turned pale. 1 ' 2 +2 4, Nathaniel I acknowledged I the complement, I felt satisfied 1 2 ' 3 '2 in his own mind I how to act I and resumed I some old ' 4 ' + 2 ' topic of conversation. (Both comma and conjunctioa 3 between 2ad terms ) N I V I ii N I 12 3 , V 4 3 I 1 IV I 2 ' 4 ' + V I 122N3 i=P, 6. The banished merchant I started at the intelligence, I hut I 1 ' 2 + checked I himself, and I hastily walked away. I ('But' and 2 ' 3 + ' 2 'and' between Vs ) |x-N|V3| V N 2 ' 3 6. Eip I shrugged I his shoulders, I shook I his head, I cast-up 1 ' 2 3 2 3 2 his eyes I hut \ said I nothing. 3 ' + ' 2 ' 3 N I V I i3 N I , V i3 N 2 ' 8 , V I i3 N u' 3 + V I N| = 2 ' 3' LECTOR E IV. 53 Many harmless little animals, as flies, snails, worms, and 1+11 1 + frogs I are tortured and killed by some people. 222N + N, N, N + N AV+Vs =P2 1 1 1 1 1 ' 2 2 ' (iii.) — hetween Srd terms. 1. He I associated with himself, I one Kobertson and two other 1 ' 2 '3 idle young men. 3 In I Vsl 2N + ei222N |=P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' ^ 2. I I kept I lio^hts I at the mast-head I and a constant watch 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' + 8 forward | to look-out for fishing smacks. I N I V * I N I * 3 I ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' + 1»2N2| IV3 I =?, 3 ' 4 ' 3. I admire the pigs and poultry. 1 ' 2 ' 3 + 3 I N I V I i^N I + 1 N |=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 3 ' (iv.) — between 5th terms, 1. Anthony Foster I entered I the apartment, I bearing in his 1 ' 2 ' 3 '4 hand I a glass cup and a small flask. 5 + 6 I N I V I ii N I PV 3 I 1^ 2 N + ii 2 N UP5 'l'2' 3*4 ' 5 5' (6). — In Joiners by Mono-groupals. 1. They I dispersed through the city burning, plundering 1 2 and destroying. (Between post-joiner pv of V.) + N| VS, 4,4l, + 4 UP2 •I ' Q • 54 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. David outlawed yet loyal at the heart, I sent I his aged 1 + ' 2 ' parents I to the land of Moab. ('Yet' between 4 and 2 -is' post-joiners of first term.) I N 4 + 2 3 I V * I 1^ 2 N I * 3 3=?, ' 1 ■ '2 ' 3 ' 3. He I was of a mild and equable temper | and was seldom or never seen in a passion. (First 'and' between 2 post- 2 joiners of V ; 2nd 'and' between Ys while 'or' between adverbs of V.) I N I V 3 (ii 2 + 2) n I 1 ' 2 ' + |Ai + iV3|=Po 2 2 ' ' 4. An object of our admiration and affection, of our pride and i of our hopes, I was suddenly taken from us. 2 I 1^ N 3 {\hi + n) ,3 + 3 I Ai Vs | = P„ 5. Almost all the public affairs of the province I were more or 1 + less directed by Benjamin Franklin. (Between Adverb as Inter- joiners in the midst of A and V.) I ll2ll'2N3 I Al + l V3 |=P, . 6. Time grew worse and worse with Van Winkle. 1 ' 2 I Nl V2 + 23 |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 « ' The bracket after 3 includes details of the preposition phrase. LECTURE IV. 55 7. The city of Tunis | was at that time i7i friendship with the Venetians though hostile to most of the other Italian +■ states. (Analogy between Prepositional phrase and Ad- jective joiners of V is shown.) I 1IN3 I V333 ' 1 ' 2 + 23 3 |=P, 8. He I governed I jnen by their reason and their affection. 1 2 '3 (N|y |N, + 3|=P3 9. The opinions of this junto | were completely controlled by Nicholas Vedder, a patriarch of the village and landlord of the inn. (Appositions in Post-joiners of second terra by comma and conjunction.) I iJ N 3 I A 1 V an ' I ' 2 , 1^ « 3 + ?Z 3 I =Po 10. His head was small and IBat at top, with huge ears, large 1 ' 2 ' green glassy eyes, and a long snipe nose. I i3 N I V 2 ' 1 ' 2 + 23 , 3 (2 n) , 3(2 2 2 n) > , + 3(ll2 2n)|=P2 11. We I may be sick or hurt ('or' between adjective and parti- ciple adjective, but *hurt' may be considered here as a chief V thus showing that Adjectives and Vs are analogous after 'Be'). Nl A V2 + 2| = P, 53 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 12. This friend I was I a pleasant, sociable man, of unobtrusive ' 2 ' a manners, hut possessed of no great qualification for busi- ness. (Connective comma between Adjective ante- joiners of third term and Conjunction 'but' between 3 and post-joiner 4 of the same, adversative analogous unioa of 3 and PV.) I l2N I V| ll 2, 2N, 3 + 4 3-3 |=P3 13. It I is too oZ(/, or too much fatigued, (fr too sparingly fed, \ 1*2+ + ' to go any faster. (This is alternative Compound repeated 4 twice in joiner ; the Post-joiners 'old' 'fatigued' and 'fed' of V show analogy between adjective and participle.) I N I V 1 2 ' 1 ' 2 , + 114 , + 114|lVll|=P, 4 14. The mineral substances of the earth I are composed of 1 ' 2 three general groups, namely, the eruptive, the crystalline, and the sedimentary rocks. I ll 2 N 3 I AV 3, + 3 (ll 2, 1^ 2, + ll 2) n UPj ' 1 ' 2 ' (c). — In Sub-joiners by Mono-groupals. 1. A respect I is due from the superior to the inferior, as- well-as from the inferior to the superior. ('As-well-as' be- + 3' 3* tween two co-ordinate preposition phrases sub-joiners to 'due'.) I ii N I V 2 3' 3" ' 1 2 + 3' 3" | = P„ LECTURE IV. 57 2. The common people I regarded | it { with a mixture-of 1 2 ' 3 respect and superstition, partly out-of sympathy for the + fate of its ill-starred name-sake and partly from the tales + of strange sights and doleful lamentions-told concerning it. + ('And' between sub-joiner of second term, 'partly', 'and partly' between subsequent sub-joiners of the same). 1 ii 2 N I V I N 3 3 (w+n) 1 ' 2 ' 3 + 333 + 3 3 (2 n+ 2 n) pv 3 I =V^ (d). — In terms and Joiners by Mono-groupals. 1. Servants, under such circumstances I usually become much 1 ' 2 attached to their masters and mistresses, and at length + perform | thier duties I pa?-^??/ f rom a f eeling-of love as-weZZ- 2 3 ' + ' + an for the sake of wages. (Compound 'and' between two Vs and conjunction 'partly' and 'as-well-as' before the Post-joiners of V.) I N 3 I 1 V 1 pv 3(i^n+w) ' 1 ' 2 + 1 3 V I 1^ N + 3 3 + 3 3 I ^Pg 2. He I assisted at their sports, I made I their playthings, 1 ' 2 ' 2 ' 3 I tauffht I them | to fly I kites I and told I them long stories ' 23' 4'5'+2'3 3 of ghosts, witches and Indians. (Between four second terms, also between post-joiner of 3rd terms.) I N I V3 ' 1 ' 2 , V I i3 N 2 ' 3 ,V I N I IV I N 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 5 +V I N2N3(n, n+n)|=Pj 58 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. His only alternative to escape from the labour of the farm 1 and the clamour of his wife I was I to take I gun in hand + 3 ' 2 4 e and stroll away into the woods. (Between preposition + 4 phrase sub- joiners to sub-joinner iv of first and fourth IV terms.) I i3 2 N iv 3 3(iin + ii n) 3 I V I IV I N 3 1 V^ ' 4 ' 6 +IV13UP5 4 ' We I keep I an animal as a horse or a dog for our con- 12 3 + 8 + 3 venience or pleasure. (This is Examplary and alternative compound.) N I V I ii N I 1*2' 3 ' + 1I N 3 + 1^ N3(i^ n+n) |=P3 (e.) — In Joiners and Sub- joiners by Mono-gboupals. 1. The county of five, bounded by two firths on the South and North and by the sea on the East and having a number of small seaports, I was long famed I for maintaining suc- '2 ' 4 cessfully j a contraband trade. I 1^ N 3, 4 3 3 (1^ n + n) + 33 + pv i^n 3 I A 1 V I PV 1 I ii 2 N | = P. 2 4 6 2. Among other places was I the city of Tunis, at that time 2 ' 1 in friendship with the Venetians, though hostile to most + of the other Italian states a7id particularly to Genoa. LECTURE IV. 59 ('Though' between 3 'in friendship', and 2 'hostile', ana- . logons union.) 3. We shall see her resolution equalled, though hardly 1 ' 2 ' 3 + surpassed, by Christian Antigones of equal love an(Z surer- faith. ('Though' between 4 post-joiners of 3rd term and 'and' between sub-joiners of the same.) I N I A\ ' 1 ' 2 Connectives of Symmetrical parts. IL— BY BI-GROUPALS (CO-ORDINATE), (a).— In Terms. 1. A Golden Deed I must be I something more than mere 1 2 3 c C display of fearlessness. ('More' is 1st co-ordinate con- 3 nective to 'something' and 'than' 2nd co-ordinate connective to 'display' between 3rd terms.) I 1I2N I AV I Nc'c"2N3 UP3, ' 1' 2 ' 3 3 ' 2. Judas and his 800 I were wA driven from the field, but lay 1 + 1 ' c' 2 c" 2 dead upon it. I N+i3 N I A c' V 3 '11' 2 C"V23 I =P„ 2 ' 3. Disciplined men I should either conquer or submit to their 1 ' c' 2 c" 2 betters. I 2 N | A c'V ' 1 ' 2 C"V3 |=Po 2 ' c' — c" represent co-ordiuate conjunctions. 60 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. With him I I I shall nev&r want I forces, nor have I too ' 1 ' c' 2 ' 3 c" 2 ' many enemies | to deal ('never' between A V— 'nor' before 3 4 (A)V). 1*3 I N| Ac'V I N| 1 ' 2 ■ 3 c" V I 1 2 N ! IV *=P, 5. You I spoke I as confidently of seeing I five hundred I as \ 1 ' 2 'c' 4 ^ ^ of' of seeing 1 this smaller number. ('As-as' before PVs.) 4 ' 5 I N I V I c' 1 IV I 2 N I c" IV I l2 2N \=V^ 4 6 * 6. A savage country rarely supports more (person;^) than one person | * for every square mile. (Co-ordinate in 3rd terms.) 8 I ll 2 N I 2 V * I C' (N) C^'' l2 N I * 3 |=P3 . 1 ' 2 3 3 ' 7. The fleets of the enemy I were not merely defeated hut 1 ' c' c" destroyed. 2 I ii Ns I Ac'Vc" V |=P2 ' 1 ' 22' 8. Better is I it I to be I a dupe through life, than to be suspi- C' 2 ' 1 ' 4 ' 6 c'' cious of our fellow being;}. ('Better' before IV 'than' before IV 4th terms). I * c' I V I N I * IV I ii N 8 2 ' 1 ■ 4 • 6 /IV2 3l=P. LECTURE IV. 61 9. They I are disposed I rather to refuse I than to obey. 1 • 3 ' c' 4 ' c" * ( 'Rather' before 'to refuse' ; 'than' before *to obey' ; 4th terms.) I Nl AVl c'lVl c''IV |=P4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 4 ' 10. It I stirred not I hut seemed gathered-up in the gloom like 1 ' 2 c' c" 2 some gigantic monster ready to spring upon the traveller. (Co-ordinate conjunctions between 2nd terms.) I N I VC'I C'''V4 3324 3|=P4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 2 ' 11. The signs of agony expressed by their movements, I the 3 ' cruel boy I neither understood nor would attend-to. 1 ^ c' 2 c'' 2 ('Neither — nor' before,^ Vs.) 1 *ii N 3 4 3 I ii 2 N I c' V c" AV * |=P3 (&). — In Joiners. 1. She I supported •x- I her griefs I *with as much firmness as 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' c' c' possible. I N I V* I i^N U3(c'nc"2) |=P3 ' 1 ' 2 3 2. These I would lead to many a diffuse colloquy sometimes 12 c' informing, at other occasion amusing. 2 C" - I N I A V3C'2C"2 |=P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3. Cases of self-devotion brought-together | stand-out re- markably either from their hopelessness, their courage or c' c" IV or PV post-joiners of Ns and Vs are also represented by integer 4. 6 62 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. their patience varying with the character of their age. ('Either— or' before 3s.) I N 3 4 I V 1 c' 3 ' 1 2 C"3 (n4l3 3)|=P2 4. Not merely at Rome, hut in every province of the Empire I c' c" the custom 1 was utterly abolished. ('Not-merely — but' 1 ' 2 before 3s of V.) I *C'3C"3 3| l^Nl AlV*|=P„ I ' 1 ' 2 ' '' 5. The school-house I stood in a rather lonely hut pleasant 1 ' 2 c' c" situation. iiN V 3 (ii c' 2 c-^ 2)n =P2 1 ' 2 ' 6. * This time I it I is * not under the bright sky, hut under ' 1 ' 2 c' c" the grey fogs of the Baltic sea. ('Not — but' before 38|of V.) U3lNlV4tc'3 ' 1 2 C-3 3|=P, 7. We I will not bearken to the king's words, I to go from 1 ' 2 ' 4 our religion, either on the right hand or the left. ('Either — c' c" or' before 3^.) I N I Ai Vs I IV3C';3C"3 |=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 8. Hotter than ervn- was I the fight over his corpse. c'c"i V I'Na =P„ 2 ' 1 ' LECTURE IV. 6B 9. It I was I a war not-only on the men hut on their gods, ('Not-only— but' between 3s of 3rd term.) I N I V I i^Nc'sc^s | = P3. 10. We I speak not here of his victories hut of his return c' q" march from the banks of the Indus, in B. C. 326. ('Not — but' before 3s of V.) I N I V c' 1 3 ' 1 ' 2 C*' 3 3 3 3 |=P2- 11. It I is incumbent upon us all both as individuals and as 12 C' C" nations, I to take I an interest in each-other. ('Both as — ' 4 ' 6 and as' before Ns.) I N I Vasn ' 1 ' 2 c' n c"n| IV I 1IN3 |=P5 12. An honest bankrupt I is entitled •to pity, rather than liable 1 ' 2 c' c*' to blame. ('Entitled' is past participle after 'is', forming the passive ; 'rather than' is placed between this and 'liable.' This shows analogy between PV and Adjective.) I ll 2N I AV3C'C"2 3 |=Po ' 1 ' 2 13. Neither for fear nor favour I should I we I allow I our- c' c" ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 selves I to be prevented I from executing I these public ' 4 ' 6 ' duties U faithfully. ('Neither' before 3 'nor' before 3.) 7 ' l.c'ac'alAlNl V | N | IV | PV . | i« . N | *,|=P, 64 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 14. In less (nights) than (in) a fortnight 1 La Tade I found I ' 1 ' 2 ' himself surrounded by 10 large rats. (Co-ordinate conjunc- 3 tions in joiners 3 exist with N and Preposition ellipsis.) I *3C'C"3| N| V*| N43| = P3 (c). — In Subjoiners. 1. My uncle Toby I was I a man patient of injuries not 1 ' 2 ' 3 c' from want of courage nor from any obstuseness of his intellectual parts. I iS N I V I 1^ N 2 3 C' 3 3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 C"3 3|=P3 You have already seen increased number of similar joiners without even the intervention of punctuation ; you have seen also the apposition terms of N without punctuation but with the intervention of *The' ; you have been shown just now the increase of similar terms and similar or analogous joiners or subjoiners by intervention of punctuation and conjunction. I have come to show to you presently the apposition Ns with the intervention of certain conjunction connectives in the same terms. The past participle connectives in the same terms have been treated later on. A.— 'As' as apposition connective. 1. He I had only I to shelter I the Major as a guest I for 1 ' 2 4 ' 5 + 6 ' 3 days. (This is apposition of fifth term by connec- tive 'as'.) |N| Vi| 1V*| i2N + ii N| *3|=P5 2. He I soon after adopted | Leooard as his son. 1 ' 2 3+3 I N I iiV I N + i3Nl = P3 LECTURE IV. 65 3. He I affected I to represent I it as a lucky hit. (This- is 1 ' 2 ' 4 6 fifth term apposition by connetive 'as' again.) I N I Vl IV I N + i^sNUP- ' 1 ' 2 4 5 5 ' 4. Mr. Clarkson as secretary I interposed. (This is first term 1 + 1 ' 2 apposition of capacity.) lN + N|V|=P2 ' 1 12' B.— 'Such— as' as apposition connective. 1. The force I would have been most-desperate for the attack 1 ' 2 of such a city as Tarif a. (Here the sub-post joiner of a post- joiner 3 of V has got co-ordinate apposition Ns by connectives *such — as'.) I ii N I AAV 2 3 3 (c' ii n c" n) I =P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' Connectives of Symmetrical parts. III. — By Conjoined mono- and bi-groupals. 1. My uncle Toby I was I a man patient of injuries not from 1 ' 2 ' 3 c' want of courage nor from any insensibility or obtuseness c" + of his intellectual parts {Co-ordinate negative and Alterna- tive Conjunction. 'Not' before sub-joiner 3 ; 'nor' before sub-joiner 3 also.) I i3 N I V I ii N 2 3c' 3 3 » 1 '2 ' 3 c"3(i2n + n)3|=P3 2. From these and the like operations I arises I the wealth both + ' 2 ' 1 c' of individuals and of nations. (Co-ordinates 'both — and' before each prepositional phrase. 'And' gives detail of *both'. 'These' and 'the like' are analogous union.) I * 3 (i2 + ii 2) n I V * I 1^ N c' 3 c^ 3 |=P2 66 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. We I should encourage I a mild and patient disposition, I 1 2 ' + 3 ' rather than a fretful, irritable, and revengeful one. c' c" + 3 ('Rather — than' (comparative co-ordinate) between com- pound adjectives to Nouns.) I N I AV- 1 ii 2, + 2 N c' I '. • 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' C'^ll 2,.2, + 2N|=P3 3 ' B.— Connectives of Asymmetrical parts. Between (different) terms and terms, Joiners and terms, and Suh-joiners and terms. I.— BY MONO-GROUPAL. (a). — Between V and its post-joiners. 1. They I are still reaping as if by a most agile sickle I an 1*2+ ' enormous harvest. (Semblance connective 'as if be- 3 tween V and its post-joiner.) I N I AiV + 3 I 1I2N |=P3 2. He I would be present I to give * I his aid and advice, if 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 + 6 + necessary. ('If before 2 post-joiner of V.) |N|AV2|lV*|i3N + N|» + 2=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 5 ' 3. Donald I advanced I a step I * as if for the purpose- of 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' + instantly seizing I the person. ('As if semblance con- 4 ' 6 nective between V and PV ; preposition 'of of the PV is strengthened by 3 'for the purpose' and adverb 'instantly' placed between the intimate preposition and PV.) I N I V*| i^N I * + PV I ii N| = P5 lecture iv. - 67 (6). — Between N and its post-joiner. 1. We I have I no intention I of exhibiting 1 Sophia Maxwell 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4. ' 5 as spotlessly perfect. + 2. Uberto though originally poor, I had risen by his talents 1 + '2 and industry I to be I one of the most considerable + ' 4 ' merchants. I N + 1 2 I AV 3 (ii n + n) I IV I N 3 UP^ '1 '2 .4 ' 6 ' 3. This though lamentably deficient, and false in some points | was I a real religion. ('Though' between first term and. 2 ' 3 its joiner, 'and' between 2s.) I N + 12 + 23 I V I 1I2N \=¥^ (c). — Between V and IV terms. 1. He I turned from the crucifix | as unworthy to look upon it I N I Vs I +2IV3 |=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' (c^).— Between Auxiliaries and Vs. 1. The audience I was as ^/ moved by this persuasive oration 1 2 (between A and V). | i^ N | A + V 3 |=P2 Connectives between different Terms show subordination as well. For examples : — 1. The philosopher Empedocles | had leapt into the burning crater of Mount Etna | thereby to obtain | an imperishable 68 STYLOQRAPHT OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE. name. (The fourth Term here is subordinately governed 5 by the second whole, by Connective 'thereby'.) |ii2N| AV$3 |+IV|ii2N \=F, 2. He I took * I his nail I * between his teeth I so as to enclose I 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' + 4 ' the egg and hold * I it * firmly. (The second and third 5 + 4 '5 whole terms conjointly governing the fourth by Connec- tive dual 'so as'.) I N I V * I i3 N I * 3 I + IV I ii N ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' 4 ' 5 + IV*| N 1*1 |=P, II.-BY BI-GROUPALS. (a).^-BETWEEN Post-joiners of V and its subsequent IV TERMS. 1. Few I are so fortunate | as to be able I to do I this. ('So — 1 ' 2 c' c''' * ' 6 ' 7 as' before 2 of V and IV respectively.) iNl Vc'2| c^IVsl IV|N| = P- 'l'2 ' 4 'e'T* 2. It I was too good I to be lost. (Here co-ordination takes 1 ' 2 c' c" * place between 'too' the post-joiner of V and 'to' the inti- mate preposition of the IV.) iNl Vc'2|c"IVl=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 3. It I is a-little too strong I to pretend so much. 1 '2 c' c" * IN I Vii2c'2| c"IVn| = P4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 4. The Roman I was not yet fallen so low as not to remons- 1 ' c' 2 c' c" c" * trate. ('Not so' before 'low' and 'as not' before IV.) j ii N I A c' 1 V c' 2 I c" IV =P4 LECTURE IV. 69 5. It I is generally best I to assist ^ \ a needy person Uiin suck 12 ' 4 ' s c' a way I as to enable I him I to help I himself. (The 4th ' c" 6 ' 7 ' 8 ' 9 term in its post-joiner 3 governs co-ordinately the 6th by Connective 'such as'.) N I V 1 2 I IV * I ii 2 N U 3 (c' n) I c" IV I N I IV I N |=P9 i'2 '4' 6' ' e'r's'g' (6). — Between V and IV terms. 1. Nothing I pleased | him I more I than to beholding I con- 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' c' c'' 4*5 verse with her. (' More' as Post-joiner connective of V and ' than' as anti-joiner connective of IV.) I N I V iNc'l c"PV|N3| = P5. ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 ' 2. The chilling news I was indeed more than enough to over- 12 c' c^ whelm I her I with sorrow. 4 ' 6 ' I ii2Nl Vic'l c"iIV*|N |»3|=P5 ' 1*2 ' 4 ' 6 ' ' (c). — Between A and Vs. 1. Mr. Benson I could not be otherwise than pleased with so 1 ' c' C' C" 2 faithful an apprentice. (Asymmetrical, negative compa- rative co-ordinate.) 1 N I Ac' Ac'c"V3 |=P2. {d). — Between N and IV terms. 1. There had been I nothing more about it I than exhibiting 2 ' 1 c' c" * to us I a most-singular young woman in some of the most ' 6 singular-of situations. I 1 AV I N c' 3 I c" PV 3 I 1^ 2 2 N 3 3 3 |=P5 70 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. C— Connectives both of Asymmetrical and Symmetrical Parts. L— BY MONO-GROUPAL. 1. He I considered I himself as robbed anr^ plundered. 1 ' 2 ' 3 + + I N I V j N+pv + pv |=P,- 2. Maclean i was tboroughly tempted I to swim with his last 1 ' 2 ' 4 companion I hut conquered | the impulse as only leading to ' 2 ' 3 a needless peril. (Here the third term allows the connec- tive 'as — only' to intervene between it and its pv post- joiner.) N I A 1 V I IV 3 I 1 ' 2*4 ' + V I ll N + 4 3 |=P, 2 3 ' 3. It I is proper I to meet * I danger I * with boldness for any 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' good end, as, for instance, to save I a fellow-creature from + 6 ' 7 injury or death, to protect I our lives and property from a 6 ' 7 7 robber, and to defend * I our native country I * from the + 6 ' 7 attacks of enemies. ('As for instance' before 'to save.) N I V 2 I IV * I N I * 3 3 1+ I IV I 1^ N 3 (n + n) I l'2'4 's' ''e' 7 ' , IV * I i^N + N I * 3 I 6 ' 7 7 ' ' IV* I l3 2N| #3 3 I^Py 6 ■ 7 4. It I would have been difficult *■ ivhen prompted by Sophia 1 2 + and led by Dimmock, for the most- skilled and unscru- I LECTURE IV. 71 pulous prowler upon the town | to have balked | the party. 4 5 (No comma intervenes between 'diflScult' and 'when'.) In I A A V2 + 43 ' 1 ' a + 4 3, 3 (ii 2 + 2)3 I IV I iiN|=P5 5. The King I fixed I his eyes I as if about-to move I hut J 1 ' 3 ' 3 ' 4 ' + ' stopped short. I ('As if between third and fourth, 'but' 2 ' between second terms.) I ii N I V I i2 N I + IV I ' 1*2' 3 ' 4 ' + V 2 |=P, 2 6. The pair of worthies both I paused for sometime keeping 1 ' 2 mute and abstracted | as if beating about for an idea I and 4 endeavouring I to stimulate I their inventive faculties. ii N 3 N I V 3 I PV 2 + 2 I + PV 1 3 1 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 4 .pv|iy|i32N|=p, II.— BY BI-GROUPAL AND MONO-GROUPAL. 1. (To tell a falsehood respecting a neighbour, either to save 45 c' 6 ourselves, oi- from malice against him,)'^ I is I a still more- 7 C" 1 2 wicked and shameful action. ('Either' before IV, 'or' + 3 before 3.) (IV I ii n 3 I c' iv I n I c" 3 3)'^ I V I i^ 1 2 + 2 N |=P, 4 5 67 l'2' 3' 2, Railing, satire, and fighting I can do I no good, hut I will 1 1 + 1 ' ^ ' c' 3 c" ' certainly make | things worse than before. (Negative ad- 72 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. versative, both second and 3rd terms co-ordinate with next second term; also post- joiner 2 of third, co-ordinate with post-joiner). I N, N + N I A V I c' N I c" A 1 V I N c' c" 1 UPj 3. He I conceived * I the most-rancorous dishke I * to him, and 1 ' 2 ' 3 . ' + longed- for I nothing so much I as to see I hira I lose I the 2 3 q' c" ^6^6* acquired credit. ('So much— as' between N and Vs.) 7 |N|V*|ii2Nl*3| ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' + V I N c' I c" IV I N I IV I ll 2 N |=Py 2'3 ' a's'b' 7' 4. They | would not sell | their Turkish prisoners, | but send | them, I if possible, on some part of the African coast ('not — but' symmetrical co-ordinate, 'if possible* asymmetrical connective.) N I A c' V 1 18 2 N I 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' C"V*| N I * + 3 8 |=P3 2 ' 3 ' 5. I In houses and ships I ratsl sometimes become so numerous I I -1- ' 1 ' 2 c' as to do I much mischief. ('So' before 2 post-joiner of V, c' 4 ■ 5 'as' before IV term.) I * 3 (n+n) I N I 1 V c' 2 * I c" IV I 2 N \ = ?,. ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' ^. He I determined I to call again on Crawford and question 1 ' 2 ' 4 +4. I him on the subject but in such a way j as to afford j no 6 p' p" 6 LECTURE IV. 7^ groundf or suspicion relative to his motives | in sounding ( 7 8 him. 9 >J I V I IV 1 3 I 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' + IV * I N I * 3 + 30' I C" IV I 2 N 3 2 3 I PV I N \=V,. 4 5 6 7 8 9 Before I conclude my remarks on the Connectives let me speak to you first on the Equivalence of different Terms in the government of Parsing — equivalence being an exception to the Parsing government in terms already described. The verb "To be" is as it were equational and the N terms preceding and following it are equivalent ones, the former governing the V but the latter not governing the third term but is governed by it like the first ; what is good with "Be" is good with the Passive Vs except that they may have sometimes an Objective govern- ment. Besides the Apposition Ns illustrated at the beginning of this lecture, the Past Participle 'called' and 'named' as well as another with connective 'as', i.e., 'known as' show alike that the N terms before and after them as Connectives are equivalent or apposition ones, for past participle alone are analogous to adjectives and can never govern an N ; the government of the first N here determines the government of the second and hence these appositions are Equivalents of capacity in the same terms. Illustbations : — 1, At the time of the French Revolution, I there lived at Frankfort on the Maine, in Germany, | a Jewish banker, of limited means hut good reputation, named Moses Rothschild. *33|iV*333|i*2N3 (sn+sn) + N |=P 74 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. Etnelred called the unreaiy or uncoiinselled I quarrelled 1 + 1 + 1*2 with his clergy. I N + iiN + N I V3 | = P„ ' 1 1 1 ' 2 ' 3, On Jane 15, 1330, I his first son afterwards so well known ' 1 + as the Black Prince I was born. 1 2 Us, 3 I i^oNin + ii Nl AV |=P„ ' ' 1 1 ' 2 ' * On the other hand Equivalents are but Appositions in different Terms, as : — 1. The martin I is I a gentle bird. (The first and third are 1 ' 2 ' 3 Equivalent Terms here, both governing the V.) |x.N|V|x..N|=P3 2. The book | is entitled I Stylo-graphy. (The first and third 1 2 ' 3 Equivalents with Passive V.) |x'N|AV|N|=P3 3. They I were made I members of the meeting. (Here 'mem- 1 ' 2 ' 3 bers' is a third term Objective.) |N|AV|Na| = P3 4. He I is sure I to be elected I President of the Republic. (Here the fifth term is equivalent io the first but if you go to consider the second to be an Auxiliary and the fourth to be principal V, their conjoined formation into the second term will make the fifth the same third term as shown before.) I N| V2| IV I N8|=P5 LECTURE IV. 75 Conjunction connective 'as' stands asymmetrically as initial before the third term equivalent to the first. For examples : — 1. He I was recominended I as house-steward. 1 ' 2 ' 3 N I AV I +N |=P3 1 ' iJ ' 8 ' 2. The terrible sights and sounds 1 were 1 as tokens of anger. i ' 2 ' 3 I ii<2N + N I V I +N3 |=P3 The equivalent appositions of N and compound PP, of vocative PP and vocative N, have likewise been or will be shown, as-well-as that of Ns by punctuative comma and "the" when placed between the so-called apposition Ns. Equivalents are therefore appositions by interposition of terms by the same as-well-as connective joiners to terms, while on the other hand appositions are equivelents by non-interposition of terms but sometimes by interposition of joiners and punctuative comma. Hence both equivalents and appositions cannot but possess the same government in parsing. From punctuative and article development we come grad- ually to equivalence, i.e., apposition of terms by connective conjunction ' as\ '■such as'. Both punctuative connective and symmetrical connective conjunctions mark also the equivalence of government in parsing in a marked and distinct degree in the copulative and alternative varieties of them. Character of other connectives brings us to other relations between terms and terms, and joiners and joiners yet keeping their equivalence in parsing. We have shown in the above illustritions that some are connectives par excellence as regards like terms, joiners, and analogous joiners, others as intermediates in such extension of union, while others are but limited in such dealings. The class of Mono-groupals have been shown as single, dual, triple, and 76 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. phrasial, while of this dual variety it will be shown also that some do split themselves into Bi-groapals or Co-ordinates. Bi- groupals in excess to what the Grammarians admit of, have no doubt been shown but these are done with evident reason. You have seen that a certain solitary connective, 'as' and certain of the Duals ^more than,^ '■such as' convertible to Bi-groupals, besides placing themselves between like and analogous terms or between like and analogous joiners, -place themselves asymmetrically between unlike terms — V alone or with its joiners, subjoiners, and their derivatives IV or PV ; or between A and V ; or between N and its post-joiner PV or adjective ; or lastly between PV and IV and its post-joiner PV. The minor con- nectives of terms and joiners will gradually lead us along with others of the special subordinate and co-ordinate classes, to structural Subordinates, Co-ordinates, and Compounds which will be dealt with hereafter. The subordinate character of IV terms to those of the Vs has been distinct in some of the above illustrations and it is this subordinate character that may sometimes lead us to stretch the extent of terms beyond 9. As an illustration of this I give you one of 11 terms in the Mono-simple which by no means alters the grand general principle of the N | V groupal arrangement of terms in the sentence. 1. We I ought I to try I to keep I ourselves I clam and watch- 12 4 6 7 + full I so-as-to be able I to do I it. (Preposition *to' streng- i ' 8 ' 10 ' 11 thened by 'so-as'.) I N I V I IV I IV * I N U 2+2 I IV 3 I IV I N |=P,i ' 1 ' a ' 4 ' 6 -7 ' ' 8 ' 10 ' 11 ' LECTURE V. Students and Gentlemen, 1 have told you enough of the Mono-simples already. There remain now but the loose, emphatic or absolute parts of speech to tell you of. Before the narration or description begins in the Mono-simple the ejaculatory utterances of these parts of speech must commence. They are initials or appendages rarely final or medial that hold no Government whatever to the main Mono- simple nor any Government within themselves. They are called Interjections though not very properly so, for they begin the speech. Interjections are pure and you will find them also as drived from other parts of speech as the Ad- jectives^ Adverbs, and Verbs. They may be phrasial too. For the recognition of this class of words we have no difficulty at all, for a note of admiration " ! " immediately follows each or a comma takes the place of the admirative punctuation. These punctuations will also be taken advantage of during the depiction of the Formula and the absolute bracket * d J) ' will seggragate them from the Mono-simple. Application of Interjections to Mono-simples, their illustrations and Formula. 1. Alas \ 1 must finish * I my journey I * alone. (Pure) 1 2 ' 3 ' |N|AV»|i^N|*i| = ^!>=P3 2. Strange ! it | aches * | me | * ^o the heart. (Adjective) <=!>Niy.|Nh3|=<.!>P3 78 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. See ! my horse I wins I the race. (Verb) 1 ' 2 ' 3 x»N|y|i.N| = <^V!>P, 4. ^'Yesl Fi?s !" cried James with matchless impatience and alacrity. (Ad verb) (Ji !i !|) V*| N| *3 3|=(Ji!i! J)P, 5. By heaven ! "William Leo Alfred Stavent ! howl T | love ' 1 ' 2 I that name. (Preposition Phrase) 3 (^3!N !|)i I N I V| i2N |=c|3N J)P3 When Ns are allowed to be thought as Interjections they become the Vocatives. They may be alone or preceded by Inter- jections when commencing the Mono-simples. Personal Pronouns also become Vocatives alone or followed by the apposition N Vocatives, the piinctuative marks of distinction remaining the same. Vocative Ns take their Ante and Post joiners also ; all these, when they increase in their numbers, take the conjunctions too by the general rule. No government but pronominal relation only of the N Vocativo extends to the Mono-simple. Sentence subordinates to Vocatives will be coni«idered afterwards while Interjection Vocatives will be considered just now. Interjec- tions and Vocatives begin to fchow forth development of absolute structures to be treated later on. Application of Interjection to Narrative Expressions. With Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. 1. (J iVo, my son, j a life of independence | U generally | a life of pleasure. 3 (^ 1, i3 N, > I ii N 3 I y 1 I i> N 3 | = (; 1, 1^ N, > P, LECTOR E V. 7^ 2. C Damsel, S it I is not for thee I to question hut to obey. T r 1 ' 2 ' 4 + 4 (Noun pronominal relation between 'Damsel' and *thee» exists here.) |N|Vx3|iy + IV|=c;N,>P, 3. C <^y, J this I is indeed | testimony. T ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 <''>l?iV|N|=P3 4. C Farewell ! S I | shall not soon forget I you. ^ f^ 1 ' y ' 3 N|Aiay|N| = P3 -5. C Good yeoman, S the Lady Rowena | is desirous | to return to Rotherwoofl. -C. C My dear son, S It I is I a pleasant task I to give I you advice on your enquiring points. 5 < 1= . N,> I.N I V I x'.N I IV I N N3| = P, 7. d Ladies and Gentlemen, S I I thank * \ vou I * very much for offering I the chair to me admidst the crowded assembly. 4 ' 6 C; N + N, S I N I V * I N U 1 1 I PV I ii N 3 3 I =c;n + n,;)p, 8. C Z'infi' of outlaws and prince of good fellotos ! j no deed 1 1 +1 '1 done during your absence in these turbulent times I shall be commemorated to thy disadvantage. (^ N 3 + N 3 ! |) 2 N 4 3 3 I AAV 3 |=(J N 3 + N 3 J) P., so 8TTL0GBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 9. C Thou, my poor Jcnave, j I I shall go presently I to rewar(f ^1 1 '^ 1 ' 2 '4 1 thee. (Vocative PP and N Appositions.) I N I AV I I IV I JI !=< PP, N > P, You have seen then that Interjections and Vocatives take- the first seat in speech and this is surmised in consequence of their emphatic nature; You have seen also, that naked Vs? followed by " ! " go to rank amongst the Interjections and thus retain the initial seat but when V begins a Mono-simple followed by N expressed or understood, its expression is changed from the narrative or descriptive to that of the "Imperative." The inyersion of the first pair of N | V of the Narrative into V | N of the Imperative, differentiates between the two. When A appears with the V, the N in the Imperative intervenes between the A and V. The punctuntive termination by a Period is com- mon to both and their precedence by Interjection and Vocative- remains common too. In the graphic Formula the ellipsis of first N will be shown by its enclosure within a parenthesis and in the Rational, 'thick symbols' will differentiate it from the Narrative. Illnstrations of Inversion of N | V terms in Imperative Expression and its union to Interjection absolutes. 1. Be wise, and make not I bootless opposition. 2 -f 2 3 |V(N)2| +V (N) 1 I 2N |=P2 ' 2 1 ' a ' 3 ' 2. Never tell an untruth. (Imperative V rarelt/ takes Adverb 2 3 Ante-joiner.) (N)|iV|i'N|=P, 3. Let I your guards I attend I me. 2 a ' 4 ' 6 I Vi (N)|i»N| IV I N|=P, .2 ' 1 ' 3 ' 4 • 6 ' LECTURE r. 81 4. Do not expose * I thyself I * to v)ounds and death. :j ' 3 ' + I Al(N) V*| Nl *3 + 3|=P3 ' 12*3 . 5. Love I thou I thy neighbours. 2 ' 1 ' 3 |V|N|i«N|=P3 '21' 3 S. Look from the window once again, f kind maiden. ~) 2 ^ "^ , |y|(N)|aix|<.N>|=P, "7. d No, my father, S let I us I instantly leave | this evil place. 5 (J 1 , !•'» N, S I V I (N) I N I 1 IV I i2 2 N I =< 1 , 1^ N , )) P, Mono-simplea allowing the same inversion in the first pair of N I V into V I N like that in the Imperative expression, occur again in the Interrogative expressions, when N is, however, always expressed. This expression has its distinctive final punctuation, the note of interrogation which will be taken advantage of in the Rational Formula. Certain Adverb ante- joiners belong to it while its relation remains the same with regard to Interjection and Vocative (absolute) as in the two others, — the Narrative and the Imperative. Illustrations of Inversion of N | V terms in Interrogative Expression and its union to Interjection absolutes. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, 1. Have I you I then I a convent I to retire ? a ' 1 ' ' 3 ' 4 I V»| Nl *i| i^Nl IV | = P,? 8Z STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. Are | you | not then well protected in EngLand ? IA I N I 111 V3 | = P.? ' . 1 ' 2 ' 3. How call I you I those grunting brutes running about Ott 2 ' 1 ' 3 their 4 legs ? I 1 V I N| i2oNpvi3 |=P3? 4. Why do I you I offer me a deference so unusual ? 1 ' 2 3 3 I 1 A I Nl V I NiJNi2|=P3? ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 ' 6. C Traveller, j whence comest I thou ? 1 r 2 ' 1 hy|N|=P,? 6. What I dost thou think of this, C friend Gtirth, ha ? S 3 ' 1 -s ^ 1 • (Here inversion of Terminal Vocative and Interjection^ has taken place.) |N|A|N|y3,|(;.N,!?>=P3C;.N!>? 7. (^Ha ! proud TemplarS hast | thou | forgotten | your twice-repeated fall before this lance ? 3 It may be remarked however that interrogative relative "who" being independent of an antecedent and not subordinate to the Mono-simple principal, does not admit the inversion of N I V but retains position as in the narrative. For example : — 1. Who I dares I to arrest I a knight of the Templar of Zion 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 8 within the girth of his own preceptory and in the presence of the Grand Master ? I N I V I IV I l' N 3333 + 33 |=P5? ' l' 2 ' 4 ' 6 LECTURE V. o3 The fourth expression in the Mono-simple is the Exclama- tory having for its distinctive punctuation, the note of admira- tion. Both the narrative and the imperative may be recognized as exclamatory by their terminal punctuation, the " !". We see then that they may or may not admit iuversion in the first pair of N I V. The really exclamatory expression however admits of inversion of N | V, It has got a particular A also as its indicator and it has got also particular adverb as ante- joiner to the V. The A is 'may' and the adverb is 'what' or * how'. An adjective after this adverb is also visible. The exclamatory parts of speech behave v^'ith it the same way as they did with the other expressions. Illustrations of Inversion of N | V terms in Exclamatory Expression and its union to Interjection absolutes. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Forniulce respectively. 1. Long live I tlie king ! (Auxiliary ' may' is understood here.) 2 1 |iV|iiN| = P,! IS ' 1 ' 2. May I the king I live forever ! ' 1 ' 2 |A|i.N|yi|=P,! 3. C^FareicelLp may | he | sh)wer-down on you | his choicest blessings ! 3 4. Heaven, rmy leige^) \vd,l\i taken* \ tliis proud man \for its 1 r 2 ' 3 ' victim ! (This is Narrative admirative with medial vocative.) I N, |c|i8N,;)| AV^|i22N|*.3|=PJ 84 STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. (^Child of my sorrowS well shouldst | thou | be called Benoni instead-of Eebecca ! |xA|N|AV|N3|=(;Na,>P,! 6. C False Norman, S thy money | perish with thee ! (;2N,;)i3N|V3| =(;.3N,>P2 ! 7. C Archers, j send I me an arrow through yon monk's frock ! ^ ' 2 ' 3 3 V.|(N)|Nx.N|*3| = P3! 8. C Thou, my child, S thou I slialt render I the lady this 1 • 1 ' 2 ' 3 service ! 3 (J N , i3 N , S I N I AV I ii N i2 N \=(^ N, i^ N , S P.,! 9. (J Sweet Lady of Clery, blessed Mother of Mercy I 1 have | compassion with me a sinner ! 3 (^2 N 3 , 2 N 3 ! J) I V * I (N) I N I 3 (n ii n) I = C;2xN3,2N3;)P3! It will be shown afterwards that interrogative adverb 'why' and exclamatory adverb and adjective 'how' and 'what' follow the Narrative or Imperative expressions of the Mono- simples as Expression Subordinates, keepiog however their Narrative style or structure but changing their respective punctuation into periods. LECTURE Vr. "Stddents and Gentlemen, In the last lecture I have related to you of inversions in position of the N and V terms in the Mono-simples in their three .N3|=P3 3. A rate so favourable for the article I was. never sanctioned 1 ' 2 before. 4. So-glorious a victory | has scarcely been won within the 1 ii past century. ' 1 ' 2 5. Full Many a flower I is born I to bhish unseen. 1 ' 2 ' 4 I 221IN I AV I IV4 | = P, ' i ' 2 ' 4 Certain Post Joiners of N transposable by conversion into Ante-joiners have been shown in Lecture I. Of the first series of the same Ante-joiners, the PAs by emphasis precede the article Adjectives. For examples : — 1. Such a conduct in him I is reprehensible to the extreme. 1 ' 2 I i2ii N.3 I V23 |=P„ 1 ' 2 ' * 2. All the crowd of spectators I ^iiouted I their applause 1 ' 2 ' 3 upon the victor. I iSiiN.ol V I l3N3 UP3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3. Both the individuals I trusted to their own abilities. 1 2 I i2ii N I V 3 l=P2 I 1 ' 2 * LECTURE VI. 8f Ante-joiners of Vs are not transposaMe. Adverbs as part of the V may separate from the Vs and go to the first seat by the same emphasis while in separable Adverb out of the post- joiner of V take the same first seat for the same reason. For examples : — 1. Out I canie * i the contemptible mouse I * from its hole. (Collateral transposition of 1st and 2ad terms also.) |.V*|i>.N|.,,l = P, 2. * Onvmrd I the procession I marched * for its destination. ' 1 ' 2 3. * Up he turned * the table-cloth and found no letter ' 1 ' a ' a 2 ' .-i there. I * 1 N I V * I ii N ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 It must be remarked here that the inseparable adverb has brought on transposition in the first pair of N | V between themselves and this holds good with certain separated adverbs. This is double or collateral transposition^ Initial and collateral. For examples : — 1. There is scarcely I a man I to help I me in my adversity 2 ' 1 ' 4 ' 5 |.yi|..N|iy|No|=p, 2. Here appears I another argument in support of his views. 2 ' 1 I 1 V I l2N33 |=P2 ' 2 ' 1 ' Certain Pronominal adjectives, the Post-joiners to Vs go to the first seat bringing on transposition similar to the above. For example : — -68 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGOAGE. 1. Such should be I the moaus for the end in view. 2 ' 1 I *l2 I AV*| ll N3 3 |=P, ' ' 2 ' il ' " Like Adverbs, post-joining Preposition phrases of V take the first seat by Emphasis. When post-joining preposition phrases of V overcrowd so as to create confusion that which refers to time sometimes takes the first seat in the sentence. This is as much for emphasis as for the second reason just told. Transposition of Preposition Phrases of V to First Seat. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. 1. * In this un-remitting labour \ he 1 continued * several days. ' 1 ' 2 |*3|N| V»3|=P2 "2. * In one respect at least I this I is * I a merciful appointment. ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 I *33 I N I V»| 1^ 2N | = P3 12 3 -3. « Jast be/ore dusk I they I return * in long strings from the ' 1 ' 2 foraging of the day. I #13 |N I V*3 3 3|=P2 4. * In his whole life I Nelson I was never known * I to act ' 1 ' 2*4 unkindly towards an officer. I tts I Nl AiV*| IVi3 \=V, I. I 1 I -J ' 4 ' -5. * On several occasions I he I succeeded » I in baffling I the ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' pursuit and researches of the king's officer. S 6 I •s I N I V*| PVl i^N + NsUP. ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 5 ' LECTURE VI. 80* 6. * For our pleasure and not their ovm \ they I sweat * under ' 1 ' 2 a cumberous heap of finery, U3 + 3|N|V*33 l=P2 I ' 1 ' 2 ' 7. « Upon this maxim\ is founded * I one of the prettiest 2 ' 1 sayings of Publius Syrus. I *3 I AV*| N3'3 |=P2 I ' 2 ' 1 ' 8. * At the inner end of this burrow I does I this bird I deposit * ' ' 1 ' 2 in a ^ood degree of safety | her rude nest consisting of fine grasses and feathers, usually goorie feathers very inartistically laid together. I * 3 3 I A I 1^ N I V * 3 3 I 1^ 2 N pv 3 (-2 n + n) 1 2 n 1 1 pv i|=P3 From these examples you will gather that transposition of preposition phrases like those of adverbs sometimes brings on collateral transposition of the first pair of N | Vs. You are to understand also that the prevention of overcrowding mentioned before is also for perspicuity the third reason for transposition. Taking into consideration that V is the pivot upon which the balance of Mono-simple structure is poised, its arm on the right of the pivot should be shorter than that on the left but by no means the left arm should be prolonged beyond a certain limit. To prevent this unusual prolongation of the left arm you will find partially here the reason why transposition is needed though the full stretch of it can only be shown after we have done with the consideration of the Subordinate structures. The prevention then of unuswd prolongation of the left arm is t\iQ fourth reason of transposition. The pv or adjective phrases j/osterior to N suffer transposition as illustrated below. They may be considered as absolute phrases^ also. ^0 STYLOGRAPHT. OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE, Transposition of PV Post-joiner of N to First Seat. Illustrations loith Graphic and Rational Formulca respectively. 1. * Situated on the eastern coast of Sicily I Etnjut I appears ' 1 ' 2 at the first glance I to have I a very simple structure. 4 ' 5 I PV33N| VsJ IV I lll2N|=P5 2. * Excessively variable iu its texture I protogine ^ I passes ' 1 'a from the most perfect granitic aspect to that of a porphyry. I 123N I Vs's'^s |=P, ' 1*2 ' " 3. * Consequent on its continual cooling | the star originally gaseous * I would attain I a liquid state. ' 2 ' 3 I i3iiNi2| AV I ll 2 N | = P3 4. * Circulating round the sun in obedience to the law of univert-al gravit;;tion I this incandescent gaseous mass » I 1 ' was necessarily reguhited by the laws-governing other a material substances. I pv y 3 3 3 I i2 2 2 N I A 1 V n pv 1^ 2 n I =P., I ' 1 ' 2 ' " 5. * Secure in his own cunning and subtlety I he * I feared ' 1 '2 not I tho attack of the violated laws of his country. 3 I 2 3 (i3 2n + n)| N I Vil 1IN33UP3 . 1 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' We come now to the discussion of the transposition of the third term or second N in the Mono-simple. Tiiis N may take the first seat by emphasis or it may very often intrude LECTURE VI. SI itself between the V and its Post-]oiners. The latter condition becomes an absolute ntcessity when this term is a naked Personal Pronoun or when it has but only its Ante-joiners and oono of the Post-joiners attached to it. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively, 1. Thee \ I I love from the core of my heart. 3 ' l' 2 I N I N I V3 3| = P, 2. This idea he conceived while meditating upon the aspect 3 ' 1 ' 2 i of the country. I i2N I N I V I 1PV3.3 |=P, I 3 ' I ' 2 ' 4 ' 3. I I saw ] it I with my own eyes. % 1 ' 3 ' 3 ' |N|V.|N|»o|=P3 4. S.iint John I wrote I his gospel | at the age of ninety. |N|y*ii3N|.3|=P3 It suffices here to mention only (for as yet we are not in a position to illustrate) that whichever of the two, the final N of the post-joiuing preposition phrase of V or the third term N be prolonged by subordination, the one that is not subordinated precedes the other. The transposition of the post-joining pre- position phrase of V then is a transposition posteriorly in contrast to the anterior method of third N hitherto shown, H\\Q fourth term ZFof the Mono-simple gets also transposed to the first seat, but as a post-joiner to the first N it will not be found so transposed. The IV" post-joiners to N being its apposition analogue, their transposition is not permissible (unless by Conversion of Structurfs to be shown afterwards). 92 StYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Transposition of IV terms to First Seat. 1. To make-up for this deficiency \ they I are furnished with- 4, ' 1 ' 2 long legs for wading or long bills for groping or usually with both. I IV 3 I N I AV 3 ^ I ' 4 ' 1 ' 2 ' + 34 + 13|=P, 2. To prevent I her \ falling \ a victim to so laudable aft 4 ' 6 ' 6 ' 7 exercise of her talents I I I interposed in a moment with the ' 1 ' 2 hoe and performed upon him I an act of decapitation. 12 '3 I IV In I pv 1 1IN33 1 N I V33 1 +V3 1 i^Ns \=i\ '4'6'6' 7 'I'a '2' 3' The fourth PV term likewise may take the first seat but its position in the serial term cannot be maintained in some instances on account of the sequence of action of the V ta that of the Participle and on account of the Noun-pronominal relation extending to the Mono-simple from the PV. In the latter instances the first position of PV is an apparent trans- position or Absolute formation. Transposition of PV terms to First Seat. 1. By extending | this phenomenon to the whole surface of the globe I the solidification of its entire surface I would be produced. 2 I PV I i2N3 3 I ii N3| AAV |=P, 2. After lingering there many years I be I was released under 4 6 1 2 an act of insolvency. |PVi|.N|N| AV,»|=P. LECTUBE VI. 93 3. In extracting I teetli vnth the forceps^ I three things I should 4 ' 5 1 be kept in view. (Pare transposition as in Ex. 2.) 2 |PV|Ne|.N|y3|=P, 4. On standing I healthy urine I undergoes [ change. 4 ' 1 2 ' 8 I ?V I 2N I V I N | = P, (Pare.) ' 4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 5. By struggling lolth misfortunes I we I are sure (to receive I 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' some wounds in the conflict. (Pure.) PVs N Vs IV i2N 3 =P6 'e 'l'2'4'5 ' 6. Before convicting I a man of blasphemy \ an intention on 4*6 ' 1 his part to injure must be proved. (Transposition by interchange of N and PP as in Ex. 1.) I PV I 1^ N3 I ii N34 1 AAV UPs ' 4 ' 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' 7. By being | the constant companions of her solitary hours j 4 6 they I naturally become I the objects of her superstition. 1 ' 2 ' 3 (Pare.) PV I 1I2N3 I N I iV I i^Ns |=P5 4 ' 6 ' 1 ' 2 3. ' 8. (^Having ivaitedfor nearly an hour | without seeing j Craw- fordS I Henry Hunter I took I his departure. r • 1*2' 3 N|y|i3.N|=<467>P3 I 94 STYLOGRAPH Y OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE, 9. (^Talcing I care I not to frighten \ it hy any violent move^ '4*6' 6 '7 7nent Ij he i threw I the rat a small piece of bread close to '' 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 the horizontal slit in the wall. ^?Y I N I 1 IV I N 3 S N I V I ii N ii 2 N 3 2 3 3 I ^4 s's'T^ilg' 3 3 ' - =C;4 5 6 7^P3 The above examples show gradually from real transposition to absolute formation. You find in the first seven transposed examples that intimate prepositions as a general rule always precede the Participle Terms (though they may be absent from absolute participles). You will find here also that pronominal connection of any antecedent N in suite of the transposed PV extends to that in the Mono-simple, which however on the break- ing of the transposition shall have to admit interchanges of antecedent N in the Mono-simple and subsequent PP, that is, personal pronoun in the suite of the PV term. You will find also that the government of the Vs stands good upon the PVs though they are transposed to the first seats. But in the last two absolute ones the intimate prepositions of PV are absent as a general rule (though they may be excep- tionally present). The Pronominal relations of antecedents in the PVs do also extend to pronouns in the chief sentences. The government of the V upon the PVs does not exist in them at all but the relations with Ns in terms or post-join*ers and PP must be yet conceived. Remark and remember that as these PVs have no government relation In Parsing with Vs but have mere relation of N and PP in the respective structures they are PV Ahsolutes. You remember also that Ns, having PV alone or with its suite and having no V for its government have been already CdAled the ^rat N Absolutes. Analogy has thus brought you oa again to the PV Absolutes having no government in Parsing.^ You might consider as well that Interjections and Vocative Nouru LECTURE VI. 95 and Vocative Pronouns are ahsolute parts of speech having na government of their own in Parsing. Analogy can lead you again to the finding out of IV Absolutes with no relation to Ps whose further illustrations I give below. 1. To be sure, she I is married, Sir. 4 1 2 1 {N|Ay}=(;4>{P4 2. To he brief, the hour of midnight I had struck. 1 ' 2 (;iv2;){iiN3iAv}=(:;4;)p, Z. To tell I you the truth, Rivingstone I should be out of our 4 .5 5 1* 2 way, I and hanged without danger to ourselves. ' + 2 I (J IV I N ii N|) i N I AV 1 3 I + I V 3 3}=(j4 5|)P2 4. To sum-up I the foregoing arguments of the freethinhers, I I 4 ' 5 ' 1 I may shortly say of their main object-to establish the supremacy of Reason and the Moral Sense over that of Theological dogmas. I = <4> 2. But to return to the infatuated, darling daughter of the opulent and money-making merchant. (^+ IV 3 3 )) = (tfy 96 STYLOGRAPIIY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. Not to mentioa I the exchange of a sweet smelling gardea A 5 for the putrid exhalations of Silver End. (JilV I i^Nsss [) = (J4 5|) 4. To describe I an equilateral triangle | on a given finite 4 6 straigli;; line. 5. But to continue. (!+ IV |) = C|4|) Adjective absolute with co-ordinate connectives is also seen. For example : — C So far, so good. b=c! c' 1 c" 2 S The siihsequent terms, the fifth, the sixth, the seventh, &c., would follow suite to the fourth IV or FV terms in the transposition when such transposition is feasible. For examples : — 1. To catch I a glimpse of the object of all curiosity I many a clerk | that day managed I to sneak-ojff half an hour earlier 1 ' 2 ' 4 than usual from-out-of his dusky office in the Inns of Court. IV I 1IN33 I 21I N I 3 V I IV3c'c'2333 Up, 6 ' 7 ' 1 ' a ' 4 ' 2. To keep I him I from laying I violent hands I upon himself I 4 ' 6 6 ' 7 ' two soldiers I were placed in his apartment. IV I N I PV » I 2 N I ♦s I 2 N I AV 3 |=P, 4'6'e ' 7' ' I'a ' J LECTURE VI. ^7 Absolute formation, I may again say, consist?!, therefore, in the want of the parsing government of a term ; in the extension of its N pronominal relation to the main Mono-simple ; in the antecedent or sequent action of PV and IV to those of the V of the main Mono-simple, when the PV is generally recognized by its dropping the intimate preposition or in any two conditions mentioned above. Conditions other than these or only the prono- minal relation existing in terms or in the post-joiners of terms indicate that the structure is a Mono-simple one. When the third term is naked and the first is prolonged and ihe V is the verb 'Be', transpositional interchange takes place between the two, as : — 1. Many I were I the objections raised against the startling 3 ' 2 ' 1 theory of Copernicus. / I Nl V I ii Npv3.3|=P3 ' 3 ' 2 ' 1 ' Tims in the case of 'Be' the first naked N and the second JSf with post-joiners are convertible. Like the PV aud IV Absolutes, Preposition phrase Abso- lutes with connectives may begin Paragraphs and stand inde- pendent or unite with the Mono-simple. For examples : — 1. So-far-as to the manner of religious beliefs. CC 3 3 J Now-as to beliefs. As to your son, I 1 promise to do| something as speedily as p ossible. " 4 6 <" '>f?lll IV 4 N 6 3 C' 1 C" 1 i 3. As to your son, I promise to do something I for him Fortunately for her situation, j Arnold and his young com- 1 panion j again entered I the room. 1 ' 2 ' 3 (J 1 3 J) { N + i3 2 N I 1 V I 1^ N }=cj 1 3 ^Pj 98 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 6. Then-as to John Dimmoch. \ l)e I was I to be druo^ged to- ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 stupefaction by the miscreants acting as the servants of Bremer and Barclay. (^ c 3 J) { N I V I IV 3 3 pv + ii n 3 (n + n) I }=(J c 3 '^?^ 6. But to her sorroio, I he I informed I lier I in his rejoinder I ' 1 ' 2 ' 3' ' to sign I certain deeds in his and a lawyer's presence. 4 ' 5 Cj 1 3 J){ N I V * I N I * 3 I IV I 2 N 3 (i3 + I'r^n) | }=(J i » J)?^ We have heitherto occupied ourselves with the Inverswn^ of first and second terms in the Imperative, Interrogative and Exclamatory expressions and Transpositions of each and all the terms and joiners in the Mono-simple of the Narrative,— the former being a rule and the latter, in consequence of various causes already mentioned. We come presently to the consider- ation of another important philological point which concerns only the first 3 or 5 terms of the Mono-simple structure. This point is the Transformation or Conversion .;??'s^, of these three terms into others or their Joiners with interchanged transposi- tion, retaining yet the original sense of the structure but chang- ing the Voice Expression of the Vs. A glimpse of such conversion and interchage has no doubt been shown when we dealt with the Ante- and Post- joiners of Xs, though there we- have only represented them as equational. This change of the V by conversion along with conversion and interchange of the other two terms concerns the Active and Passive expressions only. The Neuter which is wanting in its third terra is not .concerned here. Secondly ^ will come the same consideration of structures with 5 terms, the third being wanting. Thirdly^ we will show how far the 7th term admits such a conversion inta the first term with collateral conversions of other terms and their interchanges. LECTURE VI. A.— Illustrations of Conversion of the Active expressions of Y into Passive with Conversion and Interchange of the first and third terms in the Mono-simple Structure. Active Expression. I I love John. 1 ' :i ' 3 N|V|N| = P3 i. Z o 2. Ram struck I ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ^ 3. We I might believe I him. 1 ' 2 ' 8 |N| AV|N|=P3 1 Passive Expression. 1. John is loved hy me. 1 ' 2 N I AV3UP2 1 ' 2 ' 2. I I was struck hy Ram. 1 ' 2 Nl AVs | = P2 1 ' 2 ' 3. He I might be believed hy us. 1 ' 2 N I AAV 3 | = P2 1 ' 2 Observe here that the preposition 'by' plays an important roll in the formation of the post-joiner of theV by going before the first converted term. Rule for thk above Conversion. — Change the third term into the first, convert the Verb Active into Passive, and lastly change the first term into a prepositional phrase by placing the preposition *by' before its suited conversion and place them all in their respective places. 100 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. B. — Illustrations of Passive-active conversion in which a first term is made to develope in the Active though its Equivalent third remains elliptical in sense or its third itself remains present in the Passive, [ 1. This [ was kept concealed in a box. (Passive.) |N|AV43|=P, They I kept I this I * concealed in a box. (Active.) 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' 1 |N|V,|N|»-'|=P3 2, They \ wero told I to go away. (^Passive.') 1 ' 2 ' 4. I Nl A V I IVi|=P4 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' Others I told I them I to go away. (Active.) 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 I Nl V I N|lVi|=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' 3. We I have been tempted into the bargain. (Passive.) 1 2 I N I A A V3 |=P2 They I have tempted | us \ into the bargain. (Active.) 1 2 'a ' |N|AV»|N|,3|=P3 4.. He I was made I a magistrate. (Passive.) 1 ' 2 ' 3 I N| A V I i^N Up, ' 1 2 3 ' They I made I him a magistrate. (Active.) 1 ' a ' 3 3 I Nl V|NiiN|=P3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 3 LECTURE VI. 101 The last example proves that the third term after a Passive Verb is not a convertible objective but an equivalent first term and hence it shifted not from its original place. Rule for the above Convbrsion.— Develope a first term which is elliptical in sense, change V Passive into Active, convert the first term into third and place them all in their respective situations. When the third term is present here it is inconver- tible and un-transposable. C. — Illustrations of kGliYe-Passive or Passive-active Con^ version of Mono-simple of first four or five terms, the third being wanting. 1. He I learnt I to speak * 1 French \ =*: within 6 months. 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 ' {Active.) |N|V|IV*|N|«3|=P, French I was learnt I to be spoken by him within 6 months. 12 4 (^Passive.') I N I A V I IV 3 3 |=P, 2. We I intended | to give * | bonbons | * to the children. (Active.) |N|V|iy*|N|.3| = P, Bonbons were intended I to be given by us to the children. 1 2 ' {Passive.) N AV IV 3 3 .1 ' 2 ' 4 Henry and his Council I sent for him [ to examine. 1*2 ' 4 {Active.) N + i3N I Vsl IV | = P4 1 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 102 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. He I was sent-for | to be examined hy Hennj and his Council. (Passive.) I N I AV I IV 3 (n + i3n) = P4 1 ' 2*4 Rule for the above Conversion. — The same as that with three terms except that the IV is also to be rendered Passive or Active as the case may be and the fifth term or the N of post-joiner of fourth term into first term. D. — Illustration of Actiye-Passive Conversion witli seven terms how far feasible. 1. He I tried I to learn I to speak I French I within six months. 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' 7 ' (Active,) I N I V I IV I IV*| N I *3 | = P- 'l'2'4'6 '7' ' French | was tried I to be learnt and (to be) spoken by hiui 1 2 ' 4 4 within six months. (Passive.) I N I AV I IV I + I IV33 l=P, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' ' 4 You see then that it is not feasible, as 'and' has to be introduced abolishing the government of IV upon IV. When the Passive V is followed by Active IV, the ffth term may be interchanged with the first and the IV Active changed into Passive. For examples : — 1. Kneller I is said I to have painted I the figure. 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 (Active.) The figure is said to have been painted by Kneller. 1*2' 4 (Passive.) ii N AV IV 3 \='P, 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' LECTURE VI. 103- In Passive expressions prepositions other than 'by' are visible in the post-joining preposition phrases of V. These are 'with,' 'for,' 'of,' 'through,' Ho,' 'on account of,' &c. The- following are the examples : — 1. They I were marked out /or probity. (^Passive.') \ ' 2 N I A Vi3 |=P2 1 ' 2 ' Probity I marked ♦ I them | * out. (^Active.") 1 '2 ' 3 ' N|V.|N|*.| = P, 2. The table I was covered vnth fruits and flowers. 1 ' 2 {Passive.) ii N AVs (n + n) \=?^ 1 ' 2 ' Fruits and flowers I covered | the table. {Active,) 1 1 ' 2 ' 3 |N^N|V|x.N| = P3 3. Ye I shall be hated of all men. {Passive.) ' 2 I N I AAV 3 | = P2 ' 1 ' 2 ' All men | shall hate I ye. {Active.) |i»N|Ay|N( = P3 4. This favor from the king | could only be obtained through the ministry. {Passive.) I l2N3| Al AV3 | = P2 •104 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. The ministry I could only obtain i this favour from th© 1 2 ' 3 king. {Active.) I i^N I Ai V*| i2N I *3 |=P3 5. He I was saved on account of the swiftness of his horse, 1 ' 2 |N|AV3 3|=P2 (Passive.) The swiftness of his horse I saved I him. (Active.) 1 ' 2 ' 3 |N3|y|N|=P3 E.— Conversion of Progressive-Active into Progressive- Passive and vice versa. Progressive Active. 1. The groom I was conducting I the horse to the stable. 1 2 ' 3 I i^Nl AV *| ii N I «3 |=P, I 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' 2. We I saw 1 him I profiting in the transaction. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 I Nl Vl N I PV3 Up, Progressive Passive. 1. The horse I was being- conducted by the groom to the stable. 1 ' 2 I i»N I AV33 |=P. ' 1 ' 2 ' ' 2. He I was seen I to be- profiting in the transaction. 12 4 I Nl AV I PT3 \ = V, ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' The above conversions are formed by the same rule. LECTURE VII. We have seen what Parts of Speech Absolutes are ; we have seen also Phrase Absolutes and the N Absolutes of grammarians but these are by no means Mediah in the Mono-simples. It remains now to tell you of the literal inter jectional absolute of joiners and terms, or interjectional Mono-simples that are thrown between the Chief Mono-simple. These interjectional medials are (1) parts of speech and (2) phrases in contrast to the initial Absolutes or terminal Absolutes already described ; while (3) interjectional Mono-simples are in every way the same with the Chief Mono-simples except their interjectional or medial position within the latter. We are not in a position to speak to you of the (4) Subordinate interjectional Mono-simples as yet but reserve their illustrations for the future. These medial Absolutes, Appo- sitions, Joiners or terms, and the medial Mono-simples are no other than the Parenthetics segregated within the Chief Mono- simples by commas, dashes, brackets single or triple. Ot the commas the second is its own while the first belongs but to the Chief Mono-simple. Let us go now to illustrate and formulate them. N-arrative-Parenthetic or Interjectional medial. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. 1. In the days of Hipparchus | the length of the tropical year {an important astronomical datum) | was supposed | to consist of exactly 365 days and a quarter of a day. 4 {Term.) I 3 3 I ii N 3 n (ii 2 2 n) I AV I IV 3 (i 2 n + ii n) 3 |=P^ • ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 106 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. la the same year (1804) I the same daring endurance and 1 + iieroism I were evinced by the officers of H. M. S. Hindostan. 1 ' 2 (No/ a joiner. ) I 3n (n) I 1I22N + N I AV3 3 | = P„ ' 1 1 ' 2 I ' 3. I I was totally unacquainted either with the practice of the law or the foundations of it, (J having' never opened I a law book {except the Bible) in my life. S , {Joiner.) I N I A 1 V c' 3 3 1 ' 2 ic" 3 3 I (J A 1 PV ii 2 N (3 n) 3 |)=P2 (J 4 5 J) 4. The death of Captain Cook I took I place at Owyhee {now 1 ' 2 ' 3 more-usually written Hawii) the principal island of the Sandwich group in a sudden tumult of the natives on the 14th of February 1779. {Joiner.) I ii N 3 I V * I N 3 n(i 1 pv n) ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 1' 2 n 3 I * 3 3 3 3 3 | = P3 5. His bones, they say, were found in Scuros. I i3 N I ( N I V ) V 3 |=P2 (Mono-simple.) €. The Banerjees, c to speah the truth,! are I very honest folks. 1 ^ • 2 ' 3 {Phrase.) I iiN(IV I i^N) V I 12N UP3 ' 1 4 ' 4 2 ' 3 ' la order to show some developmental analogy between the Absolutes and Parenthetics, the parenthetic portion on the last sentence when transposed to the first seat will prove it. LECTURE VII. 107 Analogous to Narrative-Parenthetics i.e., parenthetic parts of speech, phrases, and Mono-simples, thrown between the Mono-simple Narratives^ we have now to deal with tlie parts of speech, phrases, and Mono-simples of direct-speech in their vari- ous expressions that combine with the Narrative Mono-simples. The Purenthetics are ^aside narratives^' within Narrative-Paren- thetics while Narratives of the Direct-Narrative speeches are 'aside narratives' too by analogy. Let us, therefore, give to it the combined name of Direct-Narrative. As it is the direct speech that concerns here, the verbs, it must be remembered, would in the Narrative be some words that mean 'to speak' in its various forms or manner. Inverted commas include the direct speech and punctuations characteristic of the various expressions end in them. In the Narrative- Parenthetic the parenthetic is placed within the narrative while here it is the narrative that becomes initial, medial, or terminal. Attempts have particularly been made to illustrate the various positions of the Narratives betiveen the different terms of the Direct. Illustrations of the positions of the Narrative and Direct in Direct-Narrative with Graphic and Rational Formulai. 1. "A Hubert ! A Hubert !" I shouted I the populace more 2 ' 1 c' interested in a known person than in a stranger. (Direct Q," initial phrase ; narrative, terminal.') "I 1^ N ! ii N ! I" { V i ii N c' 2 3 c" 3 }="(^ ii N ! i^ N ! J)" Pg 2. "The bravest were the Knights of the Temple of St. 1 ' 2 ' 3 John," said I Sir Brian. (Narrative, terminal.') "I ii N I V I ii N 3 3 " (V I N ) = "P3" Pa 1 ' 2 3 2 ' 1 108 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. "Fly c Rebecca j and save I thine own life," said I Ivanhoe^ 2'l"+i2' 3 2*1. (Narrative, terminal.) "|y|(N)|c;N,> +V I (N) I i» 2 S" { y I N )="(^S^P3" P, 4. " The yeomen and commons," satd I De Bracy, "must not 1+1 2 ' 1 be dismissed -discontented for lack-of their share-in the 2 sports." (Narrative, medial between 1st and 2nd terms.) "I ii N -H N I ( V I N ) I A 1 AV 4 3 3 3 I "="P2"P2 I 1 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 5. "A Smith and a file," he I cried, "to do away I the collar from 1 + 1 1 ' 2 4 6 the neck of a freeman !". (Narrative, 7?iec?iaZ between 1st and 4th terms ; Direct, absolute Incomplete.) "("iJ N + iiN(N| V)IV! iiN33S"="c!l 4 5yPo '1 ii'2 4' 6 ' T r " 6. "I I am I," said I the forester, I "a nameless man but a friend 1 ' 2 •' 2 ' -^ 1 ' ' 3 + 3 of my country and of iny country's friend." (Narrative between 2nd and 3rd terms.) ' "I N I V ( V I ii N ) 1^ 2 N-t-ii N 3+3 I" ="P3" Po ' 1 ' 2 2 ' 1 3 3 ' 7. "It I is I time I * then" I, said ' Fitzurse, "to draw* I our party ( 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 2 1 4 6 ♦to a head either at York or some other central place."^ c' c" (Narrative between 3rd and 4th terms of the direct.) <'| N I V * I N I * 1 1 ( V I N ) IV I 13 N I 3 c' 3 c" 3 |"="P6" P2 'l'i'3' '2'! 4' 6' LECTURE VII. 109 8. "A suddeu charge of the Royal horse | would," I Rupert I 1 ' ' 1 ' argued, \ "sweep the Roundheads from the field." (Narra- 2 ' 2 3 tive between A and V of 2nd term.) "I 1^ 2 N 3 I A (N I V) V I ii N 3 1"="?," P„ ' 1 ' 1 ' 2 2 ' 3 ' 9. "I I should in that case hold I you," replied I the yeoman, "a 1 ' 2 ' 8 2 ' 1 friend to the weaker party". (Narrative between two 3rd 3 terms.) "I N I A 3 V I N ( V I ii N ) ii N 8 |"="P3" Pj ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 2 ' 1 8 ' 10. c*'Rebecca,"j said \ Ivanhoe, "thou I hast painted I a hero." '1 '2' 1 1' 2'a (Narrative between Vocative N and Ist term.) "I cJn^ ( V I N ) N I AV I 1^ N |"="cJnJ)P3", P2 11. r "Dogs !" S said \ De Bracy, I "will I ye I let I two men I win ^ 1 ^2' 1' 'i'2' s'a I our only pass for safety?" (Narrative between Voca- 6 tive N and 2nd term.) "(Jn[) ( V I N ) a I N I V I 2 N I IV I i3 2 N 3 |"=:"(Jn[)P5" Pjt 12. C "Thou my poor knave," S said I Cedric, turning-about and ^1 1 '■^ 2 ' 1 4. embracing I his jester, "how shall I I reward I thee V^ 4. ' 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 (Narrative between PP and N Vocatives, and 2nd term of direct.) "(^ N, i3 2 N, S ( V I N pv+pv i2 n ) 1 A I N I V I N ? I" ^1 3'2'l 'l'2'3'' = "(JN, I^oNJ) P3"P3? 13. He I exclaimed, "(J False Norman, j thy money I perish with 1 ' 2 T 1 ' 3 ' 4 thee!" (Narrative, miiiaZ.) ( N I V ) "d 2 N S i3 N I V 3 ! I" = P2 "(• 2 N Sp '* l'2 ' '34 ' 1 ' LECTURE VIII. •Stddents and Gentlemen, In the last lecture I have shown you that both the paren- thetic and Direct Mono-siuiples uuite with the chief Mono- simples and these unions are indicated by distinct marks of punctuations — the Comma, parentheses, dash or inverted commas. We come now to other groups of Mono-simples that as a general rule do not submit to punctuative interference but unite also with the chief Mono-simples. The Absolutes were before shown to be incomplete Structures that combined with the Principals with punctuative marks of segregation but these would be complete structures in combination with the chief Mono-simples. The union of the Absolutes to Mono-simples may be termed Incomplete Complexes while these are Complete Complexes, though an elliptical variety of the latter exists also for recognition. These are the two Subordinates to the chief Mono-simples, the lirst called by the name of Relative Subordinate and the second by the name of Conjunction Subordinate, the former combining with the Mono-simple neither by punctuation nor conjunction but direct, though the punctuative comma is sef^n sometimes when the Subordinate is a very enlarged structure, or a Parenthetic structure intervenes between it and the chief Mono-simple (or is itself between 1st and 2n(l terms) and the latter by conjunctions alone heading its ?>Iono-simples. Sometimes the conjunction of the Conjunction Subordinate remains understood and so does the relative of the Relative Subordinate under circumstances. The analogy of both for combination with the chief Mono-simples is thus proved. Let us now begin with the structures of the Relative Subordinate fir.st, before we go to show its combination with the chief Mono-simple. LECTURE Vlll. Ill That the Relative is always an initial term or a subordinate Joiner or subjoiner to a term in its Mono-simple can be proved by the following :■— When a Nominative, the arrangement of its terms coincides exactly with those of the Mono-simple Narrative. When an ■Objective, i.e. 3rd term in the Mono-simple, it gets itself transposed to the 1st seat before the first pair of N I V. When in the 5th or other odd terms it behaves the same way though Objective to the IVs or PVs in its Mono-simple, When it also constitutes as a terminal in the preposition phrase-joiner to different varieties of Vs, it conducts itself likwise to retain its first place in its Mono-simple, though the preposition may hold its place after the V or removes itself along with the Relative to the Ist seat. The behaviour of the Relative Possessive is the retention likewise of the same first seat though it acts then the part of a joiner, consequently that of a subordinate to a term. As Possessive it may join the 1st N. When joined to its 3rd N, it brings that N along with it yet to the same 1st seat in its Mono-simple. The possessive behaviour is alike with the Objective as regards an independent term or a joiner or subjoiner described before. One thing you must remember therefore that the Relative is always in the first seat whether a Nominative, Possessive, or Objective ; the relative possessive joining either an indepen- dent N or the subordinate one in a post-joining preposition phrase to the different Vs, the relative objective likewise as independent part of speech or the terminal subordinate in pre- position phrases too. Another confounding point you shall have to remember is that when a Relative prepositioa phrase is a joiner to the first N, this N may be seen as transposed before the phrase as in the ordinary Narrative. Let us go now to illustrate my assertions above and when formulating them, use R for Relative, the large parentheses ihQ power 's' to it to indicate its subordinate nature. 1^ STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I.— Relative Subordinate R'. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formuloi respectively^ 1. That ( lives in the forest. 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 2. Who I killed I the snake. 1 ' 2 ' 3 ( R I V I ii N )*=R'3 1 ' 2 ' 3 3. Which I vou I see here. 3 ' *i ' 2 ( R I N I V 1 )*=R'3 3 ' 1 ' 2 4. Which I you I love I to eat. 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' ' 4 ( R I N I V I IV )'=R', 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 5. Which I we I liked I studying. 6 ' I ' 2 ' 4 ( R I N I y I py )'=R'5 6. That I they I shall be obliged | to abide with. (Here R isr ' 1 ' a ' A objective in the post-joiner 3 of the IV.) (*r I N I AAV I IV 3 *)«=R% ' 1 ' 3 ' 4 7. Whose stick I was broken at the centre. . 1 ' 2 ( 1^ N I AV 3 )*=R«2 1 ' 2 8. * In whose house I we I lived. ♦ ' 1 ' 2 (^3(r) I N I V*)*=R'2 'l'^' indicates Relative possessive to an independent N. V indicates the Relative in a preposition Phrase. 113 LECTURE VIII. "^9. * Towards which \ you I are I first to go. ♦ ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 (*3 (r ) I N I V I iIV*y=R\ ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 10. * From whence I these sketches I have flowed. * I 1 ' 2 (*3 (r ) I i2 N I AV*)«=R*2 11. * Where \ they I saw * I that gigantic beast. ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 (*3 (r ) I N I V* I 1I2N y=H*3 12. * Of which the cost -k I is I Rupees ten. 1 ' 2 ' 3 (*3 (r)iiN* I V|N2)*=R«3 13. The cost of which I is | rupees ten. (Here it behaved like 1 '23 an ordinary Narative. The R term or joiner in the R* is therefore transposed to first seat us a rule and hence its name.) (ii N3(r ) I V I N2) = R»3 Now comes for consideration the Conjunction Subordinates. These are also Mono-simples headed by the so-called subor- dinate conjunctions and their terms remain exactly the same in their positions as those of the Mono-simple Narratives. Before illustrating and formulating these let us conceive the insertions of symbol C in lieu of conjunctions in the Formulae. II. — Conjunction Subordinate C*. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce respectively. I. That I I I am wrong, c ' 1 ' 2 ( C I N I V 2 )«=C*„ 1*2 114 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. Before \ we I proceed. C 1*2 ( c I N I y )»=c«2 3. Lest I you | Hbould feel I pain. ( C I N I AV I N )'=C»3 4. In-as-much-as | the people I are poor. c 1 ' 2 ( G I ii N I V 2)*=C*2 5. If I the dead animal | had descended to the bottom of c 1 2 the sea. ( C I ii 2 N I AV 3 3)«=C' ' 1 ' 2 6. That in the basin of a modern European sea— the Baltic I c ' a curious assemblage of phenomena-bearing on the ques- tion is now in operation. 2 (C|»3 3(ll22n-lln)|ll2N3pV3|Vl3*) * = CV 1 2 7. As-far-as I angels I can ken. c 1 2 ( C N I AV)'=C*2 8. When | Mammals analogous to those of our epoch I gave * f C 1 ' 2 ' animation | * to the forests, plains, and shores of the- 3 ancient world. ( C I N 2 3 3 I V ♦ I N I * 3 n, n+n 3 )''=C'3 LECTURE VIII. 115 9. While I the lariiest of living Iguanas | scarcely exceeds * | c a yard * in length. (C i^N 3 iV^^ l^N *3)*=C'3 ' 1 ' 3 ' 3 ' 10. As-i/^ the sea had retired in-order-to show * | iis [ * still (.12 4 5 intact I the submarine fauna-of this period. ( I 1^ N I AV I lY * I N U 1 2 I ii 2 N 3 )'=C'5 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' ' 5 11. At-the-moment-that \ the wheel I begins I to move. c 1 ' 2 ' 4 ( C I ii N I V I IV )'=C% ' 1 ' 2 ' A The Relative and Conjunction Mono-subordinates having been thus described, it remains now to point you out that they cannot stand by alone but that the chief or Principal Mono- simples have had to be accompained by them or in other words the Mono-simple Principals are said to be subordinated by them. The Mono-simple Principals thus combined with the Mono- simple Subordinates develope a complicated structure known by the name of Complex. All Formulae shown before are the detailed or Graphic as well as abstract or Rational of Principal and Subordinate as separate Formulae but in treating the Complexes we shall have recourse to a combined detail or graphic and Abstract or Rational Formulae. The Mono-sirapie Principal is to be bracketed by a large double bracket '| |' to indicate its nature and the Subordinates initiated by R or C bracketed by a large single bracket '( )' each powered by 's' ; while the summation of the terms in each placed below and a little in front of the P and the R or C Subordinates, (as in chemical formula) along with digits or fractions placed before in a line with the symbols indicating the antecedent or union of R or C with P, will lead you to the Abstract or Rational Formulae of the complexes. Let us now therefore endeavour to illustrate the Complexes both by the Detailed and Abstract Formulae. 116 8TYL0GRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I.— Complex by Fractional Relative Subordination of the Principal. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulae respectively. 1. j The pleasantest parts of the book I are I those \ (in which \ 1 ' 2 ' 3 ^ ii ' she I treats of her own inner experiences.) { ii 2 N 3 I V I N } ( ^t 3 r I N I V'* 3 )*=P, 3 R*„ i'2'3^ 'I'a 2. { Clissori I was burnt to the ground with the very fire- 'works } {which | had been prepared for the christening of its master's eldest child.) j N I AV 3 3 } ( R I AAV 3 3 )*=P2 1 K's 3. {A last resistance | was attempted by the retreating Ven- deens !it Saveny] {* where j they [ fought * nobly but in vain.) ii 2 N I AV 3 3 I } ( * 3 r I N I V * i+3)*=P, § R'j 4. j He I was now doubly beloved and trusted by tlm foUoicers \ 1 2 + 2 ' {who I had proved I his worth.) 1 ' 2 ' 8 j N I A 1 1 V+V 3 f ( R I AV I i3 N y=?. § R* 5. j It I is with the bright spots in the dark picture } ( tha,t \ IS g we I are I to deal.) 1 u 4, . |N|ys3}(R|N| y|iy)'=p,5 R', The nutnerator of the fraction before R* indicates the term in the P to which it is subordinate ; while the denominator points ta the Preposition Phrase of that term in which the antecedent of ft is seen. LECTURE VIII. 117 6. {The eloquence | was | such ]{as charmed | the audience.)' (Unlocked R* co-ordinate.) } ii N I V I N ( ( R I V I 1^ N )«=P3 3R'3 * l'2'3 l'2' 3 7. \ The chief harbour of Malta I is I a deep bay-turned 1 '2 3 towards the North and divided into two lesser bays by a large tongue of 7'ock ] ( on-the-point-of which | stood | a strong castle — called Fort Elmo.)* 1 j ii 3 N 3 I V I ii 2 N 4 3 + 4 3 3 3 K * 3 r I V * I 1^ 2 N + N ) ^I'a's '2* 11 Here the R is a subordinate of 3 joiner of the 3rd term of the P. And we may consider the preposition of R streng- thened by a preposition phrase. Examples as these show that the R* is terminal to the P. We come now to show you examples in which R* is medial in the P. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulce. 1. j All the richer inhahitants I (loho \ had I the means I of * 1 ' 1 ' 3 ' 3 ' quitting I the city) fled with one accord. } 4 5 2 }i2 ii 2 N I (R I V I i» N I PV I ii N)« V 3 I }=P2 1R*5 l'l'2' 3 '4' 5 2' 2. jThe actions (which \ follow I the impression made upon ^1 12' 3 the organ of seeing)* do not end thus.} 2 { 1^ N I (R I V I ii N 4 3 3)' A 1 V 1 }=P2 1R*3 The initial position of R* to that of P is a very rare occur- ence and this even happens by transposition. For example : — 118 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1. (To whom I much I is given)* | * from him I much I is required.*} 2 ( 3 r I N I AV)« j * 3 n I N I AV * }=§ R*2 Pg 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 2. -Jt iJm {that I conieth to me) jl I will in no-wise cast out.*} 3 1 ' 2 ^ l' 2 U N I (R I V 3)" {N I A 3 V-i *}=3R%P3 '3 1*2 1 ' 2 Now comes the terminal, medial, initial illustrations of the Fractional Conjunction Subordinates with their Formulae. The rule for Integers in the Formulae remaiuing the same as detailed above. II.— Complex by Fractional Conjunction Subordinate. Illustrations with Formulce, 1. {I I devoutly praijed to God and the Holy Virgin} {that 12+ Q I they I would support and help I me.)* ' 1 ' 2 + 2 ' 3 { N I 1 V 3 + 3 } (G I N I AV+V I N)*=P2 2 C'j l'2 1' 22'8 2. (While j she I was waiting)* {she I began I to remark on a c ' 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 4 strange thing lying by the stove.} (C I N I AV)* { N I V I IV 3 pv 3 }=4 0*2 P, ' 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 4 3. {The Roman Senate (a« I he j would not come- in to them)* 1 c 1 ' came out I to hold I their meeting in their Campagna.} 2 ' 4 ' 5 ' (Medial Subordinate.) j I i» 2 N I (C I N I A 1 V 3)* V 1 I IV I 18 N 3}=P5 2 C'^ LECTURE V1]I. 11^ 4. {Carthage I had, (as I some I say,) been first founded by 1 ' c 1 2 2 the Canaanites.} Here C* is Parenthetic, not medial. { N I A (C I N I V)« A 1 V 3 }=F, (P^) I ' ' 1 ' 2 2 5. {The old saying (that I a dutiful child I has | dutiful *i e 1 ' 2 ' children)* N I is well exemplified in the More family.^ 3 1 ' a Here C* is Apposition N to the 1st term. I 1^ 2 N (C I ii 2 N I V I 2 N)i' I A 1 V 3 |=P2 ' 1 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 2 ' 6. { Nathaniel addressed * | the youth | * with his usual ease } (asifl notliing I had happened.)* c ' 1 ' 2 {N I V * I ii N U 3KC I N I AV)'=P, 2C*2 1 ' 2 ' 8 ' ' 1 ' 2 7. {Let I us I * then I suppose] (that | Revingstone and Crawford 3 3 4 Q 1+1 I called on the old man near Bagshot.) ' 2 {V * I (N) I N U 1 1 IV} (C I N+N I V 3 3)'=P4 4C'2 ^2 'I's' 'i 'll'2 The Adjective post-joiner after *Be' or Passive alone or with its suite conjointly governs the C*. For examples : — 1. {It I was found necessary for his cure ] {that | he j should be carried to the same monastery.) 2 { N I AV 2 3 } (C I N I AAV 3 )«=P3 2C*2 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 2. {He I IS careful] (that I nobody ' cheats I him.) 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 * 3 { N I V 2 } (C I N I V I N y=F, 2C'3 ^ I ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 120 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. {It [ is hecoming and decorous ] {that I due honors I be 12 + Q paid to Wordsworth.) 2 { N I V 2+2 I j (C I 2 N I (A) AV 3)«=P2 2C»2 Looking deeply into the various illustrations of R* and C*, you will find that the R* are subordinates to Ns, their proxies, or their equivalents in the chief terms or such in the terminals of preposition phrases in the P ; while the C* are subordinates to Vs in the P whether chief or joiner to any of the chiefs. Such being your observation you see both tlie Subordinates to be Part-of-Speech or Fractional subordinates to Ps. In contrast to the fractional, I give you now Integral Subordi- nate of the Ps. In the case of the R*, you will find Antece- dents of the Rs to be absent from the Ps, remembering that R has but its Antecedent quite close to it (unless phrases intervened), i.e., ^roa;2maife, in contrast to the Antecedents of personal pronouns which are but remote. In the case of C* Integrals the conjunctions are a distinct set that head the Subor- dinates forming the third class, the second being already shown. The Integeral Subordinates are in both instances subordinates to the lohole of the Principal and integers before C or R are not necessary in the Rational Formula. Let me now illustrate to you the R» integrals first. Ill— Complex by Integral Relative Subordinate. Illustrations loith Formulce. 1. I* During the rains | the water of the river | gets muddy *} 1 2 (which when drunk I brings-on | sure diarrhoea.) A 1 Q • 2 3 j * 3 I ii N s I V 2 ^^ ) (R 1 pv I V I 2 N)'=P2 R'3 ' ' 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 3 LECTUKE Vlll. 121 2. fBeing of a sanguine disposition and resolute to perform I 4 4 his duty S | he I still persisted 1 in going-out \ ; (the 5 "^ 1 2 4 consequence of ivhich I was I the inflammation of his throat.) 1 JR ' ' 3 (JPV 3+2 IV I i3 nS |N I 1 V I PV } ; (* ii N 3 r I V I ii N 3)»=(i4+4 SS P, R*, 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' IV. — Complex by Integral Conjunction Subordinate. Illustrations with Formulce. 1. {Man j is mortal} {therefore I we I must all die.) 1 ' 2 P ' 1 ' 12 { N I V 2 } (C I N I A 1 V)-=P, G', 1*2 ' 1 ' 2 2. 1 1 I imposed * I fresh taxes j ■)«• upon my subject8| (hence \ 12 3 Q they I grew clamorous.) 1 ' 2 { N I V ^ I 2 N I * 3 } (C I N I V 2)»=P3 C'2 3. |I I make I these more-refined precepts I follow in the 12* 3 ' 4 train of the more obvious and rough ones} {because j this c 1 I appears I to have been | the traditional order of their 2 ' 4 ' 5 establishment.) { N I V I i2 2 N I IV 3 3 } (C I N I V I IV I ii 2 N 3 y=V, C»5 4. |No one | would undertake | to deal with iiis own wife 1 2 4 privately,} {so |it | ended by a message | being sent to the more distinguished ladies I to attend I the Council.) ' 6 ' 7 { 2 N I AV I IV 3 1, } ( C I N I V 3 I PV 3 I IV I ii N )• 1 2*4 'l'2 '4 'e' 7 i22 STTLOGRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. {Mrs. Pembroke | divided * i her time * between Mrs. and 1 ' 2 ' 3 Miss Crawford to the utmost of her ability} (notwithstand- III ^ ing I she | had | private cares of her own and private reasons 12 3 for sorrow I to occupy I her attention and lacerate I her heart.) 4 6 4 ' 5 {N I V ^1 l3 N I ^ 3 3 3} 12 3 (C| N| V|2N3 + 2N3| IV| i«N| + | IV[i3N| )=P3 C'^ The Relative and Conjunction of R« and C* may remain understood under circumstances as : — Illustrations of Relative and Conjunction of R' and C' Understood. 1. I think I am rig-ht. {|N|V|}((C)| N|V = )*=P.2C', 2. He gave me the book I wanted. I 1 N I V I N X. N I ) ((E) I N I V).=P3 3 I!-, 3. (Could I 1 I but get I her I snared or noosed or muzzled I so ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' as to leave I her within my power in another Gower c 4 ' 5 Street) {the thing | would to a dead certainty be achieved.} Could Tbutget=If I could get — i.e. 'if is here understood. ((C) I A I N I 1 V * I N I * 4 + 4+4 I c IV I N I 3 .3> ' l' 2*3' ' 4'6' {ii N I A 3 A V}=2C*5 P2 As yet we have been considering only of one Subordinate at a time combining with the P, it has now becotne necessary to show to you that tv'o Subordinates one on each side of the P may occur, the initial being a C* and the terminal an R*, or both the initial and terminal being a C« each but not R*. These double Sub-ordinates may properly be designated as Di- subordinates in contrast to the Bi- subordinates which we will subsequently have to speak of. As the P is here di-subordinated we might call these Complexes ^Complexes hy di subordination.^ LECTURE VIII. 12S v.— Complex by Di-snbordination. Illustrations with Graphic and Rational Formulae,. 1. (-4s I I I was surveying I the moon walking in her briglit- Q 1 2 3 ness and taking her progress among the constellations) I a thought \ rose in nie} (which I very often perplext- s and 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 disturbs J men of serious and contemplative nature.) 2 « (C I N I AV I ii N pv 3 + pv i' n 3 I )• i I 1^ N I V 3 I f Ijig's III I'z' (Rill V+V I N 3)*=2 C* Ps 1 R» 1 ' 2 2*3 2. {When | we | came | to cut * | it | * up) {we | found] (that Q 1 2 46 12(3 { the abdomen [ was crowded with young 15 in numbers.) (C I N I V I IV * I N I * 1 )• { N I V I (C I 1^ N I AV 3 2 3 )• 'l'2'4 's' l'2 ' l' 2 = 2 C»5 P. 2 C»2 Then on the other hand a Subordinate itself when viewed as a Principal, takes a second Subordinate and the second a third, each to each in series till to even the 5th of such Sub- subordinations. These may receive the generic name of serial Sub-subordinates. Let the combination of the Subordinate with the first of the Sub-subordinate receive the name of a Bi- suhordinate, we might then say of the P to be bi-subordinated and let the Sub-subordinates beyond receive the name of the Poly -subordinates and the P to be poly-snbordinated. Bi-subordi- nates are formed by the repetitions of C* or R* or alternations of both ; we go now to illustrate and formulate them. In the Formulae the sub-subordinate will take the integer 2 in its power 's' to show its extent of subordination remote from P. Analogous to the single Government of N upon V, and dual government of V upon N and IV or PV, you have just seen Subordination single of N by R* and Subordinations dual of V by two G*. 124 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAaE, VI.— The Complex by Bi-subordination. {i.e. Subordinations sub-subordinated.) With Graphic and Rational Formidce. 1. {This j was j a necessary precaution I in- order- to secure \ equality betwixt tlie two bodies] (ichich I should ))e opposed 5 ' 1 ' 2 to each-other in the general encounter) {ichich I was called I 1 ' 2 •■ a melee.) { I N I V I ii 2 N I IV I N 3 I } (R I AAV .3 3)- 'l'2' 3'4'6 'l' 2 (R| AV|i^N)2.=P,|R.,|R2.3 1 2 3 2. I The most- degraded savage j has discovered \ (how j one j 1 2 Q 1 rubs * I two sticks j * together or lohirls I the point of onfr 2 ' 3 ' + 2 ' 3 in a socket in the other) (till I the wood I is kindled.) 1 2 { I i» 2 N I AV I } ( C I N I V * I 2 N I * 1 l + l V I i' N s 3 3 )• ' ' 1 ' 2 ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' ' 2 ' 3 (C I i^N I AV)2« = P2 2C'3 2C2^ ' 1 2 3. f Adorno I dropped I the letter j and I covered * \ his face ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' + ' 2 3 I * with his haud[ (while I his son I was describing in the ' c ' 1 2 wannest languai^e I the virtues of Uberto I and I the hind- ' 3 ' + ' 3 ness) (he I had received from hitu.) 1 ' 2 * j I N I V I i» N ' 1 ' 2 ' S .|V*|X3N|*3|} (C I i3 N I A V 3 I i' N 3+ i» N)' ( (R) I N I A V 3 Y* = ?, 2 C'a 3 R2', LECTURE VIII. 125 4. {All the hirundines of a village I are-up in arms at the sight 1 '2 of a hawk} ( whom I they I will persecute)* ( till I he ^ 3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' leaves I that district.)** 2 ' 3 { I 1^ 1* N 3 I V 3 3 3} (R I N I AV)' ( C I N I V I i2 N)3* =?, § R*3 2 G2*3 5. jit I was now} (that I tlie wine-merchant (who I had com© 'i'2 c ^ ^ 2 I to maintain I a very v/atchful eye over his daughter's manner and apoearance)** I thought * I it I * necessary I to call-in I the family physician | in-order-not-merely-to have I his advice as-to the state of her health I but to use e ' 7 ' c' « I his influence over the fair enthusiast I with-the-view-of ' 7 having I her I to consent to a change of air to a temporary 8 ' 9 ' 10 removal to some ono of Mr. Maxwcjlls' correspondents in the island of Madeira)*, (J a consumptive tendency (J it being believed, S characterising I her state of health, j }N I V 1} (0 I 1^ N I (R I AV I IV I ii 1 2 N 3)2* I V * I N I * 2 ^I'a' i'i'2''4' 5 'a 'a' I IV I ii 2 N I c' IV I i3 N 3 3 ' 4 ' 6 ' 6 ' 7 I C" IV I l3 N 3 I PV I K I IV 3 3 3 3 3 3 3)*, ' 6 ' 7 ' 8 ' 9 ' 10 (^ ii 2 N cj N I PV J) PV I 1' N 3 J) . =p,2c*,oiR^(;i(;i4;)4 5;) 10 I^' STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Bi-subordinates may appear both initially and terminally to P, when they might respectively be called a Bi-bi-suhordinate ; or a Bi-di-subordinate, when a Bi-subordinate precedes and a Mono-subordinate follows the P ; or a Di-bi-suboi'dinate, when these conditions are vice versa. VII.— Complex by Di-bi, Bi-di, and Bi-bi-subordinations. (Subordination sub-subordinated.) 1. (If I you I follow I the main)* {you I would find} (that ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 1 ' 2 I it I took I a long course up and down beneath the pave- ment of the streets)* (until * at last I it I reached * I the ' 1 ' 2 ' water-work8.)2» (This is Di-bi-subordination.) 3 (C : N I V I 1^ N)' { N I AY } (C I N I V I ii 2 N 1 +133) 'l'2' 3 l'2 'l'2' 3 (C 1 I N I V I 1^ N) = 2 C*3 P„ 2 C% 2 C^^ 2. (As I he was musing on his present condition and very much perplexed in himself on the state)* (he I should 2 1 ' choose)^* |he I saw I two women of a larger stature than 21*2' 3 c' c" ordinary} (who I approached towards him.)* (Bi-di-subor- dinate.) ( C I N I AV 3 + n V 3 3 )* ((R) I N I AV)2*{ I N I V I 2N3(iic'nc"2n)}(R| V s)' ^3'l'2'l'2' 3 l'2 = 2 C*2 § R2.^ p^ 3 R.^ 3. (yls I there is not | the slightest difference in weight '2 1 between a given quantity of water and the ice or the LECTURE VI 11. 127 steam)* ( -)t into .lohich I it I may be converted * )2« | it j is clear[ (that I the heat (which is added to or taken from 2 ' 1 1 ' Jl the water I to give * j rise j * to these several states)^* can 4 5 possess I no weight.)* (Bi-bi-subordinate.) 2 ' 3 (G I 1 V 1 I ii 2 N 3 3 3 (n+ii n+ii n))« ^ ' 2 ' 1 (sr I N I AAV)2' I I N I V 2 I } ' 1 ' 3 ' 1 ' 2 ' (C I ii N (R I AV+V 3 I IV I N I 3 I )2* I AV I 2 N |)» ^' ll' 32'4'6'' ' 2' 3' = 0*2 i E2*2 P2 2 0*3 1 R2*, Before illustrating the Foly-subordinate, I go to remind you that extensions, beyond the IV and PV terms of the Mono- simple are made by repetitions and alternate repetitions of these terms. In like manuer poly-subordiuatious are only feasible by repetitions or alternate repetitions of 11* and C* Subordinates. VIII.— Complex by Poly-subordination. (Serial Sub-subordinations.) 1. {The water I is brought from a large pipe or main in the 1 ' 2 street by smaller house-pipe \ ( which I is often made I to 1 ' 2 ' twist-about in various directions)* {before \ it I reaches 4 ' ' 2 the cistern at the top o£ the house)^* (into which it I delivers 3 ' 2 j the water,)3« i 8 i ll N I AV 3 (ll 2 n+n) 3 3 Ul'^ I A 1 V I IV 3)* 1*2 1 ' 2*4 (C I N I V I ll N G 3)2* ( * 3 r I N I V * I ll N)3' 'I'lj' 3 'l'2*3 128 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. {It I does not follow however} {that | it | really posaeBses none)* {for^ I there are I many things)^* (which I seem I to 3 2 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' be I the same throughout or homogeneous)'* {which I yet 4 5 1 ' Hhow I structures)^* {if I tliey I are examined with » 2*8 ' 1 ' 2 magnifying glass. )-^* { N I A 1 V 1 } (C I N I 1 V I N)* (C I 1 V I 2 N)2* (R I V I IV I ii N 2 + 2)3* (R I 1 V IN)^* (G I N I AV s)^* l'2'4'6 j'2'3 'I's = P2 2 C*,C2*, 1 R3»5 3 E^^3 2 C**3 In considering the Methods of Combination of the Mono- euhordinates as seen before to Mono-principals, R* may be thought to be ' simple comhinative\ and C* to be ' combinative^ and ^fermutative.' We come now to a third variety of combination, which we might very properly call the ^locked.'' Co-ordinating^ Conjunctions and co-ordinating Relatives play the roll of lock- ing here. Fractional subordination to Ns and Vshas been played by Relatives or mono-groupal Conjunctions, but the co-ordinating or bi-groupal ones play double roll by throwing towards the tail or any part of the P, its first conjunction C' as the post- joiner of V or ante-joiner of N and placing at the head of \he Subordinates, its 2nd one C or R". In these Complexes c'-c' go to form the 4th Class of conjunctions. Here the i:' is connective to Adjective, Adverb, or both Adverb and Adjective post-joiners to Vs, IVe, or PVs ; or as inter- joiner between them and their auxiliaries in case of C" ; or as ante- joiner connective to N in case of R*. It is but these Snbor- tiinates which are non-elliptical or elliptical in terms^ or joiners^ or both, that I go now to illustrate and formulate. IX.— Complex by co-ordinate c' C* subordination. 1. NON-KLLIPTICAL CO-ORDINATK SUBORDINATES. 3 . i They I descended to so many labours and also minor studie^f 1- 2 c' + to such a variety of ramifications and strange agencies J c' + ( C" I IV 3 I AV I IV I i2 N I 1 3)*=P2 c' c LECTURE VUI. 129 {^that I to go into every particular | would be I to prolong | c" ^ a 4 these pages [ * out of all due proportion.)* (Here ante-joinor Adjectives to final Ns of Bs to V get •co-ordinately subordinated.) { N I V 3(c' 2 n+12 n) 3 (u' 1^ n) 3 (n+2 n)} 2. I His ideas of moral justice I were such } (that I he I could 1 2 q' q" 1 not for a moment allow I himself I to be in the least pre- 2*3' 4 jiidiced against the innocent Catharine.)* {i» N 3 I V c' } (C" I N I A 1 3 V I N I A 3 IV 3 y = l\ c' C\ 12 1 - 3 -4 3. jThe back of a chair placed opposite to a bright fire I gets so hot } {that | you | can hardly tonch | it.) - C' C*' ^ 2 3 {i^ N 3 pv 2 3 I V c' 2 } (C* I N I A 1 V I N)*=P2 c'|C'''*3 4. I The earth I has I to travel over so wide a circuit or orbit | 1 ' 2 ' 4 (.' + (that I it. I takes I rather more than 365 days I to perform t;*' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 the journey.)* 5 {i» N I V I IV I 3(c'2 ii n+n )} (G" I N I V I c' c* 2 N I IV 1 1» N)« =P, c' t Q'", 130 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. { He I did so carefully go through the proof-sheets } (that there conld not possibly be I any mistakes in them.) 2 ' 1 {N I A c' 1 V 3} (C' 1 A 1 1 y I i2 N 3)0 = ?, g' C'% 6. I Every material substance I tends * I to approach | every 1 ' 2 ' ,4 other material substance I * just in the same way } (as J a 8 c' c'' drop of rain I falls towards the earth.)* { I i2 2 N I V I IV I i2 i2 2 N I 2 sKC" 1^ N 3 I V 3) = P3 c' C'^ ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' ^ c 1 ' 3 7. {This I was done oftener on the whole} (than I we I expected.)*' ' 1 ' 2 c' ' c" 1 2 {N I AV (c' 3 } C" I N I V)«=P2 0' 2 C/'-a 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 2. ELLIPTICAL CO-ORDINATE SUBORDINATES BY TERMS OR JOINERS. 1. { They | were found less-cheerful] (than | we | expected f them I to be)*. (Joiner 'cheerful' elliptical in IV.) 3 ' 4 { N I V 2 I (C" I N I V I N I IV)* = P„ c' G"\ ' 1 ' 2 c' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4, 2. jit I is just as hard I to reason accurately} (as I it | is I to- ' 1 ' 2 c' * 0''' ^ 2 observe accurately.)* 4 {I N I V 2 c' 2 I IV 1 1} (CM N I V I IV i)*=P, c' G'^ *'l'2 '4 ' 'l'2'4 (This is comparison of equality ; here joiner ellipsis " hard" is visible.) LECTURE VIII. 131 3. I The parsoa I could not make 1 * her I dearer or nearar * "^ 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' c' + c' to me I ( than \ she I is.)« ( ' dear or near to me' joiner c' 1 2 ellipsis.) } 1^ N I A 1 V I N I 2+2 3 }(C" I N I V (2+2 3))« =P3 c '+c' C"'^ 1 2 ' 3 c' q' ' 1 ' 2 4. {The elephant 1 in stronger \ ( than the camel.)* 1 ' 2 c' c* { ii N IV 2 J (C" I ii N I (V)) = P2 C G"\, 1 '2 q/ ' 1 ' 2 6. {To speak the trutii | is I a letter sign ot civilisation} (^^an 1 2 ' c' 3 c'' to wear I English boots and stockings.)* (Terms ellipsis 4 6+6 "it is" in the Subordinate.) {(IV I ii N)^ I V I ii 2 N 3} (C" (N I V I) IV I 2 N+N)' 4' 5J'2'^./3^ 1*2' 4' 5 6 = P3 C' C% 6. {We I are not in a worse position^ (than \ we were W ' 2 c' ^ e'' 1 2 before.)* {N I V 1 3 c'} (Q" I N I V, i)* = P2 c' C"\ 7. {He I managed in better style (^^an could have been 1 2 c' c'' expected)* to ask I pardon | for calling at such an unsea- 2 4 ' 6 6 sonable hour. } (C* medial in position, with Term ellipsis of *it'.) { N I y 3 c' I (C I (N) I A A A V)* I IV I N I PV 3 ( l'2 ''1' 2'* '5' 6^ = PeC'§C^ 132 8TYL0GBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 8. {He I drew | his chair | somewliat closer to Catherine's} 1 i » c' {than I was necessary.)* c" 2 { N I y » I i3 N I 1 c' 3 } ( C (N) I V 2)=P3 c' C\ 9. {She I would certainly rather be I his mis-tress} (than I the Captain's bride.)* (both N and V terms elh'ptical.) {N I A 1 c' V I ii N} (C" (N I A V) | i^ i^ N)« =P3 c' C% 10. {The effort | required | to bring * | it | * into the horizontal position I will be the-greater } (the-greater the weight of * c' c" the body in the opposite scale.) { I ii N 4 I 6 I * 7 j * 3 I AV c' } (C" I ii N 3 3 I (V)) = P2 c' C", X 2X2 11. { That I is as good | to dispel I all doubts } (as a regiment X ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 X of king's soldiers I to dispel | mobs.)* (Second term with ' post-joiner elliptical in the Subordinate.) ^ N I V c' 2 I IV I i2 N } (C*' I ii N 3 I (V 2) I IV I N)*=P, c' Q\ 'I'a '4' 6 ' 1 'a '4'6 Or in Ex. 7 and 8 here "C* than" by analogy may be con- sidered as a Relative like "R" as" when followed hy a V. (vido Ex. land 2 p.p. 133.) LECTURE vin. 133 12. jHe I Silt down despite of the cold I to chase-away I the 1*2 'a ' intervening minute as well} (as | he | could | with his reflections till the appearance of his sister.)* (2nd Term elliptical in the Subordinate though 'auxiliary' present.) ( N I V 1 2 3 I IV * I ii 2 N U c' 1 [(G* I N I A (V) 3 3 s)* l'2 'a' 6' '^ll^ 2 13. { The outer surface of the window-glass I will get cool * 1 '2 sooner \ (than I the surface within.)* c' c" 1 {i^ 2 N 3 I AV 2 c' j (C" I i» N 2 I (AV 2))*=P2 c' 0"\ X 2 X 2 X.— Complex by co-ordinate c' R"' subordination. 1. jit I would no longer support I such vegetation at least} X* 3 ' e' 3 ( as j previously lived upon it.)* {|E|AxxV*|l2N*3| }(R|lV3)'=P3C'R'*2 1 2 q' 3 X 2 2. \ The same kind of movement of the air I takes I place} c' 1 ' 2 ' » ' ( as I can be watched by the fireside.)* *• • a { xi c' N 8 3 I V I N I } (R I A A V 3 y=?^ C R"*^ X 2 ' 3 ' X 2 3. { It I is I the same thing } (that I we I see in our midst.) I ' 1 • 2 ' q' S «' ' X ' 2 ' { I N I V I ii (c' N I } R I N I V 3 )*=P, c' W"^ ^'I'a' 8'3'x'2 I tS4 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. { As-much water ( as I will fill I the tube 2 ft. 3^ inches) I will weig-h I a pound.} ' 2 ' ' 3 } I c' N I ( R I A V I 1^ N 3 )« A V I ii N I }=?., c' R"«2 1 ' 1 ' 2 3 2 ' 3 ' 5. { The ritual of the Incas I involved I a routine of obser- 1 ' -2 ' 3 vances as complex and elaborate } (as I ever distinguished c' ^" 2 I that of any nation whether Pagan or Christian.)* { [ 1^ N3 I V 1 1^ N3 c' 2+2 I }(RM 1 V I Ns (i2 n c' n c'' n))« ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' ' 1 ' 2 ' S = P3C' R'"3 XI.— Complex of P by Co-ordinate subordination sub-subordinated. 1. { It I was I such a spot \ (as that)* {where in the poetry of 1 ' 2 ' c' 3 c" "" Persian Bards I we I read of fond Megnoun- whispering ' 1 ' 2 tales of love to his beautiful Leilah.)^* IN I V I i2 ii N} (G* I N I (V))« ( * 1 3 3 I N I V * 3 pv n 3 3 I )i^* * 1 ' 2 ' p/ 3 ' 1 ' 2 « ' 1 ' 2 2. [ The sharp flint i is softer } (than the heart)* (that bosom < 1 ' 2 c' c" 1 1 I contained.)^* ' a { ii 2 N I V 2 } (C" I ii N I (V))* ( (R) I i2 N I V)2. ' 1 ' 2 c' 1 2 3' 1*2 = P2C'C%1R2*3 (Ex. 1 and 2 are Bi-subordinated co-ordinate Subordinates.) LKOTURR VI 11. 135- 3. i Such wpre I the reflections } {ivhich I kept I him 1 awake ' 2 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 8 till an hour in the morning) (when Rlnmher I cut short his 1 ' 2 meditation.) .3 { c' I V I 1^ N } ( R'' I V* I N I * 2 3 3 )• ( C I N I V ll l3N)2* '2' ll'2'3 'l'2'3 — C rg iv 3 3 V_> 3 4. { They I float } {because I each ship | weighs less)* (than | a 12 1 2 (./ c" quantity of water of the same bulk I does (weigh). )2» } N I V}(C I i2 N I V c')' (C" I ii N 3 3 I A (V))2«=:P, C\c' Q"^"^ I'a' i'2 1 ' 3 (This is Complex by Integral C' subordination co-ordinately sub-subordinated.) 5. {As I he I had completely failed I in meeting with the arch- c ' 1 ' 2 ' 4, miscreant)* (save-on-one-occasion-^oAe/^ I the wretch I c' » managed | to elude I his grasp)2» |he I penned I such a letter} 2 4. ' 6 1 ' 2 ' q' 3 {that I any one-possessing the pride and proper feelings c 1 of a man j could not help responding to it in a hostile manner indeed in the way)* {lohich I Hunter I desired. )2» 3 ' 1 ' 2 ( C I N I A 1 V I PV 3 ) * ( C I iVN I V I IV I i3 N )2* 1 2'4 ' l'2'4' 5 { N I V I C' 1» N I } 1*2 8 ' (C" I i2 N 4 1^ n +.2 n 3 I A 1 V I PVs 313)' '1 ' 2 ' 4 ( R I N I V ) 2.^2 C*, 4 C^ P3 c' G'\ tR2.3 (This is Bi-di-co-oniinate subordination sub-subordinated.) 136 STYLOGRAPUY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. .6 jHe I found * I his slave's learning and intelligence I * so 1 ' 2 ' 3 + a g' useful} {that I he I grew very fond of him and tried hard c' 1 2 +2 I to persuade I liira I to turn I Mahometan I offering I him | 4 's e' 7 's'd not-only liberty lut I the inheritance of all his wealth and c' 9 c" 9 + the secrets) {that I he I had discovered.) a ' 1 ' 2 jN I V * I 1^ i» N + N I * c' -j} 12 3 3 (G* I N I V 1 2 3 I + I V 2 I 1 V I N I IV I N I PV I N c' N c'' i» N ^'l'2 ' '2'4'6'6'7'8'9 9 9 3( i2 1? n + ii n ))• (R I N I AV)2« =P3 c' 2 0"% § R^.^ 3 12 7. {When I they I again sought I the drawing room)* {Emily ' 1 ' 2 3 1 had so far composed I herself} (that I her aunt i fuiled I to c' 2 ' 3 ' c' ' 2 ' notice I any little alteration)* (there might have been ia her looks.)* (Cl NliV I ii3N)*iN| Ac'2V I N} 'I'a' 3 'i' a's' (G" I i8 N I V I IV I i» 2 N)* ( (R) I 1 A A V 3)2* ' i'2'4' fii' a = G*3 Pj c' GV R2*2 8. \ That ( which I is lighter ) • { than I water ) '^' \ floats * 1 12 1 * upon it. } |N (R I V cO' (G" I N I (V 2)) 2. I V 8}=P3 1 R'aC G 2*, LECTURE Vin. 137 9. I There is | no funeral so sad I to follow} (as tbe funeral of ' 2 ' 1 ' 4 ^ 1 our own youth) (ichich \ we | have been pampering with 8 ' 1 ' 2 fond desires, ambitions, hopes and all bright, berries) {that | hang in poisonous clusters over the path of our life.) 2 { 1 V I 2 N c' 2 I IV } (Cy I ii N 3 I (V))* 2' 1 '4' 1*2 (R I N I A A V 3 (2 n, n, n+i2 2 n))2' (R I V 3 3 3)" 3 ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 = P, c' C% 1 RMR3', All along Subordinates have been shown as Mono-si mpleT. structures either in their mono- or poly-subordinationa (sub- subordinations), but here we go to see that the assertive "that'* is followed by a subordinate Complex structure, consisting of a P and a Subordinate. This variety may therefore be called Complex b}'' Subordi- nate Complex structure. Hence this combination is combina- tion by substitution, i.e., Complex in lieu of a Mono-simple Subordinate. XII.— Complex of P "by Complex sul)stitutive subordi- nation in the first Subordinate. 1. {It I has been ascertained} (that | (if | water | be confined in a closed vessel or space) a pressure amounting to 15 pounds 1 on the square inch I diminishes I its volume I by only one '2 ' 8 20,000th part.) { I N I A A V I } (G (G I N I AV 3 )• [i» N pv 3 3 I V I i^ N ) s})' *'l 2' 'l':i 1 .2' S^ =P2 2 C (2 C'j P,)' 138 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. { It I has been seen } {that (when a cubic inch of water j is dissipated by heat) it I merely changes * I its form | * 2 1 2 ' 3 from the fluid to the gaseous state.)* {iNl A A Vl }(C(C|ii2N3 I AVs'JMNliYli^Nss})' 'l' 2 ?12 12 3 =P2 2C (2C«2 P3)* The assertive " that " may also take a subordinately co-or-dinated Complex substitute to the Mono-simple. For examples : — 1. { It I is certain} (that {sohd bodies I may be divided into ^ 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 particles so minute} {that I the b^st microscopes I show I c' c* 1 ' a ' no trace of them.))* 3 { I N I V 2 U (C {2 N I A A V 3 1 2 } ( C' I 1^2 N I V I 2 N 3)) = Po2C(P2C G',)' 2. { It I may merely mean } {that { the particles | are so 1 2 1 3 q' extremely small } (that | they | cannot be distinguished c' 1 2 even by the most powerful microscopes.)*)* { I N I A 1 V } (C { 1^ N I V c' 1 2} (C" I X I A A V 1 3 I )*)* *'l'2' l'l2 '1 .2 • = Po2C(P2C'C'*2)* LECTURE VJII. 139 XIII.— Complex "by substitutive Di-complex subordination. 1. { He I often told | his friends} (that (unless he | had found-out I this mode of employing himself ) { he I verily 2 ' 3 1 ' believed I } ( he i should have lost | his senses.)) |N I 1 V I i3 N( (C(C I N I V I i2 N 4 5) l'2' 3 'l'2' 3 {N 1 1 VKN I V I i3 N))» =P3 2 C ( C% P^ 2 C',)* 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 3 XIV.— Complex of P by substitutive Bi-complex subordination. 1. ill belive } (that { \ there have been I few men ) {who I 1 ' 2 ^ ' 2 ' 1 1 ' have done I great things in the world) (who I have not had 2 ' 3 1 ' 2 2s a large power of imagination.)) 3 (The Sub-subordinate R in R2« has here for its Antecedent an R or R« as a whole.) jN I V} (C U V I 2 N }(R I V I 2 N 3)*(R I A i V I i^ 2 N 3)2*) *12^ 2'l l'2 3 i' 2' 3 = P5 2 C (P, R«3 1 R2'3)«. Having then just shown to you that Mono- or first Subor- dinate in the complex structure allows substitution by a complex, a Di-complex, or a Bi-complex within its C«, I go now to illustrate to you that the Bi- or second Subordinate may similarly be subs- titutively subordinated. As for example : — 140 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. XV— Second Subordinate substitutively subordinated. { He I was I a European loafer } ( who I explidned )• ( that (whon I he I lieard I the strange noise coming up the road)* {he I c ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 1 ' had run and hid(h?n | himself} ( because I he I thought)* ((C) 2+2 3 c 1 * it I was I the mutineers.)^*)'* { N I V I ii 2 N } ( R I V )• (G (G I N I V I ii 2 N 4 3)' 1*2' 31*2 'I'a' 3 {N|AV + V|N|KC|N|V)' ((C) I N I V I 1^ N)^*)" l' 2 2'3' 'I's l'2' 3 = P3 3R*,C(2C*3P3C*,2C%)«* In Subordination, fractional subordinations have been showD distinct, but I give you presently an illustration in which both the Integral and Fractional Subordinates will combine with the P. XVI. —Complex of P by Integral and Fractional Subordinates. 1. (When I conical b^illetSj with high velocity ) are used,)* {ihe aperture of entrance | is not readily distinguished from that of exit}, (for, I the apertures I differ little in size 1 'a and have | a somewhat triangular shape.)* (C I 2 N 8 I V) {ii N 8 I A 1 1 V 8 « } ' 1 2 ^ 1 ' 2 ' (Cl iiNl Vi3 + V| iiiaN) = 2 C*. Pj C, LECTUJRB VIII. I4l XVII.— Complex by an initial Mono- and final Co-ordinate-subordinate to P. 1. (If one of the pupils of the class I is got I to read,) {he I 1 3 ' 4 1 profits at least (os much} os I his fellows.) (C I N 3 3 I AV I IV) {N I V 1 (c' i} C" ! i3 N I (V))« ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 1 2 ' 1*2 2. (When I he I shook I him I hastily ) • {Fitzgerald I almost c 1 s ' 3 ' 1 ' died of fright and was almost (as helpless from actual 2 2 c' alarm | as I an infant child.)* c" 1 (C I N I V I N I 1) • { N I 1 V 3 I + I V 1 (c' 2 3J* 'I'a's' 1' 2 ' 2 C" I ii 2 N I (V 2))*=2 C'3 P2 c' C"»2 3. (When [ he | had gained | the gate)' {he | partially roused himself I and I gaged wistfully up the road towards London, 8 ' ' 2 (as well} a.? the increasing duskiness of the evening I would c' c" ^ permit.)* i (C 1 N I AV I ii N) {N I 1 V I N I + V 1 3 3 c' 2} 'l'2' 31' 2*3' 2 (C" I ll 2 N 3 I AV) ' 1 ' 2 =20*3 P3 c' Q"'^ In Di-bi-subordination the Ist o£ the Bi-subordinate is simple combinative. I go now to illustrate to you this Sub- subordinate as being " locked." We might name these as Di- Bubordinates co-ordinately sub-subordinated. 11 142 BTYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. XVIII.— Complex by an initial mono- and a final co-ordinate Subordinate to P sub-snbordinated. 1. (If I the bag I were taken awa)^ ) I it I would retain I its ' • 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ■ ' sbape I so long } (as I it I was kept as hot)* (as I boiling water.)** 1 (C I 1^ N I AV 1 )« { N I AV I i3 N c' 1 i (C" I N I AV c' 2 )• . 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 3 '1*2 (G" I 2 N I (V))2* =2 C»2 P3 c' C'V C C'2 '2» In the Co-ordinate c' before joiner or subjoiner of Equal Comparison or otherwise by adjective and adjective with its preceding adverb, when the adjective post-joiner of V iacreasea jnto two words, the c' conjunction co-ordinate may not repeat itself between them, but it allows a compound conjunction to intervene for the increase as usual. Or when the adjective increases to more than two words, the first co-ordinate is repeated before each increased post-joiner, while the compound conjunction is added but before the last of the first co-ordinate. These lead to tri- and quadri-groupal series of connectives whose illustrations I give below. XIX.— Illustrations of groupal increase of connectives in Complexes by co-ordinate subordination. (a) By as,,»as. 1. {John I h as honest and palite} (as his neighbour James.)* *> - 2 c' c" {N I V c' 2 + 2} {C I i3 2 N I (V))« = P,c'2 + 2g C\ LECTURE VIII. 143 "2. fJolin I is as honest and as polite} (as his neighbour James.) 1*2 {N I V c' 2 + c' 2J(C" I i3 -2 N I (V))» 12 1 ' 2 = P2 C' 2 + C' 2 f Q"\ -3. |John I is as honest, as polite and as generous} {as his neigh- bour James.) |N I V c' 2, c' 2 + c' 2} (G* I i3 2 N I (V))' =?„ c' 2, c' 2 + c' 2 § C% (J)) By so.., that. 1. {James I is so honest and polite} {that I all his neighbours I 1 2 c' 2 + 2 ' 1 ' like I him.) 2*3 jN I V c' 2 + 2} (G" I 1^ i3 N I V I N)« 1*2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 = P2 C' 2 + 2 f Q">^ '2. {James | is *o honest and so polite} (that all his neighbours | like I him.) 2 ' 2 {N I V c' 2, + c' 2}(G" I i2 13 N f V I N )« l'2 ' l'2'3 I =P2C'2 + C'2§C'V 3. {James | is so honest, so polite and so generous} (that all his neighbours | like I him.) 1 ' 2 ' 3 {N I V c' 2, c' 2, + c' 2 !(C'' I i2 13 N I V I N)« 1 ' 2 j^ I 1 ' 2 ' 3 = P2 C' 2, C' 2 + C' 2 I G"*3 'The repetitions of first co-ordinate c' are for emphasis.) 144 STTLOGRAYHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. It is the joiners then as the Article adjective, the compara- tive adjective, the adverb, certain adjectives and the prono- minal adjectives that suhordinately co-ordinate with each other, or with the pure conjunctiona (besides the co-ordinations of the pure conjunctions with the pure), or with the relative. Lastly, I show to you the union and combination of hoth the Absolute and Subordinate to P. XX.— Complex of P by an Absolute and Subordinate. 1. {A. North American Indian, capon returning home to his- 1 ' 4 cabin, J discovered} (that I his venison I was stolen.) r 2 ' 1 ' 2 jii 2 N I cIp V 3 sS V} (C I i3 N I A V)' = P. C^pvS 2 Q\ XXI.— Complex of P by conjoined Mono- and Bi-gronpal connectives. 1' J All I seemed quite intent on their respective duties}^ (when not-only I were I they I being-shot-down every c c' ' i ' 2 moment)* {hut when | each comparatively harmless ball, f c" c ^ rocked I the gun-boat, I sent I splinters I flying I or I brought 2' 3 '2' 3 '4'+' 2 I the yards | down upon their heads.)* 3 jN I V 1 2 8 1(C-C' I A I N I V 8)(C*'-C I 1= 1 2 N I V I 1^ N f, S'2 'i'2 ' i'2' a' I V I N I IV I + I V I 1^ N I 1 .•j) = P2 C-C*2 C"-C* '2'3'4'-'2' 3' Do not fail to observe that the mono-groupal has here preceded tho bi-groupal connective in the 1st Co-ordinate, while this condition is vice versd in the 2nd Co-ordinate. LECTITRE VIII. 145 Complexes other than those described in this lecture, may be visible in various writings, but they would by no means deviate from the general principles thus laid down. We come now to the 4th variety of combination, the *Riveted\ It occurs in relative subordination of the P consisting of a N term or joiner antecedent in it blending with the initial Kelative,the odd term or joiner of the Subordinate. This blend- ing of the antecedent and the relative into one word has in- troduced the word "Compound" to the wrong denomination of "the Relative alone, when it includes the antecedent also. The word " what" is the compound relative of the Neuter gender which alone admits of median rivetment (unless by emphasis), but here are others of the masculine or faminine variety that are inital or medial in rivetment viz. — "whoever," "whosoever," ■*' whomsoever". " Whichever," " whichsoever", " whatsoever'* go also to group with **what". Let us illustrate them. XXII.— Complex by Riveted Relative Subordinates. (a), — Rivetment of two terms. H. {He I does (what] his friends | advise | him | to do.)' (Neuter). {N I Vl N}(R li^Nl VlNl IVl )• =P3 3 R', '2. {(Whoever I talks much)* must talk in vain. J 1 1 ' 2 2 ^ (Masculine and Faminine.) {N(R I Vil )•( AVi}=P, R'. 1 12 ■'' 2 (b) — Rivetment of a joiner and a term. 1. [What little protection (the common people I had received l2 3 1 1 ' 2 from the crown.) | was now at an end by the king's captivity ;and the general confusion throughout the kingdom.} 146 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1. { That little protection {that or loJiich | the commoik people &c.) was now &c. } (This initial " what" is a com- pound of the Pronominal adjective and Relative.^ {i2 2 N ((R) I ii 2 N I AV 3 )• I V 1 3 3 3} Besides the Narrative C* by "tliat", Interrogative C« bjr " why", "when", and that by exclamatory "how" are seen to commence the Subordinates, and the variety commencing with *what" becomes visible too. All these Subordinates alon^ become Analogues of N and as such their illustrations in botb- the capacities seem desireable here. XXIII.— Complex by Expression Subordinate. 1. {You I remember} {that I you I did I it.) * 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 3 {|X|V|}(C|N|V|N)*=P22CV ^'l'2' 'l'2'3 2. jYou I remember} {why I you I did I it.) * 1 ' 2 1 2 ' 3 I|N|Y|!(C|N|Y|N)-=P.2C-. 3. jYou I remember} {how I you I did I it.) ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 { I N I V I } (C I N I V I N)«=P2 2 C»3 4. {You I remember} {lohatfin amount of trouble | we | had j to- undergo for the occasion.) 4 { I N I V I ) ( 2 ii N 3 I N I V I IV 3)'=P2 2 R'^ 5. {He I asked} {what ransom | was expected for the youth.) {Nl V}(2N| V8)'=P<;R*2 1 ' 2 « 1 ' 2 I LECTURE VIII. 147 6. I The banker at the same time j related } ( by what means he I had saved [ it.) {ii N 3 I V} (3 r I N I V I N)»=P2 R'3 12 12 3 Illustrations of C* as N Analogue. [[That I the molecules of water I do take-up I a particular order I in assuming I the solid condition) ,' I is shown by 3 ' 4 ' 5 '2 the crystalline form of ice.} {( I C I ii N 3 I AV I ii 2 N I PV I ii 2 N |)^ [ AV 3 3 I } 2. I {Why j his own friends | turned against iiim at thi crisis)^ 1 is yet I a mystery.} (C I i3 2 N I V 3 3 I )i' I V 1 I ii N I }=P3 3. UHow I he j carae-by I so much wealth)i' I is not known ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 2 to any.} {(G I N I V I 1 2 N)M A 1 V 3 I }=P, 4. { ( Hoio I it I came | to pass)* (that | your brother | is at Cheltenham)^* N I was { (as I follows.)* (Here N is equal 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 to C'^ C^,) { I (C I N I V I IV)« (C I i3 N I V 3)20 N I V } (R I V)» 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 = PoR*2 The Interrogative relative Mono-simple may be a subordinate as well as an N Analogue. For examples : — 148 STTLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 1. {I I know not} {who | first brought * | this news | * to us.)* {|N|Vi|}(R|iV|i2N|3|)=P,R'3 2. I (Who I committed I the iiurcler)^ I may well be imagined.^ • 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 2 {(|R|V|i'N|K|AiAV|!=P, Interrogative Subordinates instead of ewding in their characteristic ' ? * are terminated by Periods. Contrary to the general rule again connectives intervene hetvxe7i P and the Interrogative R*. For example : — 1. {They I agreed j to try I their strength I upon a traveller} 124' 6 (as to I which I should be able I to get off * | his cloak I c 1 2 '4 6 ' ♦ first.)* {N I V I IV * I 1 N I * 3} (G I R I AV 2 I IV * I i^N | *i )• Like N appositions of Ns and PPs, the Interrogative Rs have N appositions too, showing that Rs may be Antecedent to M. 1. (Which I was most-marvelous) {it I is hard I to say}, the 1 ' 3 * 1 ' 2 ' 4 force of will (that I actuated I her)2« or I the force of under- 1 1*2 '3 4- ' standing I ( that I gave I value to such presence and 1 ' a ' 3 commands.)*) {'fhe InteiTogative Rs takes here the first seat hy emphasis in the P.) ( R I V 2 I )• {N I V 2 I IV} 1 ' 2 ' *i ' 2 • 4 i» N 3 I ( R I V I N I )2* 1 ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 ' +1I N 3 I (R I V I N 3 (i2 n+n))2* =4 R*, P, (N) R2*3 -f(N) R2*, 1 1 LECTURE VIII. 149 You have seen tliat tlie third term in the Mono-simple transforms itself to the yir«i, with vanishment of the first term which is changed into a post-joining preposition phrase, when the Active form of Voice is changed into the Passive. In the C» or Interrogative R* subordinate structures when the Subordi- nates are subordinate to Vs which are Active, they are in fact the 3rd terms if the complex is considered as one P structure only; and their conversion into the 1st terms is nothing more than their transformation into the Passive voice. You go now to see how an integral Subordinate with dual conjunction becomes a co-ordinate Subordinate by certain enipbasie, and by extreme emphasis goes to simulate in structure a Di-simple or co-ordinate P, which would be the subject for the next lecture. Conversion of integral C* into co-ordinate C* subordination. U. The gap I was very wide[ (so that I no body I could jump 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 across it.) hi X I V 1 2 I [ (C I 2 N I AV s) = p2 C*, 12 12 1. {The gap I was so very wide} (that no body I could jump * 1 ' a 1 ' 2 across it.) { ii N I y (c' 1 2 I } C" I 2 N I AV 3)=P2 c' C% 1. \So very wide was I the gap} (that I no body I could jump 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 across it.) jc' 1 2 V I i» N I } (C" I 2 N I AV 3)*=:C' Pg C'\ 1 ' 2 ' ' 1 ' 2 Here both the structures have initial conjunctions and apparently will lead one to confound them with the Di-simples in which each of the Mono-simples have initial conjunctions. Remark here the different transpositions that have occured and this will lead you to their distinction by observation. LECTURE IX. Students and Gentlemen, Having now shown to you the Subordinates of the Mono- simple P in their various stretches, it remains for me to point out to you that as the Absolute incomplete Strcuctures gradually approach the Principal Mono-simple, they allow to certain extent the same R* and C* subordinations, R* in case of Vocative N or PP Absolute, and C* in cases of PV or IV Absolutes, the continuations in these last by subsequent Terms to that of the fourth having already been shown. PVs or IVs, however, when post-joined by Preposition phrase, its final N may take an R* or may do so to any of the subsequent N terms after IV or PV. I.— Complex of the Absolutes. I. — By C* and R* subordinations unitbd to P. a. Of N Absolute. 1. C* You, you, the son of a base mechanic, {who j have dared I to trample on the nobles of Genoa)Sjyou, * by their clemency, I are only doomed * I to shrink again into the nothing | ( * from which I you j sprang ! *)• C;PP-PP-ii N 3 (R I AV I IV 3 3)*S 111 ll'2'4 ' {N I * 3 I A 1 V *| IV 1 3 } (3r I N I V)«=(;N-N-i1N 3 R% ^P^ ^ R*. b. Of PV Absolute. 1. (* Allowing then (that | such cruelties | were perpetrated by Bi-itons' upon the poor Africans)* { he | could not help LECTURE 3X. 151 j feeling} (that j it I wfis I an important duty in some one I to undertake j the task of awakening pubHc feeling to 4*5 a just sense of the case.)* (J PV 1 (C I i2 N I AV 3 3)« S jN I A 1 V I PV[ ^4 ' I'a f^l' 2'* (C I N I V I ji 2 N 3 I IV I ii N 4 5-3-3 I )*=cJPV C'^l) P4 4 C«, 2. C Supposing however (that I the supply of good nourish- ment I is adequate) S {people I are apt I to err in various '2 '^ ' 1 ' 2 ' .4 ways} (when I they I come I to use I it.)* ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 (JPV 1 (C I 1^ N 3 I V 2)|) { N I V 2 I IV 3} (C I N I V I IV I N) = (^PV 4 C'.^ P4 4 C\ 3. C Supporting *• I her I * to a iseat, (which I happened I to » 4 ' 5 ' 1 ' 2 ' be hard-by)» S, j he I told * I her 1 * in a few syllables I 4 • 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' * enough to satisfy j her immediate curiosity.} 4 6 d {PV * I N I * 3 ♦ ! (R I V I IV i)» S '4 '5' l'2'4 ' { N I V * I N I ♦ 3 I 1 IV I i3 2 N}=(; 4 5 *R% S P., 4. d Without attempting I to describe I the various stages of the Revolution | and | the different committees (^that | under different 'titles carried-on I the work of destruction)' S, 2*3 ' |we I will mention I some of the deeds} {that I shine-out)* * 1 ' a ' 8 ^1*2 152 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANQUAQE. (as I we I look into that abyss of horror, the Paris •£ 1792 and the following year.)2« d { PV I IV I ii 2 N 3+ii 2 N ( (R I 3 V I N 3 I )S 'i'e' 7 7l' 2*3'^ {N I AV I N 3} (R I V)* (C I N I V 3(12 n) 3, 1 ' 3 'E8 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 1^ n 3(n+ii 2 n))2» 5. C Being on one occasion applied to, I to save * I an young officer | * from a couit-niartial, (which | he | had 7 3 1 provoked by his misconduct)* S {his reply ( was( (that 2 ^ ' 1 ' 2 ' c I he I would do i every thing in his power I to oblige I 1 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' so gallant and good an officer as Sir John Warren.) 5 + 5 CjjAaPVl IV«|ii2N|*3n}(RlN| V|3)'Sii3N I V [ * 46* 7 312' ^ 13 (C I N I AV I i2 N 3 I IV I 1 2+2 i» N+N)« • 1 • a ' 3 ' 4 ' 6 6 = (;4 6 7 «R'3 )) P. 2 C\ These subordinated Absolutes are sometimes seen to stand alone without the P«. H. — By C* and R* Subordinations independent of P. a. Of N Absolute. 1. {No wonder (that I the people of Paris I have ever sine© 8 ' 1 ' looked back to Genevieve as their protectress)' and (that I ♦ in after ages i she I has grown I to be * I the patron ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' saint of the city,)*} 5 Cj 2 N (C I i> N 3 I A 11 y 1 3 (n+18 n))* + (C I * 3 I N I AV I IV I i> 2 N 3)*J)=(;n (C*.,+C*5 P LECTURE IX. 15? 2. C What an awakening ! alone in a frail boat, their conunini- ^1 1 ons gone, water all round, and swarming with the cruel 1 4 sharks, — the sun I burning over head, I and themselves 1*4 ' 4 now 36 hours without food, and parched with the deadly 4 thirst (which I they I had I the resolution I not to attempt f 6 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 ' to slake with salt water, I well knowing I )• (that I the s ' 8 ' c temporary relief I would be followed by worse suffering, 1 ' 2 perhaps by phrenzy.)2»S C| 2 ii N ! |) (^ 1 3, |) d i3 N I P\r J) (^ N 3+4 3 J) (Ji^ N I PV 3 |) + C;N 1 3 3+PV 3 |(R I N I V I ii N I 1 IV I IV 3 I 1 PV)3 ^3 4^6'i'a' a' 4'«' « ( C I i» 2 N I A A V 3, 1 3)J)2' 1 2 =< 1 >--< 14, > + < l, + 4 |R», 8 C%> Here the Ist Absolute has in apposition 5 conjoined Absolutes, b. of IV Absolute. 1. Ci"To shoot I the villain} (who I has destroyed I my sister") ^ 4*51' 2 ' 8 returned James, C rising hastely from his chair S G"To rid * I the world | * of the villain} (who | has made | me what)* (III am)2« (who I drew * I me 1 * from the 33 ' 1 ' 2 1*2 ' 3 ' paths of rectitude to the ways of crime)* (who | has blasted I my character)*, (who I has heaped I misery on 2 ' 3 1 ' 2 ' 3 my mother)*, (who I has beguiled I my sister)*, (who I 1 ' 2 ' 8 1 has done I all, all) ((R) I he I could I to trample » I us I * in 2*3 3'3'i'2 ' 4 '5' 154 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. the dust, and reduce -it I ns I * to the level, aye, below the level of the vilest of mankind !")• S ^'(^ { IV I 1^ N } (R I AV I i3 N)» V' V I N (J PV i z S ^'C* { IV ♦ I ii N U 3 } (R I AV I N I N)« (R I N I V)2. ' 4 6 I's's'a 3'l'2 , (R I V * I N I * 3'-3 3"'_3)' , (R I AV I i3 N)« , (R I AV « I N I * 3)» , (R I AV I i3 N)« ■ , (R I AV I N, N) 12 3 3 , (R) I N I A (V) I IV * I N I * 3 3 ' 1 ' 2 ,4 ' 6 ' IV* I NU3!3-3 3yS 4 ' 5 ' f =" (J 4 5 5R'3 J)" P„ (J 4 ^ " cj 4 5 R'g R^ |)" " R«3, R'3, R'3 R'3 R«3, R%" It must be remembered thus that Absolutes are Indepedent Unions and not Subordinates to Ps as the Subordinates are, which is an important philological point. 2. cHow much letter \ to give I any thingS (we I can spare ' c' ' 4 ' 6 f 1 ' 2 to the deserving poor)*, than | either I to misspend | it | on C* C' 4 6 frivolities, or I waste I the good thingsS (we I buy with it !) (." ' 4 ' 6 ' 1 ' 2 C; 1 1 2 I IV I i« N S ((R) I N I A V 3)« Cjc''((c'| IV I N I ♦so" I IV I 1^2 N J) ((R) I N I V 3)2«=(; c' IV I N S 5 R*, 3'l'2 ^ 4*5' , (^ c" c' IV I N c' IV I N J) 3 R', LECTUKE IX. 155 c. of Absolute prepositio7i pJirose Subordinate. I. (J After mutual temporary adieus, and after a fond though timid glance from Emily to him (she | loved)* S { the whole party I retired to their respective chambers. | (Js, + 3 (ii 2 + 2 n) 3 3 ((R) I N I V )^ {ii 2 N I Vs} = C; 3 +3 3 3 (R)', J)?^ Comparison of ellipsis in co-ordinate subordinates and absolutes. Co-ordinate subordinate structures of higher or lower com- parison with co-ordinating " Comparative adjectives" as Joiners to V Term of the P and " Than" as initiative Subordinate have been shown. Co-ordinate sub-structures by way of Equality of of Comparison, having Co-ordinating Conjunction "as" before Positive Adjectives in the V Term of the P and initiative "as" to Subordinates, have also been shown. Ellipsis in these co-ordinate Subordinates occurs by joiners or by one Term only ; in the case oE the presence of the N Terra, V alone or with its joiners is elliptical ; and in the case of the presence of the V Term, N alone or with its joiners remains elliptical too. An elliptical N term followed by an auxiliary V term in the Co-ordinate Subordinate is also shown before. Ellipsis of both N and V terms before the second N Absolute is possible also, for in the above illustrations of the Independent Absolutes it is to be pointed out that ellipsis consists in the absence of two Terms together, the first and the second, which may be filled up by "it is" thus rendering the Absolutes incom- plete into Ps complete. There is no reason why they should not be considered as Double Ellipsis, Ellipsis in Absolutes goes therefore to be more so over Co-ordinate Subordinate structures, which is another philological point to be remembered. But if want and not ellipsis be the sole rule of Absolute forma- tion tliese examples might be considered as elliptical Ps. 156 STYLOGRAPHY OF KNGLiSPI LANGUAGE. Parenthetic parts of speech, phrases and MoQO-simpIes having? been shown before ; Parentljetic Subordinates come here for illustration. II.— Complex by Parenthetic subordination of the Principal. 1. {These Sophists, \as they were culled, | detested | Socrates.} {i2N,(C|N|AV,)V|N}=P3(Cg 1 1 2 2 >3 2. (J * In the winter of the year 1776, | the Count and Countess Podotsky being on their way from Vienna to 1 4 Craco^ J {the wolves, {which | are very numerous in the Carpathien Mountains and, {when the cold j is very severe,) + 12 are more hold and savage than usually I came down in 2 * '2 hordes and pursued I the carriage between the towns of + 2 ' 8 Osweik and Zator.} d 3 3 (n) I i» N + N I PV 3 3'-.s" S r ^ ' 1 1 ' 4 ' jll N (R I V 1 2-3 1 + 1(0 I 1» N I V 1 2V V C' 2+2 C" 2)' [ ll'2 '' 1*2 2" ^' V 1 3 +V I ii N 3 3(n+n)}=(J N | PV ^ P3 (R.^ Cg In the 1st sentence 'as they were called' is parenthetic, isolated by commas. In the 2nd sentence from 'which' to 'usual' isolated by commas with Vs in the present Tense is a parenthetic R», and within this R* another parenthetic C», isolated likewise by commas, is visible too. Parentheses, commas or dashes are parenthetic indicators, and the present Narration within the past one is another philologicul point of distinction. LECTURE IX. 157 I have just then shown to you that Absolute N Vocative is subordinated by R* and Absolute IV or PV by C*, the former being 1st, and the latter, 4th term of the Absolutes. I have shown to you also that 3rd term K Absolutes with elliptical 1st and 2nd terms stand as independent Mono-simples. I have shown to you too that Absolutes as regards ellipsis are more elliptical than co-ordinate Subordinate structures by two absent terms to render them complete, though rarely the co-ordinate Subordinates, which are generally elliptical by one term, may be seen to be elliptical by two absent terms also. I believe that you have, by this time, been able to discern that Mono-simple Ps are subordinated by complete R« and C*, and that Absolute combinations to the Ps are but independent unions to the same by incomplete Absolute structures ; the former, is a complete Complexity ; the latter, an union of incomplete structure to the P, and hence an incomplete Complexity. I go presently to point out to you that complete C* Subor-, dinate Structures to Ps may stand as Absolute incomplete by two. absent or elliptical terms. And this C*, I presume, completes the narration, of the 3rd kind of ellipsis^ which I go to impress upon you by way of differentiation. III.— Complex of the P by Elliptical C» Subordinate. 1. ( (J When I a little boy at school S) } he I surprised * I everr ^ Q 3 ^ 1 ' 3 ' body I * by the curious little machines \ ( which I he' 3 ' 3 ' 1 I made with his own hands.)* ( C 1^ 2 N 3 )• { N V * i2 N U s } ( R N V ' 3 I'a' 3' s'l'a = C'3P3fR'3 12 158 STTLOGRAPBY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. -2. (C|lf I not formally punished by lawj))» { he | is punished by his neighbours } (ivlio | avoid | dealing again with one)' (?/;Ao I has once imposed upon them.)2» ( C I (N) I (A) 1 1 V 3 )' { N I AV :3 } (R I y I PV i a)* (R I A 1 V 3)2''=2C»2Po I R% 4 R^, The two terms "he was", "he is" are elliptical after "when" and *'i£" respectively in the above two examples. Like the elliptical 3rd and 4th term initial Absolutes which have been considered as Elliptical Ps, these two examples might be considered as initial Elliptical Subordinates, in contrast with final Elliptical Co-ordinate Subordinates already described. We come now to the consideration of the Direct-Narratives for their conversion into the continued Narratives, for, such conversions of th« 'direct' concern the C* and E,« Subordinates in these continuations. So long as the Direct Speech is a jlart of speech or phrase alone, we might consider each as N Analogue in the narrative and as a third term N to it, and hence inconverti- ble. When however the Direct portion is a sentence this might as well be considered as the same 3rd term N to the Narrative, for here the sentence has become the Analogue of N too. Before you go to convert the Direct, (if Assertive here,) into Narra- tive in continuation, you have only to develope the Narra- tive or objective Conjunction " that " before the Direct in case the V Tenses are Present and the N or PP persons agreed or disagreed with both the Narrative and the Direct. No further change than this developmental "that" is necessary to convert the whole into a Narrative except by omission of the punctuative *inverted Commas,' for, we must consider the Direct as Narra- tive with understood conjunction '*that" as related before. Proyided that V in the Narrative is Present or auxiharied by an LEOTtIRE IX. 15^ Auxiliary Present, the arrangement for Conversion remains the same even if the V Tense disagreed in the Direct with that of the former. But when the Tenses of the Vs in both differ we must equalize them, or when the Persons of the Ns or PPs differ we mast equalize them too (except the inequality of 2nd Person of the Direct to 1st Person in the Narrative), the standard for equalization in both being with the V Past and N or PP (personal pronoun) , as the case may be, of the 'Narrative. When again the Auxiliaries appear before the Vs in the Direct, their Tenses, no matter whether in the Indicative or Potential, shall have the same standard of equalization. The Present auxiliaried V in the Narrative must agree with the Present Auxiliary in the Direct and the Past with its Past, though this brings about wide grammatical changes of In- dicatives into Potentials (i.e., Indicative Future to Potential Past) or only the Tense changes of the Present into Past, and Perfect into Pluperfect in these respective moods. Then comes the consideration of the post-joining preposition phrases, of V the 2nd term in the Narrative, or of the 3rd term itself from which the N, and PP equalizations must extend to those of the 'direct'. The persons of these N or PP must tally with the persons of N or PP of the Direct for the continued conversion, but the Rule of Tense will hold good as before, though the Vs may change themselves into- totally different but appropriate words keeping the original sense. Proximate PAs 'this', 'these' and proximate Adverbs 'here', 'hither', 'hence', 'now', &c.,in the 3rd or subsequent terms of the Direct must change into distant PAs 'that', 'those' and distant adverbs 'there', 'thither', 'thence', 'then', &c., respectively in the converted Narrative, unless the proximity be so distinct that it cannot bear distant relation. So far we have considered only of the Narrative of the Direct. Let us now see how the Interronative Direct behaves -i6. 160 STYLOGRAPH"? OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. the Narrative conversion. All the above rules hold good in thi» case except that the V-changes in the Narrative into appropriate Vs are constant, and that the conjunction narrative *that', cannot intervene here but is substituted by 'whether', or 'if, changing the Interrogative into the Narrative as C* Subordinate, — whether the first place is occupied by the Interrogative V or an. Adverb. The interrogative initial Relatives become, as they should be, the subordinate R* simple, combina'tive, or riveted. The inversion oS. 1st and 2nd into 2nd and 1st term of the Direct comes as a consequence and sometimes its emphatic Auxiliary vanishes too when present. The third expression. Imperative of the Direct, comes next for consideration. In this conversion the old rules of the Narrative remain the same while the imperative V changes into 4th term in continuation of the Narrative. The 4th expression. Exclamatory of the Direct in its Optative- variety, converts its 1st term into that of the 3rd of th& Narrative and its V term into the 4th term. The V of the Narrative, like that of the V of the Interrogative, change* into an appropriate V. Other varieties oE it allow conversion in. most independent ways and do not belong to the observational system of teaching. IV.— Conversion of Assertive-Direct-Narrative into continuous Narrative by C* subordination. (a). — In which Narrative 1st Term is in the 1st Person^ AND V in the PrESKNT TENSE. Illustration of Ist term in the 1st Person and V in the Present tense of Narrative having Direct speech as a Sentence in continuation is considered as a continued Narrative. The Narrative here is the Principal and the Direct speech without inverted comma enclosure, the C* Subordinate, — in which the subordinate narrative conjunction 'that' remains understood. LECTURE IX. 161 ^ht that I am right I say ^ you are right I say that you are right ;ht that he is right r I am right < you are ri^ (^ he is right <6). — In which Narrative 1st Tebm is in the 2nd Person AND V IN the Present. ( I was wrong < you were wroE ( he was wrong I was wrong that I was wrong you say -^ you were wrong You say that you were wrong that he was wrong ^c). — In which Narrative 1st Term is in the 3rd Person AND V IN ANY TENSE. C 'I have been kind' that he has been kind He says ^ 'you will be kind' He says that I will be kind / ' Hari is cruel' that Hari is cruel es 1 es "eS e? ^ > 2 4> > 5 > 2 4< J3 rt 2 2 '3 -tJ 2 23 2 2 3 -a 2 ^ -<-> o "fcJO 3 b£ s 90 s ^ ZQ g a ^ ^ zn i CQ ^ 1 'A 30 8dA B< niflton TT>fI iBT>d niiT? r>d\"i eS §- 9ydioi:}JBd }8Vd pue odA"; :ju8S^jd .Cg § .= -« ^ <5 ^ ^ m < 11 I © © © © © 1 © © "rt es cS ^ .J2 ■!-> ■ Xi 1 > X a 13 o i a> © o CS e« > a ^ ^ 03 03 -13 -G XI a >• CIS > 03 1 2 s o 2 3 3 2 'a o 2 o 2 s8 ^ cc s O o S ^ 02 S o 1 ^ A 30 9diC; *A JO 9cIA 9[dioi;j^d ;s^d Aq -^ • j A'g A ^ -a bo ^ ^ ^ .5 ^ 180 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGDAGK. a ^ be a bo .5 to a a be a 1 .2 IS o Si 1 (3 o Xi o a> o a t3 > Ic IS IB *s ^fl (O o X» © C3 ® s ^ 15 > 0) > 1 to a n3 ■2 'bC 2 s 1 2 O 2 o TjO 2 . X 1 o 03 ^ ^ g o o ^ g o O 1 ^ .1 "^i ^ § • ^.g .?; s. 5s cc «o <» 5» OS 11 r^ o^ ^ ^. ■-' 0, i- ^ 1 R, <= 1. bc ^ g) tao g' fl V. *^ I 'i •> o o .9 -r! .2 fl 'S S a? S c « <» - .2 .2 fl c H -r: .s ^ ■-„-,- X 5 - a 5 - s i g i ^ o 2 2 ^ o LECTURE IX. .181 n o ?< Cl c o O fee o o O) t> r> o o O) o > > a< o be ^ rC c3 c3 :: CO o 'n 2 - ^ O no o o 6JU 3 o O -^ ^ 2 o o -" -^ ^ ^ <» -73 -o ^ i: -^ *= 'S -^ 2 -^^ O O fc>C 3 2.' t^ cc ^ O S 5 c O O o fcJO 03 §0 3 go s 03 0) a> xa <1) a> 00 -«j o c3 a 5 ^ £ ^ ^ ^ ^ •<»» __, O 1 -2 GO c 0) 2 "3 o a? o *-> 3 2 s « © ^ ^ 03 a ,£3 > 9) 1 > cJ 4) > c3 a> JO 1 > ^ 2 > a ^ o 2 2 •tj •-S ^ TJ 12 ,^-f o 2 CO -i 1 o feJD •73 $ s s o O ^ w ^ ^ i a I ^ 00 •AI JO 9dX^ !iud88jd Aq^ JO edX:; baissbj Aq © o © a 2 ft. Ph > r-l 03 J. -^a > 3:^ © t*^ o ® o S© i* © eg CLi a« B ^ i I ^ I g "s-s o o © J2 &, > .ST -^s in o a »? '-3 » •S PLH kT o S o ^ C a ^ 0^ S »o -^ ^ ^ i > g ^ © Xi ^ g S d I a> ^ ^ 2 t^ ^ ^ CO o ° © © k ^ ^ a, ■** ^ © o a u t> © LECTURE IX. 185 U' *^ ^ « § H^ t •I ^ ^ ^ 3 a o i 5^ a o o o <3 I OQ (2 1 > ft. o "e t > ^ «*>'*— % s <— *— N »H '« 1 H i^ > 5; '0 •i-t Of ^ o <» • F-t s 1 Si o g > c ^ t o g •r S 1 r«f< a S > 1 •1 < 1 > 1 d s a 22 ^^ <5< 1-1* <^ OQ <5 •S ^S 03 o ■S o £1 ])2« f2 N 3 I AVlc' + c' 2 N} (C I N I ii 2 N I (V))' *l'2' 3*1 l'2 ([R I [ C I N I A 1 V I ii N 3 I IV I i8 N I PV 3 ] 1 ' ' 1 ' 2 ' 3*4' 5*6 C" I V 3 3 3 I V I l3 N 3 3 (1 PV 3 S I 3 V * I l2 l5 N I ♦S f '2 '2'8 '4'^'2' 3' ' (R I AV * I + N I 3 3 )»])2« 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' =P3 c'C% 1(C'R3 c;4;) P'3 CTe)2' Remarks : — N is antecedent to PP, while N or PP is antece- dent to R as a general rule, but the N of the 2nd co-ordinate precedes the PP of the Ist co-ordinate, thus showing regularity jn the position of the antecedent in the one example by inversion, and in the other example of transposition, R has become ante- cedent in position to PP, as a rare instance, breaking this general rule. LECTURE XI. ^Students and Gentlemen. I have shown to you before, that pronominal adjectives under certain circumstances in the Mono-simple do neither take any punctuation nor conjunction in their increased number of repetitions of 2 or 3. I have shown to you also that certain punc- tuation and simple conjunction become necessary in the increased numbers of two or more than two of any term in the Mono- simple or in its joiners. You have seen also in the latter that some of these simple conjunctions though not all, are copula- tive, alternative, adversative, adversative-negative, negative or •co-ordinate-adversative, and pure co-ordinate ; and that all these unite parts of speech and phrases only. I have come presently to show to you the same and other punctuations, the same con- junctions ; or both punctuations and conjunctions in combination of two or more increased sentences of the Mono-simple P, of the Mono-simple S or Co-ordinates ; or Subordinates of the Co- ordinate subordinates; and of each co-ordinate in the Di-simple Ps respectively, — which go to form as it were compounds of each of them with the same conjunctions, now named as com- pound conjunctions or conjunctions of the Qth class. Unlike the subordinate and co-ordinate-subordinate conjunctions, they bear no heading relation whatever to the simple sentences that follow them or between whom they are placed, and are repre- sented in the formulae by large isolated plus. Let these Cora- pounds of Ps, Subordinates, and Co-ordinates each to each be called "un-mixed" or similar Compounds, and let me go now to demonstrate them. 194 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A.-SYMMETRICAL COMPOUNDS. I.-COMPOUND OF MONO-SIMPLE Ps. 1.— PUNCTDATIVE BY , ; : — 1. {Only I one of these I need I occupy I our attention, f { ^*t F 'i '2' 4' 61' is I the salamandar. | 2 ' 3 { * 1 I N 3 I V * I IV I i3 N n I N I V I ii N I } 'l '2 '4' 5'l'2' 3' 2. {At one hour of the day | it I reaches to the upper part of 1 a the sloping beach ; } {* some six hours afterwards | it | has- retired * to the lower part.} {|*33|N|V*33}{*3l|N|AV*3|! ' '1*2 '1' 2 ' = P, ; P, 3. { Do not flatter * yourself * with the hope of perfect 2 ' 3 ' happiness : } { there is » | no such thing | * in the world. { {|Ax|(N)|y|N|3s|n|iy| = x»N|3|} 4. { T I do not fear I them {, — { they I cannot hurt I me. \ 1' 2'3'l' 2*3 {NlAiVlN}, — {N|AiV|N( 'l' 2'8 'l 2*3 * 3 9 ■'^3 LECTURE XI. 195 6. { Alas ! I she I bleeds } — { her month | is torn sadly. } 1 (J ! S { N I V } — {i3 N I AV 1 ' ' 1 ' 2 1 2 <'> Po-Po 6. { No impure thought I entered I their imaginations } — | her 12 3 bosom I heaved against his chest } — { her beautiful cheek, now tinged with a slight colour, I rested upon his. } 2 {2 2 N I Vl 3 N I ( 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' - { l3 N I V 3 I } 1 ' 2 ' - { l3 2 N 1 4 3 I V 3 I } 12 2. — Conjunctional. 1. j Stand-up before the light here } and \ let I me I see I you '2 +'2'3'4'6 breathe.} 6 { V I (N) I 3 1 } + { V I (N) I N I IV I N I IV j 2. \ Serve ' God } and \ be cheerful.} * 2 3 + 2 |y|(N)|Nl} + {y|(N)|2} = P3 + P2 3. I At such times, I the flies | enter I the passage } and ' ' 12' 3 + { maggots in the nose I is I the result.} * 1 ' 2 ' 3 J3|x>N|V|i>NS + {N,|y|i.N} 12 A \ i o = P3 + P3 196 stylography of english language. 3.— Both Punctuative and Conjunctional. 1. { I I took » I your Arithmetic I* away tea minutes ago, } and 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' + I you I knew * I nothing I * about it. | 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' { I N I V I i3 N 1 1 3 I }+{ I N I V I N 3 I } = P3 ,+ P3 2. { The elephant I bore * I this I* for some time well enough ,} 1 ' 2 ' 3 hut \ at last * | it i got * angry. } (^But is Adversative.) + 12 {liiN|V|N|3i2l( + {|i«|N|V*2f ' 1 ' .2 ' 3 ' ' ' 1 ' 2 3. { Tliere was I no wind, } hut \ snow I had begun I to fall 2' i+*i' 2' 4 softly all round. } {But is Negative-adversative.) { I 1 V I 2 N, }+{ N I AV I IV 1 3 f ' 2' l*l'2'4 = P2, +P4 4. { They I shout, } hut { there is I no answer. | 1 ' 2 ' + * 2 ' 1 {But is Adversative-negative.) !|N|Y|}+{|iV|.N|}=P„ + P, 5. I* There I he | will stand * I flapping I his ears I to drive '1 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' 6 away | the flies ;} or { he | will pull-down | a bough from 7 + ■ 2 a tree I to fan I himself.} {Or is Alternative.) ' 4 ' B n>|N|Ay|py|x3N|iy,|..N|} +[ |, N I AV I 1' N 3 I IV I N I != P; i + P, 12 8 4 5 LECTURE XI. 197 6. {Here are | 4 facts about the sea : — } | let, | it | has | a rest- less surface disturbed by ripples and waves : [ { 2nd, it I is 12 constantly heaving with the ebb and flow of the tide : } J3rd, its surface-waters | drift with the'wind : } and {4th, it I possesses I deep and wide currents.} 2 ' 3 { I 1 V I 2 N 3 I } { 1 I N I V I ii 2 N pv 3 I } '2'l '^'1*2' 3 ' { 1 I N I A 1 V 3 3 I } { 1 I i3 N I V 3 I } + {l|N|y|2-.2N =P, :- This Compound of the detail Ps is in apposition with the above P.,. 7. {Bodies I do not fall on account of the laws of gravitation ;{ 1*2 * nor {does I gravitation I explain I their fall.} + ' 1 '2 ' 3 (iV^or=Negative-copulative.) {|N|AiV333|} + {|A|N|V|i3N|} =^2; +P3 8. { I I have selected ; } while {you I are engaged with Pear- 1 2 + ' 1 ' 2 son and Arnold.} (TF^iZers Adversative.) {N| AV}; +{N| AV3(n + n)} = P2; +P2 198 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LAKGDAQE. 9. I The animal or vegetable substances- devoured I are taken } 1 ' a ' into the animal's stomach;} | they I are there digested or dissolved ;j and {thus they I are fitted | to be distributed to 2 + ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 all parts of the fowl's own body, and applied to its main- 4 tenance and growth. | {1I2 + 2N 4 I AV.3 f; IN I AiV+ V j; 1*2 ^1' 22 + { 1 I N I AV I IV 3 3 I + IV 3 I 1*2 4 '4 = ^2 1 ^2 » • "4 10. {The cold glass- brought into the warm room I has first I a 1 • 2 • fine film of mist- formed upon it, } and-then-hy-degrees { the clear drops of water I come.| 1 '2 I j 1^ 2 N pv 3 I V 1 I 1^ 2 N 3 pv 3 } 12 8 + |{|l»2N3| V| } 1 2 ' = P3 + P2 4. — By increased Copulatives. 1. { * In the early morning | the sky | was bright*, } then {the clouds I appeared,} and after that \ \ came I the rain.j 1 ' 2 + ' 2 ' 1 { I 3 I ii N I V 2 I } + { I ii N I V I } + { I V I i» N I } 1 ■ 2 = P2, + P2 + P: LECTURE XI. ISO- 2. { It I ia very easy I to split* I the craystals I* lengthwise ;^ X 2 4 5 while \ I much more force I is needed I to cut* I them U + ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 6 ' crosswise } and then | they I do not split, } but break.} } N I V 1 2 I IV I ii N I 1 [ + { 1 2 N I AV I IV I N I 1 } I'a '4' s' l'2'4'5' + { N I A 1 V + V J 1 22 = P5+ P5+ P2 6. — By Copulative and Adversative or vice versa. 1. I I I thank * I vou I * all the same ; ] but \ I I love I tran- l'2 '"3' +l'2' quillityl — and \ I I find * I it I * in the hotel. [ 3 + 1 2 ' 3 ' {N|V«|N|*i}; + {N|V|N} + {N|V*|nI»3( 1*2 3' l'2'3 12 '3* 2. I Not a mine I is opened, [ nor | a heap of shale j thrown- 1 ' 2 + ^ ' out,} I but |there occur j fragments of its stem- marked ex- ternally with small rounded impressions and in-the-centre slight tubercles with a quincuncial arrangement.} {Nor- &M<= Negative-copulative and adversative.) {i|i»N|AV|},4-j|iiN3|(A)V|} + {|lV I N3pV13 + 3 3 3|} = P2 + P2 + P2 6.— By Expression Ps. 1. {Let (N) I the Cossacks | go back,} or{ I | shall fire.} 3 • 4 =P4 + P: 200 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. {Bny-off | the fight,} and }we I will ratify I the peace with 2 3 + 1 ' 2 ' 8 gold.} 3. { Try I the same experiment with a tea-kettle instead- of a 2 ' 3 saucepan, | hut | only put [ a little water in- the tea-kettle,} and J shut I the lid I ♦ well down.} + 2 ' s ' jV I (N) I i» 2 N I 3 3 } + { 1 I V I (N) I ii 2 N 3 I } '2*1' 3' ^'2'!' 3'' + { V I (N) I ii N I 1 1 }=P3+P3+P, II.— COMPOUND OF MONO-SIMPLE SUBORDINATES. 1. — Of C* Subordinates. 1. I We I say of all these things, or objects,} (that | they | are | the causes of the sensations in question,)* and (that I the sensations I are I the effects of these causes.)* 1 ' 2 ' a {N I V3 } (Cl N I V |iiN3 3)« +(C| i^N I V|iiN3) *l'2 'l'2' 3 ' l'2' 3 2, — Of R* Subordinates. 1 . (All-the-time-that I we I are awake) { we I are learning ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 by means of our senses | something about the world } (in which we I live)* and (of v^hich I we I form I a part.)* l'2+ 'l'2' 8 ( C I N I V 2 I )• { I N I AV 3 3 I N 3 I } 'l'2''l'2 's' i.i (ar I N I V)'+(3r I N I V I i^ N ) 'I'a 'i'2' 3 = 2 C*2 P, I K*2 + § R*3 lecture xi. 201 3. — Of increased C» or R« Sdbordinates. 1. } It I is quite fair and proper } ( that | one person I should 1 ' 3 ; N I J I give I credit)* and (another I contract I debt)' (when I it I is 2'8 + l'2 'S 'l'2 for their mutual convenience I to do so)^* and (when there is I little reason I to fear)2» (that I the debtor I will be able [ to make I payment at the proper time.)^* 4 ' 6 {N I V i2 + 2|(C I 2N,A V|N)* + (N I V I N)« *l'2 'l'2'8 l'2'3 (C I N I V 3 1 IV i)2« + (G I 1 V I 2 N I IV)2« (C ii N AV 1 IV N sf ' 1 ' 2 ' _ 4 ' 6 ' 2. {It I is I the sea] (that | lays | the iron track,)' (^that | builds j the iron horse,)' (that I fills * I his nostrils I * with fiery 8 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' : breath,) and (that I sends I his tireless hoofs I thundering + 1 ' 2 ' 3*4 across the continents.)' { N I V 111 N I } ( R I V I i» 2 N)' 1*2'3' l'2' 3 (R I V I ii 2 N )' (R I V I i3 N 3)' 1 ' 2 ' 3 1 ' 2 ' 3 + (R I V I i3 2 N pv 3 )' 12' 3 =P3 3R'3,3R'3,3R'3, + 3R'3 202 stylography of english language. 4. — Of Co-ordinate Subordinates either by increased Subordinates or increased joiner Co-ordinates. 1. I He I was so pious,} (that I he I under-took I nothing without asking I counsel of the gods ; )* so just | ( that 4 6 q' he I never did I the smallest injury to any one but ren- 1 ' 2 ' 3 +2 dered I essential services to many ;)* so temperate ] ( that 3 c' he I never preferred I pleasure to virtue;)* and so wise] 1 ' 2 ' 3 + c' (that I he I was able even in the most difficult cases with- ' 1 ' 2 out advice I to judge (what)« I was expedient and right.)^' ' 4. 6 1 ' 2 }N| Vc'2}(C'M N| VlN I PV|N3)'; \i ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 '5 j...c'2} (C"| N I iV 111 2N3I + 1 Vl 2N3)» ; ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' ' 2' 8 {...c'2}(C'''| Nl 1 V I N3 |)»; i 2 3 {•.. + C' 2 } (C" I N I V 2 1 3 3 I IV I NV (R I V 2+2)-' = ^2 c'C^% ', c'C"'3 ; c'C"'3 ; + c'C^ R^'^ 2. { It I both boils and freezes at a much lower temperature 1 ' 2 I,. 2 c' (than I water I does,)* and at a higher temperature} (than c* ' 1 ' 2 + c' c" alcohol I does.) 1 {Nl iV + V3c'} (Cl Nl A(V + V))* * 1 ' 2 2 ' 1 ' 22 + 3 c' } (C^ I N I A(V+V))* = P2 c' C"*3 +c' C'a LECTURE XI. 209 -3. { The current of the other portion of our story I however has so swollen upon us,} { the condition of the characters a c' 1 I has gathered such I a depth and urgency,} and { the de- ' 2 c' ^ + 3 + nounceraent I becomes so ominous of grave issues} (any 1 ' 2 c' one of which I may one day or another come nearly home 1 R ' 2 to the experience of almost every person in this age of commingled, endlessly ramified and absorbing interests) ( that I it I is impossible I to grasp I the case of each of (»// ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 the actors at the same moment or to keep I the whole with + 4 ' 5 . an adequate care constantly before the reader.)* {ii N 3 3 I 1 A c' V 3 I }, 1 ' 2 ' {1IN3 I A Vl c'l^N + N} 1 ' 2 ' 33' +{ ii N I V c' 2 3 } (i2 N 3 r I A 3+3 V 1 1 3-3-3-3y 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ( C" I N I V 2 I IV I ii N 3-33 I 1 ' 2 ' 4 ' 5 + IV I ii N 3 1 3)» c'JfR', +P,c'Jf R«, C'\ 5. —Of Expression Subordinates. {Chemistry I tells I us exactly} (how I bodies I combine,)* * 1 ' 2 ' 3 1 2 (what I comes of their combination,)" and {how compounds! 1 ' 2 + 1 j may be separated into their constituents.)* 2 }N I V I N I 1 } (G I N I V )* ( R I V 3 )*+(C I N I AAVs)* *l'23 'l'2 l'2 '1' 2 = P8 2C«^,2R*2,+2C*a 204 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 2. {Miss Jayne I related} (Jiow Emily I arrived at the hotel with- 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 out any kind of luggage,) {how I shel was so very wretched,) 1 ' 2 and {how Mrs Pembroke I came and took I her into the + 1*2 2 ' 13 country.) { N I V } (C I N I V 3 3-3),' 1; 2 ' 1 ' 2 ( C I N I V 1 1 2)»+( C I N I V+V* I N I * 3) 'l'2 'l'2»2'3' III.— COMPOUND IN BOTH Ps AND SUBORDINATES. 1. {Whether Simplizio | had obeyed I some private signal from . 1 ' 2 ' 8 Assunta,) or {whether his own delicacy I had prompted I him + 1 2*8 I to disappear.) {he I was now again in the stable,} and {the ' 4 1 ' 2 + ^ manger i was replenished with hay.} 1 ' 2 (Cl N I AV I 22N 3) ^ ' 1 ' 2' 3 ^-(C I i3 2 N I AV I N I IV)» {N I V 1 1 3 } + {ii N 1 AV 3} ^' l'2'3'4l'2 ^'I'a' =C-3 + C',, P2 + P2 IV.— COMPOUND OF MONO-COMPLEXES. 1. — By P and R« subobdinate. 1. { She [ had at any rate ministered to the relief of a family } 1 2 {lohich, but for her, | appeared | to have been on the brink of a shocking death;)* and { she I was now seated along + ' 1 ' 2 with them within the walls of a ruined tower} (tvhose cheer- r LECTURE XI. 205: less walls and aspect I might have entitled I her I to be 1 + 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4 taken for a captured princess in the hands of the gipsy or bandit race.)* { N I AsVss} (R(i3)|V I IV33V; 4-lN I AiVi3 as} *l' 2 ''1 '2'4 ^1' 2 ' ( 1^ (r) 2 N + N I A A V I N I A IV 3 3 3 )» 11' :2 ' 3 ' 4. = P, fR% ; + P2 fR'4 2.— By P and C» Subordinate. 1. (When I the sky I is clear overhead*) { rain I hardly ever ' 1 ' 2 ^ 1 ' falls,} but (when \ it i becomes- overcast )* { rain I often 2 + Q * 1 * 2 ^ 1 ' appears.} 2 (CliiNl V21I )*{| NliiV I } I i'2 ' '1' 2' +(c|N|voM|N|iy|} 2. (When we I are catching I the sun's light,)* { we I have | 1 ' 2 ' 8 1 a ' Day ; } (when I we I are on the dark side,)* | we I have I 3 'l'2 *l'2* Night.} 3 (ClNl AV|i>i^N )M|N| VlNl} (G iNl V3); '1' 2' 3 ^'I'a's' '1 2 n^iii^i-} 2 C*3 P3 ; 2 C*, P, 15 206 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. — By P and co-ordinate subordination. 1. { The air in the room I is much warmer \ ( than I that out 1 '2 c' ' 1 side,) and { there is mixed with it I nearly as much water, + 2 c' 1 derived from the breath and the evaporation of moist surfaces,} ( as | can maintain* | itself U in the gaseous state at the temperature.)* {|iiN3| Vic'}(C"|N |i(V))« H-{ 1 AV 3 I c' N 4 3+3-3 }(R" \ AV* I N I* 3 3 )» 2 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 4. — By P and both R* and C* subordinates. 1. {A law of man I tells {what] we I may expect) (society [will 1 2 3 3 1 u 1 ' do under certain circumstarices ;) and j a law of nature I 2 + 1 ' tells I us ( what } we I may expect) (natural objects I will 2 3 3 1 ' 2 1 do under certain circumstances.) 2 ^iiNsI Y|N}(R I Nl AV)»((C) I N I AV 3 )«• ; ' 1 2'.33'l' 2 '1' t * + j ii N 3 I V I N N } ( R I N I AV)* ( (C) I 2 N I A V 3)«' * 11 ' 2 ' 8 3 ' \3 ' 1 ' a' ^ • 1 ' 2 ' = P3 2R*3 2C%;+P3 3R*,2C='-, 5.— By P and both R* and Co-ordinate Subordinates. 1. {That (which | is lighter)* (than | water)2* floats,} and {that (which I is heavier bulk-for-bulk)* sinksi.} ^ 1 ' 2 2 LECTURE XI. %^ jN (R I V c')' (C" I N I (V))2« V} 1 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' a 2 { N ( (R) V c' )• (C" I N I (V))2» V } = P2 1 R«2 c'C'-'aOg + P2 1 R*2 c' (C'-'a^g) Compound of Compkx by R* and Co-ordinate sub-subor- •dinate, the C'^'g being understood in the 2nd Complex. v.— COMPOUND OF DI-SIMPLE Ps. 1. — PUNCIUATIVE AND COKJUNCTIONAL. _1. [ Where | females | are honored ] [ there | the dieties | are pleased;] hut [ivhere I they I are dishonored] [there I all 2 q/ ' 1 ' 2 c'' religious acts I become fruitless]. 1 2 [C I N I AV] [C' I 1' N I AV] + [C'| N I AV] [C"| i22N I V2] ' 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 =CT2 CPs + CT2 C'To 2.— Compound in either Co-ordinates of Di-simple. 1. [If the student I is I out of order,] [if his digestion I is c' 1 '2' c' 1 '2 wrong,] [if his feelings | are agitated,] or [(c) he| is benum- Q« 1 2 12 bed by want of exercise] [then of course | he | must betake*] himself i * to the best means I of setting * I himself I * 3 ' '4*6' to right.) [ C I ii N I V I 1 3 ] [ C I 1^ N I V 2] [CM i3 N I AV ] ' 12' '1*2 '1*2 4 [ (C) I N I AV 3 3 ] [C" I N I AV I N I 3 I PV I N I 3] A ^ =CT,, CT3, C'P, +CT2 CT, 20o STYLOGBAPHT OF ENGLISH L4NGUAGB. 2. r^^more I it I was examined,] [the-more I it i sarpasged \ the idea-fonned o£ its size and beaaty,] [the-more- worthy [ » + c' {the portico | seemed of all | the admiration} (which | has- for centuries been bestowed apon it.)] rC I N I AV ] [Cl N I V I N pv « i ] , ' l' S * 1 ' s " s [Cr{i»N|V3|i>N}(R|AsAV3)] =CT, CTP, , C'Tj 3 R*j The last of the increased Disimple here is rendered Ck>m- plex by K«. Simulatioii of Di-simples to compoiuid by semicolon. 1. pf I a short pipe-bent at right- angles like the letter L | i» c' * fitted by one arm on to the end of the tap,] while [ (if) i « + * the other i is turned vertically upwards J and [(if) the vat I 1 ' a + c' * is full as before ;] (when | the tap | is turned,) [(then) | the * c >^ • c' water I will shoot up into the air, and I after rising for a 1 ' a + ' 4 certain distance i will stop, and then fall.] ' « + s (Asymmetrical.) [C 1 1» tN 4 SI » I A V 3 1 8 3 ] + [(Cy ) 1 1» N I A y 11] +[(CO|i»N|yaii]; (Cli^NlAV)* [(CO I i> N I A V 13 + I PV 3 I AV + 1 V |] =CP, + CP, + CP, ; 2C-, CP4 This is Compound of Ist Co-ordinate and Complex of the 2nd* LECTUBE XI. 209 "2. [iJust-as I any quantity of steam I has I exactly the same c' * « C weight (as the water) (which I was converted into it by heat)] ; [so | the ice | has | exactly the same weight | (as | Q» 1 2 c' * c* the water) (wliich I has been converted into it I by taking 1 1 ' 2 '4 away | heat.)] (Symmetrical.) £{C' I i«N 3 I V I 1 ii c' N} (C I i» N I (V)| (N))«(R | A Vs»)']; X2 3 ISSIS [C { ii N I V I 1 1» c' N( (C* I ii N I (V) I (N))- i'2 3 ' I'a's (R I A A V 3 I PV 1 1 N)]. 1 ' 2*4 B =C'P3 c'C'*3 I n% ; C^Pj c' (7"3 1 Rs-i This simulates Compound of each Coordinate co-ordinately subordinated and sub-subordinated, by semicolon. VI.— COMPOUND OF COMPOUND Ps. 1. { The struggle with America | was over, } and { trade | went- on briskly ; ( { India I opened a new market for 2 1 ' 1 3 English goods,} {machinery | enabled | the manufacturer | X 8 3 to produce | everything I much-more rapidly,} and | tho 4 6 + factories | gave | work | to large numbers of people.} {i»N3| Vi} + {N| Vi{ { N I V I ii a N 3 } { N I V I i» N I IV I N 1 1 1 { '•s' s *i"a* s'4'6' { ii N I V I N I 3 3 f 1 ' a ' s ' 1 ' a + 210 STYLOGRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. » Having now shown to yon the six varieties of structures thuff- compounded like to like, or as they may he called tiie similar or un-mixed Compounds, we come thus to such Compounds whiclt combine dis-similarly as to structures, and let us call them^ "mixed" or dissimilar Compounds. B.— ASYMMETRICAL COMPOUNDS. I.— COMPOUND OF MONO-SIMPLE Ps AND MONO- SIMPLE SUBORDINATES. 1.— -Between P and K* Sobordinate; 1. { Such I was I the question I put I to Dimock, } and (to which I he I returned I these sterning words.) ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 {i| A|i^N|V3}, +(3r|N|V I i23N)=P3, + R',. 12 12 3 2.— Between P and C* Subordinate. 1. I They I are ignorant, } and ( therefore I bazar reports about Russia I gain * I credence | * amon^^st them.)* ' a ' 8 ' { N I V 2 ;-h( C I 2 N 3 I V I N I .3 )«=P,, + 0*3 2. \ Every body I uses I water in one way or another every 1 ' 2 ' 3 day ; } and ( consequently | every body | possesses | a store of loose information- of common knowledge about it.)* I i2 N I V I N I 8 8 I ; +( C I i2N I V I i» N 3 3 3 )• =P3 ; + C', LECTURE XI. ^1 3. {You I are glad | to get out-side again,} and (so | we all | sally-forth for a walk.)" { N I V 2 I IV 1 1 I }+(C I N N I V 3 I )«=:P^ , + 0*2 4. I A true natural law I is I an universal rule,} andt (as suchf * 1 ' 2 ' 3 + c it I admits-of I no exception.) 1*2 ' 3 { ii 2 2 N I V I ii 2 N }+{ N I V I 2 N } I'a' 3'^l'2* 3^ All the above Subordinates are integral. II.— COMPOUND OF MONO-SIMPLE Ps AND MONO- SIMPLE COMPLEXES AND vice verm. 1. { By day | the sky | is filled with light, } hut ( when | the 12 + C 8un I sinks in the west )* { darkness I begins.} 1*2 * 1 ' 2 iaji^ N| AV3}+(C|iiN I V8)«{N| V} = P2,+C'2P2 2. (ij^l it I were taken out of the air )• { everything | would Q 1 2 1 be dried-up on the land, } and \ life I would be impossible. \ 2 + * 1 ' 2 ' ( C I N I AV 1 3 )• { N I AAV 3 }+{ N I AV 2 } ^•l*2 ^l' 2^l'2' = C*2P3,+P2 212 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 3. {Some times | the air | is busy | drinking-up | vapour every where,} or^ (as j we | say,) { there is | great drought, | } and then {the clothes | dry quickly.} ,- {i liiNl V2I PV iNi} +(C| Nl V){iV I 2N{ + {iiN| Vi} Here the 2nd P is complex by paranthetic C*. 4. { Thus I the surface of a sheet of fine white paper | looks perfectly even and smooth to the eye ; } but { a Si + ( magnifying glass of no great power I will show I the minute 1 ' 2 ' woody fibres} (of which I it I is made-up ;) while^ {under 3 ' ' 1 ' 2 + a powerful microscope, I the paper I looks like a coarse ' 1 ' la matting.} ; {l|l^N33|Vl2+23}; '1 '2 + { ii 2 N 3 I AV I i» 2 2 N } (3 r I N I AV ) ; 1 ' 2 ' 3 ' 1 ' a + {3|l»N|V3} ' ' 1 ' 2 =P„ ; + P3 R'2 ; + P, LECTURE XI. 2il3 III.-COMPOUND OF MONO-COMPLEXES AND P. 1. (So long as \ both scale-pans I are empty) \ tlie beam is ' 1.2 12 horizontal,} hut (if | you | put | any thing (which | has j weight)2» into one,)* {that one | goes down} and {the other | rises.} 2 (C I i« N I V 2 )• { ii N I V 2 } +(C I N I V * I i8 N ( B I V I N ) * 3) 'l'2 ' 3 l'2'3 { l2 N I V 1 } + {ii N I V } 1*2 1*2 Compound of complex and complex in which, the 2nd is "compounded in Ps. 2. (If, on the other hand, I the liquid in the bulb I is cooled,) '1 '2 jits volume i is I diminished ;} and, (as I it I shrinks,)* {the ^ 1 '' 2 +''1' 2^ column of liquid in the tube I flows back into the bulb,} 1 '2 and {the level of the top of the column I is lowered.} ^1 '2 J ( C 3 I ii N 3 I AV)« { i2 N I AV} ; + ( C I N I V)' ' 1 ' 2 ^ 1 ' 2 ^ ' 1 ' 2 {iiNss I Vi3} + {i» N33 I AV} 1 '2 ' * 1 ' 2 * The latter Complex has got compounded in its Ps. ^4 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. IV.-COMPOUND OF DIFFERENT MONO-COMPLEXES. 1. — Of R* and C* complexes. 1. } There is I a substance composed of water, proteids, fat^ 2 1 amyloids and mineral matters \ (which I is found in all ' ^ 1 ■' 2 animals and plants ;)» and, (when these | are alive,)* { this + (.12 substance I is termed i protoplasm.} J ' 2 ' 3 }iV|i1N43{(R|AV3)»;+(C|N|V2) 2 1 12 12 {i^NjA V| Ni=Prip2; +2'cCp^ 2.— Of Mono-complex and compounded Mono-complex. 1. {We I call* I people (who I possess I much miascular or other 1 ' 2 ' s 1 ' 2 ' power)* * energetic } ; and { we I estimate I their energy I +1* 3 ' s ' * by the obstacles ((R) they I overcome)* or, in-other-words 3 1*2 + by the work } ((R) they | do.)* {N| V*| N(R| V|i2 + i2N)*2}; I'a '3'l'2' 3 4- { N I V * I i3 N I ♦ 3 1 ( (R) I N I V )• 1 ' a 3 ' > , s ' 1 2 ' + 3f(R)|N V)* 8 ' 1 ' S In the 2nd Complex here, the R* is compflund^d. lecture xi. 2s& 3. — Of Mono-simple Complex and Mono-Co-ordinate Complex or vice versa. 1. {Mr. Benson I was so pleased with the boy's conduct]^ 1 C' 2 (that I he I made | him | a present of the money,)' and (as he I had I no children of his own)* \ he I soon after adopt- 1 ' 2 ' 3 * 2 ' 2 ed I Leonard as his son and left I him I the whole of his '3 + 3 + 2 ' 3 ' 3 fortune.} { N I A c' V 3 } ( C I N I V I N I i» N 3 )• 1 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 a + (C I N I V I 2 N 3) {N I n V I N + 13 N I + V I N I ii N 3 } 'l'2' 8 1* 2'3 3' 2'3' 3 2. { We I obtain indeed I most of {what \ we I need of these 1 ' 2 3 3 1*2 materials from our solid food ;) yet {spring-water I (in-so- + 1 ' far-as I it I contains I them) I is healthier for drinking and ' 1 ' 2 '3 '2 cooking} (than | rain-water | would be.)» {iNl Vi I Ns |)(R iNl V33), 'l'2 '3 ''8'l'2 -f { I N I (C I N I V I N ) V c' I PV-f PV }(C' I N I A V I > 'l'l'2'32 '4 4'V'l' 2' 216 stylography of english languagb. 4. — Of di-subordinate and bi-subordinate complexes. 1. (If I two equal tendencies I exactly oppose I one-another,)* ' 1 ' 2*3 I the body (upon which they I act)* I does not move at 1 « 1 ' 2 ' 2 all ;} while, (if | one | is stonger)* (than | the other)2« | the + c ^ 2 c' c" 1 body I moves in the direction of the stronger.} ( C I 2 2 N I 1 V I N)* {i^ N |(* 3 r I N I V ^t)' ( A 1 Vi} + (C I N I V c")' (C" I i» N I (V))2* {ii N I V 3 3} ^'l'2 ' l'2'l'2 = 20*3 P2lR*2+ 0*2 C'C'^'^P^ v.— COMPOUND OF MONO-COMPLEX AND MONO- SIMPLE POLY-SUBORDINATES. 1. \ What I is I true of water I is I true of all kinds of matter, } * 1 1 ' 2 ' a ' and (we I therefore say) {that I it I is I a law of nature)^* + 1 :« ' 1 ' 3 ' 3 {that all kinds of matter | possess | gravity.)** { N ((R) I V 2 3)* I V 2 3 3 } + ( C I N I V )• ( C I N I V I ii N 3 )2* ( C I i« N 3 I V I N )8- 'I'a' 3 'i 'a's =:P,1R*2 + C*„2C2*3 23C9«5 LECTURE XI. 217* VL— COMPOUND OF MONO-SIMPLE Ps AND DI-SIMPLE Ps OR vice versa. 1. { We I arrived at the village very late in the evening, } and 12 + [ though I our arrival | was by no means formally made c' 1 2 known to the villagers] [yet \ they | came in small parti- c" 1*2 es at a time | to visit | us in our camp.] 4 5 { N I V 3 1 2 3 }+[ C I l3 N I A 3 1 V 4 3] 12 1 ' 2 [ C" I N I V 3 3 I IV I N 3]=P, + CT2 C"P., 12 4 5 2. [If {the bulk of one drop, | were (greater} than that of th& c' 1 2 1 other drop),] [then the larger I would move more slowly,] c'" 1 2 and {the point of meeting I would be by so- much nearer the larger drop.} [C'{i»N3| V (c'}^! Nsl (V)V] 1 '2 ' 1 ' 2 [C'l i^N I A Vii]+{i»N5| AV3} :CT2C'C"'2 C"P„+P2 Here the 1st Co-ordinate is co-ordinately subordinated and the 2nd Co-ordinate compounded in its Ps. 218 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLlSfl LANGUAGE. 3. [Net only | was I a larger capital I brought 1 to bear upon the c' 1 ' 2 ' 4 land, ] [ but | the mere change in the system I introduced I a c' 1 ' 2 ' taste for new and better modes of agriculture ;] { the breed 3 1 of horses and of cattle | was improved, }and | a far greater use made of manure and dressings, | [ C I A I i> 2 N I V I IV 3 ] ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 + [ C I ll 2 X 3 I V I 1^ X 3 3 1 ; ' 1 ' 2 ' 8 I I ii X 8+3 I AV } + { ii 1 2 X I (A) V 3 } = CT, C'P3; P. + P, VII.— COMPOUXD OF DI-SIMPLE AXD MOXO-COMPLEX. 1. rif now I you I either pull or push * I the empty scale I ♦ c' ' 1 ' c' 2 c' 2 ' 8 ' downwards,] [{then) | the beam | may be brought into the c' 1 2 horizontal position again, ] and { the effort required- to + 1 bring it into the horizontal position I will be the- greater, } ^ c' (the- greater I the weight of the body in the opposite c^ 1 scale.)* = [C' I X I c' V c' V * I i» 2 N U 1 ] KC) I i» N I AA ' 1 ' 2 2 3 1 ' V 8 1 1 + { I 1» X 4 6 7 3 I A V C' } ( CM 1» X 3 3 I (AV))« S 'l ' S'l2 ^c^pTccoPs + pr?c^2 Compound of co-ordinate Ps and co-ordinated subordinate Complex. LECTURE XI. 219 VIII.— COMPOUND OF DI-SIMPLES WITH COMPOUND OF THE 1ST CO-ORDINATE P. 1. [ The-greater I the mass of the stream (is)] and \the-more I c' 1 2 + c' rapidly I it I moves] [ the-more I motion will * I it I « com- ' 1 ' 2 q" ' 3 ' 1 ' municate to the ball, '\ or [ the heavier I the ball I (is)] 2 + q/ ' 1 ' 2 [(c") it I will move.] 1 2 [ C I ii N s I (V)] + [C' I 1 I N I V] rC" I N I A I N I V 3 ] 1*2 ''l'2 '3' 'l'2 + [C' I i^Nl V] [C'l N lAV] 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' 2 =CT2^■ G'P, C'Ta + C'Ps CF^ In conclusion, I may be permitted to say that the division of Compounds into symmetrical and asymmetrical as shown above, though it may appear artificial, is no doubt observational. The Rational Formulae of those already depicted may be greatly diversified, but they would by no means deviate from the general principles thus laid down, as similarly observed before in the case of Mono-Simple Complexes. LECTURE XII. Students and Gentlemen, Upto yet all structures have been shown to be terminated hy Period. Parts of Speech relations of antecedents to personal pronoun and pronominal adjectives are shown to exist within the limit of the Period, and the various Simple, Complex, Co- ordinate, and Compound Sentences have been shown to do the same. Presently we come to see that these Parts-of- Speech relations along with certain Adverbial relations do extend to structures beyond the Period, and the same holds good with the Subordinates, Co-ordinates, and Compounds too. A.— Personal pronoun relation beyond the Period. 1. {A sailor | once went ashore on the coast of South America.} I He I had with him I a number of red wollen caps for sale.} 1 ' 2 '3 =p,.p, The relation here is between * sailor * and * he'. B. — Pronominal adjective relation beyond Period. 1. I *In the Island of Ceylon I there are* I large herds of wild 2 1 elephants. ] j Many I have been caught I and tamed and ' ^ 1 ' 2 ' + 2 + made useful I in helping I to build I bridges, houses, and, 2 ' 4 • 6 ' 7 7 + churches.} 7 =p,.p, The relation here is between ' elephants * and ' many.' LECTURE XII. 221 2. { He I had not I far to go} ( for * within a quarter of a mile I he I met ♦ with two riders)* (whom I * from their dress I he I knew * I to be I Jews.)2« \One of them I he I at once 'i'2 ' 4' 5 3 '1' recognized I as Rebecca's father.} 2 ' + 3 =P, C*, §R% . P3 The relation here is between 'two riders' and 'one of them/ C— Demonstrative Adjective relation beyond Period. 1. (" Tired and wretched S { he | sat-down on a large stone by ^4 + 4 f^ * 1 ' 2 the road-side.} | This stone I from his having rested j kim- self upon it | is called | Whittington's Stone to this day. } =(;pv+pv;)p,.P3 The relation here is between ' large stone ' and ' this stone.' 2. (While j Wamba and Gnrth I were talking about the c 1+1 2 1, capture of Cedric and his party )' { a third person | suddenly appeared.} \This \ was I Locksley, the archer.} 2 -^ ^ 1 ' 2 ' 3 3 =2C», P, . P3 The relation here is between *a third person' and 'this.' D.— Adverb relation beyond the Period. (J In-gratitude-for having protected | him S { he | arranged I to provide * I him I » with a splendid steed and a suit of ' 4 ' 5 ' Dew armour.} (J Thus accoutred J) { the Pilgrim | (who 16 222 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. I had at the castle revealed i himself to the swine-herd)* 2 ' 3 soon after made I his way to the lists at Ashby I attended 2 3 '4 by Gurth- diguised as his square.} =c;45>p,.(;pv;)p,iR«3 The relation here is between 'with a splendid steed and a suit of new armour' and 'thus.' The latter adverb may be con- sidered as a connective showing its analogy with conjunction. 2. {A little further on, we | came to an elevated spot,} (which| overlooked I the whole scene). \Here we I found I a painter- 2 ' 8 * 1 ' 2 ' 3 seated on a rock, and busy in sketching its horrors}. The relation here is between 'spot' and 'here'. 3. { * In England in the olden time I people I used * I to ' 1 ' 2 ' drink I ale and a sweet kind of wine called mead. I 4*5+ 5 ' jGreat tankards of ale I stood on the breakfast table.J * 1 ' 2 ' \Now I we I use I tea and coffee.} * ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 + 3 = P5 . P2 . P3 The relation here is between *in the olden time' and 'now.* 4. I * In Norway | the winter | is * very long.} [There [ the deep snow and the hard frost I last for 8 or 9 months of 1 + 1 ' a the year.} = P, . P, The relation here is between 'in Norwny' and 'there.' LECTURE XII. 223 E.— Preposition phrase relation beyond the Period. 1. jEvery part of the top I is spinning round this central 1 '2 line, } (which' I is called I the axis of rotation. } { * In a 1 ' 2 ' 3 similar way I the earth I is spinning * rapidly on its axis. } 12 The relation here is between the whole previous sentence and *in a similar way.' 2. I* From the distance I it I appears * I as a conical mountain ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 with its top- cut off.} I * From this truncated summit \ a white cloud I rises i^X ; but {not quite such a cloud} (as I may 1 ' 2 + 11' be seen on an ordinary hill-top.)* 2 = P3 . P2 ; +P2 1 R2« The relation here is between " a conical mountain with its top cut off " and " from this truncated summit." F.— Mixed relation of the foregoing heyond the Period. 1. ( If half a pint of water, coloured-by-putting-a-little-ink- c 1 into-it I is added to the same quantity of clean water, )» ' 2 I the two I will readily mingle;} | the total quantity of water I will be I a pint } ; and { its colour I will be just half 2*3+ 1 ' 2 as dark } (^as that of the coloured half-pint. )* { This I is I 12 a case of simple mixture. { \ The volume of the mixture I 13 ^1 ' equals I the sum of the volumes of the things- mixed, } and 2 3 ' • ■' + \ there is | no change in the properties of these things. } 224 STYLOGRAPHY OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE. {So (when | water | evaporates, ) { the gaseous water or vapour I mixes with the air, } C in the same way, | the 1 '2 ' molecules of the one body I dispersing l themselves between- 1 ' 4 ' 6 the molecules of the other j (until I thera is I the same pro- portion of each everywhere.)*)' | In like manner j sand and sugar I may be mixed, without any change in the proper- 1 ' 2 ties of either, or in the space } (which | they | primitively 3 X occupied.)* 2 =2 C*2 P^ ; P3 ; +P2 c'C"*2 . P3 . Pa+Pa- C(2C*2P2(;i4 5|)2C*2)'. P^fR'a The relation here is between the first sentence and ** this" in the 2nd. Again there is relation between the above two sen- tences and "so" beginning the 4th, and *'in the same way" also in- it. This 4th sentence, on the other hand, bears relation to "in like manner" beginning the 5th sentence. It would not be out of place here to show the relations that exist within each of the sentences where they exist. For instance in the 1st sentence between " the two" and "half a pint" and "the same quantity", between "of water" and "into it," and between "the quantity of water" and "its colour." In the 3rd between "of the things mixed" and "of these things," &c. &c. Having now shown the above parts of speech and phrase relations of one sentence beyond its ' period' termination to another that follows, we go now to see that Complexes, Co- ordinations, and Compounds of sentences extending beyond their : Period do lijjewise exist LECTURE XII. 225 I.— Complex by Subordination beyond the Period. 1. { The burning of coal and wood I produces I heat, } and 1 '23 + { the heat thus given out | warms | the air. } (^Hence 1 2 3c I it I is I by the giving off on radiation of the heat from ' 1 ' 2 ' 4 some burning substance)' (that | the air of our houses | is [ made warmer)^* (than the air outside.)^* 2 =:P3 + P3.C%|C%c'C''3a2 2. { * By the motion of rotation I time | is divided ♦ into 1 2 c days and nights, } — {*^y that of revolution, | it | is marked 1 2 off * into years. } ( /So that in this way | the earth | is c our great time-keeper.) 3 '^2 » ^2 • ^ 3, { ^«- By this continual up and down movement of the water, I the sand and stones on the beach I are kept * I grinding '1 1 ' 2 ' 4 against each other as in a mill. } ( Consequently | they I c 1 are gradually ground smooth and worn away.)* 2 2 4. { Damocles I gladly accepted I the offer. } ( Upon which^ 1 ' 2 ' 3 the king I ordered,) (that I a royal banquet I should bo 1 ' 2 c 1 prepared, )2« and (a gilded couch * I placed for him, * cover- 2 1*2 ed with rich embroidery,)^* and (side-boards- loaded with gold and silver plate of immense value.)^* = P3. E«2 2C2«2 + 2C2*2+2C2«2 2?6 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. {Animals in breathing I give-out I carbonic acid gas into the air ;} and (when they I die)* {the decay of their bodies + 12 1 I returns I the same substance again to the soil and the ' 2 ' 3 atmosphere. | ( Hence | the carbonic acid gas of the air c ^ I passes into the structure of plants and then of animals, ' 2 I and is once more restored to the air)* (when I these 2 c living things I die,)^* and (their remains I begin I to decay.)^* 1 ' 2 + 1 ' 2 ' 4 = P3 ; +20*2 Pa . C*2 2 C2*2 + 2 C^\ 6. {Material substances, (the parts of which I are so movable)* 1 1 2 c' (that I they I fit | themselves exactly to the sides of any c" ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 vessel)^* (which I contains I them,)^* and (which I flow)* 1 ' 2 ' 3 + 1 ' 2 (when I they I are not supported,)^* I are called I fluids ; } 1 ' 2 ' 2 ' 3 and { fluids I ( the parts of which I do not fly off + 1 ' 1 ' 2 from one another, but hold together)* (as I those of water 2 ' I do,)2* I . are called I liquids. { (Water I therefore is I a ' 2*3 1 ' 2 ' liquid.) 3 = P3 1 R*2 c'G"2*3 § R3.3 + 1 E*2 2 C2*2 ; +P3 1 R«2 2 C^*^ . C*^ 7. [If [ we I fall into the sun] [then I we I shall be fried,] c' ' 1 ' 2 "- e" ' 1 ' 2 [if I we I go away from the sun or the sun I goes out] C' 1 2 + 1*2 [then I we [ shall be frozen]. (So-that (so-faras | the C" ^ 2 Q earth I is concerned ) { we ( have I no means I of deter- 1 ' 2 1 ' 2 ' 8 ' LECTURE XII. 227 mining ( (what I will be I the character of the end,) but 4 ' 5 1 2 ' 3 + I we I know ] (that I one of these two things I must take I * 1 ' 2 ' ' 1 '2 • place in time.)*)* 3 =CT, C'Tg ; CT2 + (C')P2 CT,. C(C*2 P5 5R*3 + P2 20*3)* 8. \l 1 shall endeavour I to show} (that in this case [although { 1 ' . 2 ' 4 e c' we I might still have I a feeling of moral approbation or 1 ' 2 ' 3 reprobation towards action] [yet I we I could not reason- ed 1 ably praise or blame I men for their deeds I nor regard * 2 + 2 ' 3 ' + 2 I them I » as morally responsible.]) (So that (if | my con- 3 c tention I is I just to deprive I us of the scientific method) 1 ' 2 ' 4 '6 { it I is I practically to deprive I us of morals altogether.}) 12 45 This Subordinate has also other structures before (not here given), to which it is a conjoined subordinate. 9. { The driver I could not hold * I it I i(- in.} (So I he I 1 2 ' 3 1- wrapped * I the rein I * around his wrists I in his efforts 2 ' 3 ' ' to hold I the animal.)* 4 ' 5 = P3 . C*5 The relation here is between the whole previous sentence and 'so' which may be reckoned as a connective. 228 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. II.— Co-ordination of 2nd co-ordinate in Di-simples beyond the Period. 1. [Neither | will | sand nor iron filings I mix with water j c' 1 + 1 ' 2 as heavier bodies they I also sink to the bottom.] [Nor I 1 1 ' 2 - c' ' does I powdered ice (though | it I is I water in another 1 c ' 1 ' 2 ' 3 shape) mix with ice-cold water ; as a lighter body it I 2 1 1 • floats at the top.] The word '* also" has reference to preceding structures. 2. [In the one case I the water I trickles down the cold glass. ] c' 1 ' 2 [In the other case I it I gathers into drops of rain] (that I c" 1 2 1 ' fall through the air.) a III.— Componnd beyond the Period. 1.— Between P and P. 1. {The explosions of a volcano I shake I the ground sometimes 1 ' 2 ' .3 with great violence.} But { | the solid earth I is affected + 1 ' 2 by movements even remote, from any volcano.} 2. {Even the loose stones in the mould itself I are continually crumbling down ( and making | new earth.} And [ * thus- LECTURE Xll. 22& day-bv-day I the soil I is slowly renewed, * \ and {the ' 1 ' 2 + balance required for the continued growth I is preserved.^ 1 '2 The word " thus" refers to the 1st P integrally. 2.— Between Mono-complex and P or vice versa. 1. I We I cannot indeed examine I the sea-bottom with any- 1 2 ' 3 thing like the same minuteness } (as the surface of the c' (/' 1 land.) Yet and {great deal | may be learnt regarding it.} = P3 C'C% . -fPs 2. {One I cannot be pedantic all day. } But (if | we | choose 1 2 + Q 1 2 for once I to be pedantic)* {the matter I is after all very '4 1 ' 2 simple.} 3.— Between Complex and Complex. 1. {We I say} (that anything I has I weight)* (when I on 1 2 c 12 3 Q trying I to lift I it from the ground, or on holding I it 4 ' 6 ' 7 4*6 in the hand I we I have I a feeling of effort.)^* Or-again 1 ' 2 ' 8 + (if I anything (which | is supported at a certain height above c 1 1 2 the ground)2« falls)* (when I the support I is taken away,)2» 2 c 1 ' 2 {we I say} (that I it | has I weight.) 2 ' 1 ' 2 3 = P2 2 C*3 2 C2*, . +2 C*2 1E2«2 2C2«2 P. 2 C*3 230 stylography of english language. 4.— Between Mono-simple and a Di-simple. 1, |A great deal of the underground water | must no doubt descend far below the level of the valleys and even 2 below the level of the sea.} And [yet [though I it I should + c" c' - '^ descend to a considerable depth] it I comes at last to 2 1 ' 2 the surface again.] The 2nd co-ordinate conjunction " yet" is transposed here to the first seat in the Co-ordinate. Compound by other Conjunctions "beyond the Period. 1. (When therefore I the Lord ' knew)' (how I the Pharisees I ' 1 2 ' 1 ' had heard)*' (that Jesus I made and baptized I more dis- 2 1*2 2 ' c' ciples)^* (than I John)^* { he I left I judaea, and departed 3 ' 1 1 ' 2 ' 3 2 again into Galilee.} And \ he I must needs go through + 1 ' 2 Samaria.} Then | cometh I he I to a city of Samaria} (which I is called I Sychar,)* near to the parcel of ground* 1 ' 2 ' 3 (that I Jacob I gave to his son Joseph.)* Noiv I Jacob's well I was there.} | Jesus | therefore, being wearied with 1 ' 2 ' 1 ' his journey, sat thus on the well : } and { it I was I about the 2 + 1 ' 2 ' sixth hour.^ =20*2 2C«'2 2G«*3 oV'% , P3 . +P2 . +F, ^W, gR', + ?, . P^ C^PV)) : 4- P2 Connectives "then" and "now" have been shown to belong to this class. LECTURE XII. 231 2. { For some time the struggle | was most amusing j — f the fish I pulling and the bird Lscreaming with all its might>-» 1 ' 4 + 1 ' 4 ^ C the one \ attemping I to fly and the other I to swim, T 1 ' 4 ' 6 + 1 ' 4 from the invisible enemy j — (7 the gander | the one moment losing and the next regaining j the centre of 4 4 ' 5 gravity, and casting between whiles I many a rueful look 4 5 at his snow white fleet of geese and goslings, (who | cack- led forth I their sympathy for their afflicted comraodore.)S 2*3 ^ At length \ | victory | declared in favour of the feathered angler, ^ (who fbearing away for the nearest shore, J j landed on the smooth green grass I one of the finest pikes- 2 ' 3 ever caught in the castle-loch.) = P2 (Jl 4 + 1 4j)~(Jl 4 6 + 1 4|)-(Jl 4 + 45+45 f ^\'^, + P2|R'3PaC'3|R% Remarks :— The 1st sentence is an independent complex : the 2nd is related to the 1st by means of the adverb ''here". Both are subordinated by R*, the former di- and the latter mono-sub- ordinated. The absolute adjective "such" refers to the whole of the 1st para. Criticlsm : — All the sentences are subordinated by R» except the sentence in the 2nd para which is subordinated by C*, and sub-subordinated yet by R*. IV. Adverbial relation between Paras. Ex. 1. 1[1. I Cyrus, (who with tiie chief officers of his court was present) was curious to know| (why Croesus pronounced that name with so much vehemence.) (^ Being told the reason, and reflecting upon the uncertainty of all sublunary thingsj { he was touched with commiseratioa, ordered the monarch to be taken from the pile, and treated him afterwards with honour and respect.} ^ 2. I Thus had Solon the glory of saving the life of one king and giving a wholesome lesson of instruction to another.} f l.=:P, 1R'2 4C«3.(;4 5 + 4;)P, • 112 = + P5. Remarks : — "Thus" relates integrally to the whole of the Istpara. The integrally connected parts of speech and phrases may also be considered as Conjunctions, and hence adverbs, conjunctions, and certain preposition phrases become connectives by analogy. LECTURE XIII. 23d V. Preposition phrase relation between Paras. (a)-OF "Time." Ex. 1.^1. [The next morning (when Cheery went to feed the pony in the manger) there lay the 20 gold pieces in the bin, the very same} (that Cheery had paid the day before.) ^ 2. [From that day all went well at the mill.} {The flour was always the earliest in the market and brought the highest price. } I There were more sacks on the pony's back than three horses could carry.} {Cheery bought a cart and let liim fill it as heavily } (as he would,) { the pony never slacked his pace but trotted on and seemed as fresh and as fat after a day's work } (as-when he was first taken out of the stable.) ^ 3. { In a year's time Cheery married a merry little wife as lively and sprightly }(as himself ;) and {things went on so very well} {that Grumble got worse- tempered than ever at having nothing to find fault with.) {Above-all he had the strongest dislike for the pony;} (for (not-long-after he had been taken to the mill) {Grumble tried to ride him, and the pony ducked him in the pond, dragged him through the briers and soused him at last into a ditch. })» (So Grumble for a long time brooded over this but could not not find an opportunity for his revenge.) ^4. { After three years (as the little old njan had declared,) Cheery's affairs were so thriving } {that he and Grumble were nearly the headmen of the parish,) and { they were both made overseers of the poor.} { Cheery was always for kindness to the poor old people, } but { Grumble Avas a harsh tyrant and would never give them a bit more help) {than he could not avoid.) ^1.= +C^P,1R*3 If 2.= +P, . P3 . P, c'C"«2 . F, ^'G\ , P3 c'0\ ^ 3.= +P3 c'C% + P2 o'C'K . P3 ; C {2Q'S, + V,)\ -f C*i If 4.= -f(C*2)P2C'C'% + P3.P2 + P3C'C'^ 240 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Remarks :— Here all the paras begin with preposition phrases of time progressing by degrees, and ^thus relate to each-other^ so that the paras may be said to be connected with them as with conjunctions. Criticism : — The author has used here seven times co-ordinate Subordinates or "locked" combinations so that inference as to his- fondness for them may safely be drawn. (6)_0f "Place." Ex. 1^1. {In the Pyrenees, the ancient glaciers have occupied all the principal valleys of this chain both on the French and Spanish sides, especially the valleys of the centre } (which com- prehend those of Luchon, Aude, Bareges, Cauterets, and Ossun. ) I In the Cantahrian an extension of the Pyrenees, the existence of ancient glaciers has also been recognized. | ^2. {In the Vosges and the Black Forest, they covered all the southern parts of these mountains.} [ In the Vosges the principal traces are found in the valleys of Saint-Amarin, Giromagny, Munster, the Moselle, &c. } ^3. {In the Carpathians and the Caucasus the existence of ancient glaciers of great extent has also been observed. | ^4. {In the Sierra Nevada in the south of Spain, mountains upwards of 11,000 feet high (the valleys of which descend from the Picacho de Veleta and Mulhacen) have been covered with, ancient glaciers during the quaternary epoch. | 1[1.= +P3 3R«3.P, 1[2.= + P3.P, Remarks :— As the pi'eposition phrases of " time" obtained the 1st seat in each para and simulated as connectives in series in the first illustration, so here also the transporfei preposition phrases of "place" took the 1st seat and simulated as connec- tives in series. You must not omit observing "the next morning"^ LECTURE XIII. 241 "from that day," "in a year's time," and "after three years" in the preceding example, and liere the preposition phrases " in the Pyrenees," "in the Vosges and the Black Forest," "in the Carpathians and the Caucasus," and "in the Sierra Nevada" as para connectives. (c)_Of **Number" or conjoined "Number" and "Place." Ex. 1.^1. {I will only point-out a few analogies between Egyptian and Hebrew customs. } § I. { Moses took the name, conception, and idea of a special national god for the guide and ruler of his specially chosen children from the Egyptians, } (who in the valleys of the Nile far distanced all other nations in sciences and arts and conse- quently had at least apparently some right to that proud assump- tion.) {With the Egyptians only, the priests of the highest caste- of Amn or Amn-ra (to which Moses belonged) were considered the chosen children of the highest concealed God.} § II. { The division of the Jews into 12 tribes was in imita- tion of the primitive 12 nomes- of Egypt} (which took their origin in the 12 signs of the Zodiac.) § III. I The establishment of a special priest caste (the Levites) among the Hebrews was in imitation of the Egyptians.} ^In addition to this, the Levitic organization, customs, and cere- monies, their very division and classification were entirely framed according to the Egyptian laws. } * * * * §l.= 4-P3fR«3.P3iR«2. §2. = +P2fR'3. §3.= +P2.P2. Remarks : — Except the 1st, all the paras here are arranged numerically and consecutively in detail. Ex. 2. ^ 2. (When a school-globe is turned slowly round on its axis,) } we not only see at a glance (how much larger the surface 242 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. of water is) (than the surface of land,) but may notice several other ioteresting features in the distribution of land and water. \ ^ 3. [In the first place, the water is all connected together into one great mass- called the sea.| |One might sail from any part of the sea to any other part without having to cross land. \ | The land on the other hand, is much broken up by the way, \ (the sea runs into it,) and |some parts are cut off from the main mass of land, so as to form islands in the sea.} j One cannot pass from every part of the land to every other part without crossing the sea. } ^4. [In the second place, much land lies on the north than on the south side of the equator. } cTurning the globe so-as- to look straight down on the site of London, S | you will find \ (that most of the land comes into sight ;) whereas, (if from the opposite side you look straight down on the area of New Zealand,) | you will see most of the sea.} ^London thus stands about the centre of the land-hemisphere, midway among the countries of the earth. } And no doubt [ this central position has not been without-its-influenee-in fostering the progress of British commerce. } ^5. \In the third place, (by-the-way- in which the masses of land are placed,) parts of the sea are to some extent separated from each-other.} |These masses of land are called continents^ and the wide sheets of sea between are termed oceans.} | The surface of the solid part of our globe is uneven, } C some- portions rising into broad swellings or ridges, S C others sinking into wide hollows or basins. S Now, { into these hollows the sea has been gathered, and only those upstanding parts (which rise above the level of the sea) form the land.} f 2.=2C*2P, 2C*2C'C''''2. 1[3. = + P. .P7.P2 2C•2,+P5.P6• f 4.=+P2 . (^4 5 ej) P2 2C'2 ; -f-C*2 Pg . +P2 . +P5. % 5.= +|R*2 P^ . P3, + P3 . P« <1 4 , 1 4 )) . -f P2, + P3 1 KV LECTURE XlJl. 24a Rkmarks : — You see here that to the last portion of the Ist sentence from "but— to water," the three paras beginning with "in the Ist place," " in the 2nd place," and " in the third place"" are related each to the other. In para 5, the 3rd sentence contains a N | PV co-ordinate absolute structure. From mere relation we come now to the combination of structures between paras. Para-complexes and Para-compounds (aoaio^ous to such Complexes and Compounds beyond Period and within a para) are visible. B.— Para-complexes. Ex. 1. ^ 1. (As frost sets in) {this pervading moisture freezes.} Now, { precisely the same kiud of action takes place with each particle of water} {as in the case of a burst water-pipe or a cracked jar.) | It does not matter} \_whether the water is collected into some hole or crevices, ] [ or is diffused among the grains of the rook and the soil.] (When it freezes) {it expands, and-in-so-doing tries to push-asunder the walls} (between which it is confined.) ^ 2. { Hence arise some curious and interesting effects of frost upon the ground.} {After a frosty night the sujall stones upon a rofid or footpath may often be seen to have been partly pushed out of their beds } (as the ground ;) { thus the surface of the road is covered with a layer of fine mud. } { The frost separates the grain of sand and clay by freezing the moisture between them} (so-that (when the frozen moisture melts) {the particles of soil no longer adhere to each-other but seem} (as-if they had been pounded down in a mortar.))* ^ l.=2C«2P2 . +P3C'C% . P^ GT^ 0"?, . 2C\ P5 5 Rv If 2.=C«2 . P4 2 C% ; +P2 . P5 C (2 C'^ P^ 2 G*^ )'• Ex. 2. ^ 1. {A carpenter could not (as we say) make a chair} (unless he knew something of the properties and power of wood,) 244 STTLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. { a blacksmith could not make a horse-shoe } (unless he knew) (that it is a property of iron to become soft and easily hammered into shape) (when it is made red-hut.) { A brickmaker must know many of the properties of clay, and a plumber could not do his work } (unless he knew) (that lead has the properties of softness and flexibility) and (that a moderate heat causes it to melt.) ^ 2. (So-that the practice of every art implies a certain know- ledge of natural causes and effects,) and (the improvement of the arts depends upon our learning more and more of the proper- ties and powers of natural objects, and discovering how to turn the properties and the powers of things and the connections of cause and effect among them to our own advantage.) IF l. = P3 (C,) 2C«3 , P3 2C'2 2C^ 4C3«.. P3, +P3 2C'2 2C2.3 + 2C2v ^ 2.=C'3 + CV Remarks : — In the two preceding examples the integral sub- ordinate conjunctions "hence" and "eo-that" construct para-com- plexes by forming combinations with their paras respectively. Ex. 3. ^ 1. \In other words, the dimensions of the Earth (large as it is ) are simply imperceptible when compared with the vast distance | ( which separates the Stars from the Earth.) ^ 2. {If then the Stars were so immensely distant and of such enormous size,) (as they were thus shown to be,) | (to suppose that they could nevertheless revolve round the Earth in 24 hours)^ is rationally inconceivable. } { To the theological type of- mind this difficulty of conception was of course as nothing, } but {to the scientific type of mind the difficulty is insuperable } ( for, science, cbeing based on the conviction of the uniformity of nature, S views the heavenly bodies and their movements notas- without but-as- within the pale of analogy and experience, and regards Astronomy not-as a mystery but- as a science of cause and effect.) LECTDRE XIII. 245 ^3. (When therefore about the year 1537 Copernicus pro- pounded his geometrical conception) fbased upon the supposition of the Earth's double motion, j f its rotation on its axis, S and C|its translation through space in an orbit round the Sun, S { a rationally conceivable account was given of every motion } ( that the Heavens presented to the Astronomer, ) (\n account showing^ (that they could all intelligibly cohere without con- tradicting each-other and without any violation of the nature of things) (as concluded from iiuman experience.) { It was indeed, though not altogether original, a marvelous conception- for Copernicus neither did nor could in the then state of science) explain the mechanical origin of the movements (he supposed,) or assign them any dependence on physical causes.) {That, hoic- ever, was subsequently done,} (as we shall presently see,) Cwhen glancing at the discoveries of Kepler, of Galileo, and of Newton.p If 2.=C-, (C%) P, . P3 + P. C«3 ^4.)>, 1[3. = C'3(;PV;),C;33^+(^:3333^ P,f R*3(;N|PV(4C',§R2g;). PsC's t H2^, . + P, (cg (Jpv;). Remarks : — In para 2 the integral subordinate conjunction "^'then" forms the subordination to para 1, and in para 3 the con- junction "therefore" combines this para with para 2, but in both the instances their initial positions have been given to each of the subordinate conjunctions "if" and "when" which form the subordinates in the complexes following. C— Para-compounds. Ex. 1. 1[1. {Scarcity alone, hoivever, would not make a thing valuable} (if there were no reason) (why any one should desire to possess it.) {There are some kinds of stone} (which are scarce 246 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. but of no value)* (because they have neither use nor beauty.)*^* |You would not give anything in exchange for such a stone} [not-becanse you cannot easily get it] [but-because you have no wish for it.] ^ 2. But { a stone ( which is scarce and very beautiful ) may be of great value } (though it is of no use hut to make an ornament for the person.) ^3. And {they desire these things the-more} (because (J besides being beautiful to the eye,S they are reckoned a sign of wealth in the person) (who wears them.) { A bunch of wild flowers will often be a prettier ornament} (than a fine ribbon or a jewel,) (but a woman likes better to wear these last to show) (that she can afford the cost of them) whereas (the wild flowers may be had for picking.) f l.= + P8 2C', 2 C^ . Pg iR'2 C2.J, . P3 CT3 CT^ 1[2.= + P2lR'2 2C^. ^ 3.= +P3 c'C"«8 (Jc 4j) i R2-3 . P3 c'C\ + P6 6C'3+P8. Remarks : — Para 1 is compounded with the preceding one not given here, and does so by "however" transposed but not initially placed. Para 2 is compounded with para 1 by "but" and para 3 compounded with the 2nd by "and". The latter two con- junctions have not shifted from their initial places. Ex. 2. ^ 1. (When the psalm ceased,) } an echo, like a spirits' voice, was heard dyiuir away high up among the magnificent architecture of the cliffs, } and | once more might be noticed in the silence, the reviving voice of the water fail, j ^ 2. Just then \ a large stone fell from the top of the cliff into the pool, 1 1 a loud voice was heard,} and | a plaid hung over on the point of a shepherds' staff.} 1[1.=2C-,P,,+P2. 1[2.=+P,,P,, + P,. LECTURE XI) I. 247 Ex. 3. ^ 1. * * * I From these gentlemen I have received familiar calls, and the most pressing invitations ; } and [ though I wished to accept their offered friendship,] [ I have repeatedly excused myself under-the-pretence-of not being quite settled ;} (for, the truth is,) (that (when I have rode or walked, with full intention to return their several visits,) | my heart has failed me} (as I approached their gates; ) and \1 have frequently returned homeward, \ fresolving to try again to-morrow.j)* ^2. I However, I at length determined to conquer my timidity and three days ago, accepted of an invitation to dine this day with one, | (whose open easy m-inner left me no room to doubt a cordial welcome.) 1[ l.=P3 ; +CT5 C*P3 ; C«2 C (2C«„ P3 2C», ; +?, ^4 6)))* ^2.= + PaRV Ex. 4. ^ 1. I The water then flows over in a stream and falls to the ground, | (where it spreads out and runs to the lowest accessible place, or gradually soaks up into crevices.) ^ 2. Nevertheless, [ although the parts of the water thus loosely slip and slide upon one another,] [yet they hold together to a certain extent.] 1[2.= +CT2 C'T^. Ex. 5. ^ 1. {We have now seen j (what a wonderful change is brought about by heating water.) At first, { it expands gradually and slightly, \ but (when it reaches the boiling point,) {it suddenly expands enormously, and is no longer a liquid, but a gas. } ^2. On the other hand, (if warm water is allowed to cool,) { it gradually contracts } (till it reaches the ordinary temperature of the air in mild weather ; ) but (if the weather is very cold,) or ( if the water is cooled artificially, ) { it goes on contracting ■248 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. •only down to a certain temperature (39^^), and then begins to expand again. | 5[1.=P2 R«2 . + P2 + 2G*3,P3. 1[ 2. = +2C% P2 2C»3 ; + 2C«2 + 2C»^ P,. Ex. 6. ^ 1. |The emotions (I felt on the receipt-of this letter)* can only be conceived by those} (who, in the midst of despairing love, have beheld a gleam of hope.)' { The tumult of my heart hurried me to the place appointed, long before the time ; } { I walked backward and forward in the utmost confusion totally regardless of every object about me : } ^sometimes raising my hands and eyes in the sudden effusions of transport, and some- times smiling with the complacency of delight. j ^2. At length { the day departed, ] and { Zara came, } { my heart bounded at her sight : } |I, was unable to speak, and threw myself at her feet. | ^ l.=P2 1R»3 f R»3 . P3 ; P2 : (who had so high an opinion of his fidelity.)* LECTURE XI II. 24& ^ 2. {After the death of the king, however, the enemies of Mohammed endeavoured to effect his ruin with Shah Sefi, the successor, } (who, (Jbeing a young man,S was more easily- persuaded.) |They represented to the king,| (that (as Mohammed had built at his own expense several Caravanseras and a magni- ficent palace,)* { he could not have done so without employing some of the public money. } )* ^ l.=P, . P, o'G\ . P3 o'G\ f R^ . P3 C% . P3 1R'3+P4 -I R'3 • f 2.= +P,*R-2.P2 20(0*3 P,)«. Remarks :— Of the five sentences in Para 1, the first is a simple sentence, the 2nd is a Complex by co-ordinate subordina- tion, the 3rd is the same with Bi-subordination, the 4th is a Complex by 0*, and the last is a Compound of Complexes with R« subordination. la Para 2, the first sentence is a Complex by R* subordination, while the 2nd is a Complex by substitutive Complex. " However" connects the last sentence of Para 1 to Para 2. Criticism : — The author has given here six varieties of struc- tures which are distinct in each case \ but he has shown twice^ fondness for co-ordinate subordinates which follow one another very rarely. LECTURE XIV. Students akd Gentlemen, I have shown to you in the preceding lectures that the maximum mono- simple sentence in its full stretch' consists of 9 chief terms, 5 of which are Ns and 4 of which are Vs, and that they alternate with eacli other except in the case of N, which inay sometimes be absent. The same extent ani alternate arrangement of Ns and Vs hold good in other struvtures too, the different Subordinates, Sub-subordinates, and the Co-ordinates. We have seen Proxy Part of Speech the PP, as chief term some- what distantly placed within the period, or actually distant beyond the period from the N to which it is a proxy. We have seen the proximate proxy part of speech the Relative Pronoun, proxy to N or PP, which goes to place itself at the head of the subordinate Relative structure as a chief term or as a joiner to its N or V terms within the period of the principal structure, though the period may also terminate it. We have seen this approximation of the antecedent and the Relative, in the instance of a compound Relative, to be riveted words. We have seen compound PPs, the proxy colleagues to Ns or PPs, as chief emphatic terms or joiners within the principal. All these pronouns of the three varieties possess antecedents of reference. We have seen the different joiners as adjuncts to Ns and Vs which may be regarded as clothings or dependents to these chief terms ; while the PA and adjective ante-joiners to N, when Ns are uuderstood, have been considered as N substitutes. We have seen also that IV or PV (not its past) chief terms go to form post-joiners to Ns along with their suite of Government respectively, alone or alternately together. We have seen analogous joiner roll played by the past participle, which may be confiidere*! as post-adjective to Ns and Vs. Past participle with 'have' and 'be' has gone by as principal verb or as chief term. LECIUKE XIV. 251 Like the Relative, as with the other pronouns, the article adjective " the" has been shown to possess its antecedent of re^ ference. The PA by virtue of its pronominal designation has been shown to possess antecedents, while certain adjectives as "same, like, similar, analogous," &c., and certain adverbs such as "thus, so," &c. have been shown to possess also their antecedents of reference. There were shown to exist the three varieties of Government in parsing 1st, between terms and terms, 2nd, of adjective relation between terms and their respective joiners, or in certain instances only between joiners and joiners, and 3rdly of antecedent and Relative relations between terms and terms or between parts of speech and structures. On the other hand, outside the pale of the Mono-simple principal at its extreme positions were seen the absolute parts of speech or terms, the interjections, the case of address nouns and pronouns (the vocatives sometimes subordinated by R* ) and the absolute incomplete N structures. This absolute incomplete structure has been seen also to stand as independent one termi- nated by its own Period. Similarly the absolute IVs and suite have been seen within the Period of the principal or as inde- pendent by its own period termination. The absolute participle structures have been seen to head the Mono-simple, and it must be remembered that the term "absolute" is given to all the above for their want of Government in parsing whether within the principal or whether within their own isolated period termination. We have seen also parenthetic parts of speech, phrases, or structures within the pale of the principal, having no parsing re- lation with it like the "absolutes," or having such relation within its own complete or incomplete structure. Direct-Narrative structures having the Narrative within the pale of the Direct, simulate in appearance the paranthetics, each having its distinct government in parsing, or better that the whole of the Direct, 252 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. may be considered as 3rd term of Government after V, the 2nd ierm of the Narrative. Analogues of 1st term N by certain post-terms and struc- tures as IVs, PVs, C», R*, CT C*P were shown, for we should remember that whatever is governed may on its turn govern also. Transposition of terms or their joiners with or without col- lateral transposition were shown in the Narrative ; while inver- sion of the Ist two terms in the imperative, interrogative, and sometimes in the exchunatory expressions were shown as a rule. In the analogues of post-terms for 1st N, no Transformations of them occured. Transformations however of the ^rd term into the 1st, and of the 1st to a preposition phrase joiner to the 2nd with consequent transposition of them, were shown in the changes of the active to passive expressions and vice versa. In Direct-Narrative structures you have observed the narrative to be almost always a Minimum mono-simple sentence with the 1st and 2nd terms naked or clothed to which the Direct structure viewed as a whole has been regarded as its 3rd term. Transformation of the Direct (Simple, complex, or Co-ordinate) to narrative in continuation of the original Narrative has been shown by conversion of it into a subordinate by introducing the narrative or assertive conjunction " that" at its head, and thus rendering the whole a C* to the narrative P. No changes occured in the Direct structure when the V term of the P was in the present tense and the N term of Direct, a 3rd person N or PP. However, when the V term of th« P was present or past and the N term a pronoun of the first person, the change of this pronoun to 3rd person and the \ of the Direct to past were seen. Besides these person and tense changes, pronominal possessive joiners of the first person changes to those of the 3rd. When the 2nd term of the original narrative is post-joined by a pronominal preposition phrase of the 1st person, the 2nd person pronominal term of the Direct changes to that of the 1st person pronoun LECTDKE XIV. 25B with Uie changes of the Direct V of the present into that of the 2)ast and tlie original Narrative V into a different but adequate V of the past. In the case of the post- joined preposition phrase of the 2nd person, the 2nd person pronoun of Direct does not change, though the V of Direct will change from the present into the past with adequate narrative V change. In the case of the post- joined preposition phrase of the 3rd person noun or pionoun, the 2nd person pronominal term of the Direct changes into that of the 1st with its usual V changed into pnst, and the narrative V changes adequately. We see that the above were good for the narrative or assertive as well as for the in- terrogative expressions of the Direct. When again, an imper- ative Direct follows the preposition phrase joiner to the uarative V, the Imperative 2nd V is changed into IV 4th term in case of the 3rd person phrase, but in case of the Ist person phrase, the pronominal 3rd term of the 1st person changes into the 3i-d, and the pronoun possessive joiner of the 3rd into that of the 1st. In the exclainatory variety of Direct speech, the same word and tenge changes of the PP or PA joiner with tense change of V in the Direct were visible, but in the optative, you have seen at times another way of doing so by changing the Direct 1st term into the narrative 3rd term and the Direct 2nd into narrative 4tli. Transpositions of joiners and transformations of structures had also been sliown in equations. We have seen Conjunctions (one of the Connective Parts of speech) as Mono-groupal or Bi-groupal (co-ordinates) in the Mono-simples called for the sake of distinction "Minor Conjs." We have spoken of subordinate conjunctions as Fractional, Integral, and Co-ordinate subordinate heading such so-called structures. We have seen also the co-ordinate conjunctions to head the principals in the Co-ordinate structures. We have seen also the position and functions of compound conjunction (for compound structure as distinct is a myth) placing between and connecting words, phrases, analogous words and phrases in 18 254 STYLCGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. the mono-simple, and placing between and connectiDg mono- simples, mono-subordinates, complexes and each or both of the Co-ordinates or between each other of ail these. Compound conjunctions have thus been shown as typical or general, for they concerned themselves with words or terms, phrases, or adjuncts, and all structures. The whole class of conjupctions in fact from its pure variety to those borrowed from other parts of ?peech as the prepositions, adverbs single or co-ordinate, prepo- sition phrases single or co-ordiuate, and from the definite article adjective "the" with comparative adjectives as co-ordinates have been narrated. The Article "the" also was shown to form with certain PAs co-ordinate terms of N as in instances of "the former — the latter," "the one — the other," and hence they may be reckoned in all these cases as co-ordinate connectives. Co-ordi- nates without connectives, like Co-ordinate Relative Subordinate were found also iu the Pronominal Adjective class alone, as in "this"— "that," " some— others". Having thus cursorily shown to you, in a retrospective view all the parts of speech, phrases, and structures together with their transpositions wi)ere feasible, and the connectives as pure and derivative under the head of conjunctions, it renifiins now for me to point out to you what else amongst the parts of speech may be reckoned as connectives in their further dealiugt^, though such dealings have not been generally accepted as connective ones. I mean to allude to the connective ability of 2)refOsitions bearing analogy to conjunctions iu their various htretches by variety of connective powers. I go now therefore to illustrate to you this analogy, and hope to be understood. Analogy between Conjunctions and Prepositions as Connectives. I,— As REGAUDS Ns. (SYMMETRICAL.) (a)— Mono- Groupul. N Conj. N N Prep. N Maa cr beast. Parts of speech LECTURE XIV. 25$ (b)—Bi-groupal (co-ordinates.) Conj. N Conj. N Isfeither poverty nor riches. Prep. N Prep. N From youth to age. II.— As RKGARDS Vs, IVs, AND PVS. (SYMMETRICAL.) {a)— Mono- Groupal. V C. V V P. V Sees and loves. Loves to gee {h)—Bi-Groupal. C. V C. V P. V P. V Either likes or dislikes. In going to see. III. — Conj. between dissimilars. {Vide Lecture IV.) IV. — Prep, between dissimilars. 2. 5. 4. 6. V. p. PV. Adj. P. N. Used in constructing 7. Weak in intellect V. P. N. Adj. P. IV. Remained in darkness 8. Anxious to ^0 IV. P. N. Adj. P. PV. (To) go to club 9. Afraid of getting PV. P. N. Adv. p. N. _ Shining throi igh window 10, Constantly in pursuit N. P. PV. Adj. P. N. Delight in doing 11. Bent upon mischief N. P. IV. Desire to govern Having thus shown to you the connective powers of prepo- sitions with relation though otherwise than that of conjunctions, I go now to point out to you the diLal connection of preposition XJhrases and prepositions, of preposition phrases and conjunc- tions, of conjunctions and preposition phrases, and of conjunctions and adverbs. ^6 8TTL0QRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Analogy of dual connection of preposition, conjunction: and adverl) as connective. Prep. 1 . From Prep, among 1. P. Phrase. In order With the purpose With the object Conj. 1. As P. PhrsLse. At the time to of of Conj. if Conj. that Prep. 1. In 2. In Adv. 1. Just 'Z. Only Conj. that !-much-as Conj. as-much-as when Prep. P.rep, 2. Up ta P. Phrase. P. 2. With a view to 4. For the sake of 6. In the event of Conj. Conj.. 2. And yet P. Phrase. Cony, 2. At the moment that Adv. Prep. 1. Partly through 2. Long before Advs Adv. 1. So often 2. Very politely Conj. ' And Atlast If Nevertheless That Prep. Phrase. at the same time by the advice of (his physicians) for instance in such cases, as in all others for the shake of (our fellow-creatures^ as well as for (ourselves). Conj.. 1. And 2. And Conj. 1, As • 2. Because Adv. chiefly so far Prep. to of Conj. Mixed. 1. And the more so, because 2. And even when 3. If at all possible 4. And in a cuuch too The ajffiniti/ of A dverhs and Preposition phrases to Conjunc- tions is so much that they leave their proper seats very often and fzo close to them by transposition^ hence they are as connective* like conjunctions though not exactly so in sense. LECTURE XV. ^Students and Gentlemen, We have seen in some of the preceding lectures, that trans- positions of different joiners and chief terms, as well as their -certain Transformations with attendant transpositions, do occur in the mono-simples. I have shown to you also that sentence structure as the Direct of the Narrative-direct gets transformed and even sometimes transposed in continuation of the Narrative «s C* subordinate, and thus forms complex structure out of the Narrative-direct. We go now presently to show to you the mono-simples and the absolutes where they can transform themselves into complex, co-ordinate, or compound structures ^nd vice versa. A.— Transformation of N Analogues in P. 1. — IV Analogue op N changed into C*. 1. {{To he always attentively observing what is passing around them)^ is one of the means } (by which men improve their circumstances.)=P3 § R'g 1. \{That men should be always attentively observing what is passing around them)^ is one of the means } (by which they Improve their circumstances.) = P3 § R»3 2. — PV Analogue of N changed into C*. 1. {His being in town)^ is certain. = P2 1. {That he is in town)^ is certain. = Pj 3. — C» Analogue of N changed into N. 1. {Whether he has arrived)^ is not known. = P2 1 . His arriva Z i s n ot k n o wn . = Pg 4. — IV Analogue of N changed into N. 2. {To extend human happiness)^ is the aim of the pliilaa' thropi8t. = P3 2. TAe eaj^enstow o/ human happiness is &c.=Pj 258 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5. — PV Analoqde of N changed into N. 3. (His heing ruinedy was the cause of his death.=P, 3. His ruin was the cause &c.=P3 B. — Transformation of several simple Ps into a P. 1. — Ps Changed into a P with compound Vs. I. {Honest Jack adhered to his resolution notwithstanding^ the jeers of his companions. ] \ He ceased to go to taverns. \ \ He spent all his earnings on the things necessary for the comfort of his home. }=P2 . P^ . Pg 1. { Notwithstanding the jeers of his companions, Honest Jack adhered to his resolution, ceased to go to taverns, and spent all his earnings on the things necessary for the comfort of his^ home.JssP^ 2. {He caught the infection probably from her, and became one of its victims. } | He was hurried in the neighbourhood of Cherson} (where some years after, the Emperor Alexander caused a monument to be erected to his memory.) =Pj . Pg f R\ 2. {He caught the infection probably from her, became one- of its victims, and was buried &c.|=P3 § R*^ 2. — P With compound Vs resolved into distinct Ps. 1. I Young men should train themselves to marshal their ideas in good order, and keep a firm grip of them without the- help of paper. }=P5 1. {Young men should &c., to marshal their ideas in good order. } { They should keep a firm grip of them &c.}=P5 . Pg 2. { The same bee, for example, markets and bakes bee- bread, and manufactures sugar, and makes wax, and builds store- house, and plans apartments, and nurses the royal infants, and waits upon the queen, and apprehends thieves, and smites to the- death the enemies of the amazons. }=Pt LECTURE XV. 259 2. } Tlie same be^, for example, markets, bakes bee-bread, and manufactures siifjar. | \She makes wax, builds store-houses, and plans appartments. | | She nurses the royal infants, and waits upon the queen. } | And lastly, she apprehends thieves, and smites to the death the enemies of the amazons.} = P3.P3.P3.4-P5 C— Transformation of complex into complex and P. 1.— PR* Changed into distinct PR« and P. 1. {Jack Simpkin, a sailor who worked in the dock-yards at Portsmouth, v-as at one time much driven to drinking. }=P2 1 K*^ 1. I Jack Simpkin loas a sailor \ (who worked in &c ) I He was at one time much given to drinking,| = P3 3 R*2 .V^. D.-TRANSFORMATION OF A SIMPLE INTO COMPLEX STRUCTURE. {By change of Adj., Adv., Prep, ph., /T, and PV Joiners to N or V, and of terms.) I— P changed into P R* and Vice Versa. 1. — PV JoiNRR TO N CHANGED INTO P*. 1. The city wa^s managed for sometime by a set of men- elected by the people. = P2. 1. {The city was managed for some time by a set of men} {v;Jto were elected by the people.) = P2 ^ R»2 2. The generous merchant put young Adorno into a vessel- hound, ior Italy. = P3 2 {The generou? merchant put young Adorno into a vessel} {which was bound for Italy.)P3 | R'g 3. The 8h\p - CO nt lining their sons had foiinderd at sea. ^Pg 3. {The ship (that contained their sons) had foundered at sea.j=P2 1R% 4. The only persm-t- composing the funeral company were four poor-looking old men.=P3 230 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 4. {The only persons {that composed the funeral company) were four poor-lookiu"^ old men.|=P3 ]R\ lu the above examples PV post-joiner of N changed into R». 1. — R* Changed into PV joiner to N. 1. {The next faculty of the mind (that demands special culture) is memory.}=P3 1 R'g 1. The next faculty of the mind- demanding special culture is memory. = P3 2. |Accomplished speaking, like marching or dancing is an art,| {for the exercise of which in many cases a special training is necessary. )=:V.^ 3 R'g 2. Accomplished speaking, like marching or dancing is an art- necessitating in many cases a special training for its exercise. = Fq In these examples R* changed into PV post-joiner of N. 2.— IV Joiner to N changed into R«. 1. The det-ign- to honour Mr. Howard in this way was afterwards abandoned. = Pjj 1. { The design (which was to honour Mr, Howard in this way) was afterwards abandoned. }=P3 1 R*5 2. — R» Changed into IV joiner to N. 1. |Tlie first lesson {that a young man has to learn') is not to find fault but to perceive beauties.}=P5 IR'j 1. The first lesson- to he learnt by a young man is not &c. In this example R* active changed into PV piissive joiner to N. 3. — IV Term changed into R*. 2. A small quantity was brought to allay the thirst of Sir Philip.=P5 2. jA small quantity was brought} {^whichwas to allay the thirst of Sir Philip.)=P 1 R'j LECTURE XV. ^1 4. — Apposition N changed into R* and vice versa. 1. { Mr. Holt (who wai a man of good sense and consider- cible benevolence) resolved to try | (if he could manage the men by some better means than the fear of the lash.) = P4 1 R*, 4 0% 1. I Mr. Holt, a man of good sense &c.}=P4 4 C*3. 2. This rule, the source of all our troubles, is much dis- liked. =P2 2. iTliis rule (which is the source of &c.,) is &c.|=P2 1R'» 5. — Advehb joiner to V changed into R*. 5. The brook murmured pZ(Sasa7i%.=P2. 5. {The brook murmured in-a-manner] | that was pleasant.\ ^P^fRv 6. — Prep. ph. joiner to V changed into R». 1. Country gentlemen would not vote for so large and so expensive an ariiiy. = P2 1. j Country gentlemen would not vote for . an army } (which is 80 large and so expensive.) = P2 § R*2 7. — Prep. ph. joiner to N changed into R*. 1. A boy with a large head is generally intelligent. =P2 1. {A boy (who has a large head) is &c.}=P2 IR*, II.— P changed into PC* and Vice Versa. 1. — Adjective joiner to V changed into C». 3. He arrived safe.—V^ 3. { He was safe} [when he arrived. ) = P2 2C*2 2. — Pkkp. ph. joiner to V changed into C*. 5. I A constant formation of the mould is always going on hy the crumbling of the surface of the land.| = P3 5. {As the crumbling of the surface of the land is always going on) [there is a constant forina^on of the mould.|=2C*2 Pg 5. I A constant formation of the mould is always going on| {as the surface of the land crumbles down.)'^!'^ C'^ 262 8TYL0GRAPHY CF ENGLISH LANGUAGR. 2. — C» Changed into Prep. Ph. joiner to V. 1. {The man diedf {before the doctor arrive 1.) = ?, 2 C»2 1. {The man died before the arrival of the doctor.j = P2 2. {I walked} (after the moon rose.)=P2 '2 C*^ 2. |I walked after the rising of the moon (moon-rise). |=Pjj 3. {This fellow will be a cripple} (till he dies). = P3 2 C*„ 3. {This fellow will be a cripple till his death.\=?^ 4. {I have been very liappy} (since you arrii7e(L) = ?^ 2 C'^ 4. {[ have been very iiappy since your arrwaZ. }=P2 2. — PV JoiNKR TO IV CHANGKD INTO C. 1. { We should always be anxiom* to avoid provoking the rebel spirit of the will in those } (who are entrusted to our guidance.) = P- | R% 1. {We should always be anxious to avoid} (that we do not provoke the &c.) = P^ 4 C'g ^ R^'^ 3.— 3rd Tkrm changf-d into C*. 1. They found the Act no longer tying, but actually fitrangling them. = P3 1. { They found } (that the Act was no longer tying &c.) = P2 '^ C*3 4. — PV Term changed into C*. 1. \Tn promoting the welfare of others we must toil.}=P5. 1. {We must toil} (that 7ve might promote the welfare of others.) = P, 2C%. 2. I am certain of giving yon satisfaction. = P3 2. {I am certain } (that I shall give yon &c.) = P2 2C*3 4. — C« Changed into PV term. 1. { This applies more particularly } (whe?! the advice is wanted for some matter) (which is not of a temporary nattire.) = P2 2C'2§R2.2. 1. {This applies more particularly when wnnfing the advice for some matter} (which is not of a temporary nature.) LECTOR K XV. 26^ 2. {If y^e, are mdustrious)\we sliall never 8tarve.}=2C»2 P^ 2. {We shall never starve by being indu8iriou8.\ = F^ 5.~IV Term changed into C*. 1. I He deemed it best to conform in some measure to the superstitions of his fellow-citizens and to conceal his real opinion.} 1. { He deemed it best { (that he might conform in some measure to the superstitions &c.) = P3 2 C'g . 2. { It would be nearer the truth to say ] (that few people- are in-the-habit-of employing their imagination in the service- of charity. ) = P, 4 C%. 2. j It would be nearer the truth } {u)hen we say) (that few«S:c.) = P2 2C'2 2C2»5. 3. j I do not mean to suggest \ (that truth and right ar^ always to be found in middle courses.) = P^ 4 C*^ . 3. I I do not mean | ( that I suggest ) ( that truth and> right &c.)=P2 2C«2 2 C^'^ . 5. — C* Changed into IV term. 1. I We may remember | {that sorrow is at once the lot^ the trial, and the privileu;e of man.) = P2 2 C*j. 1. I We may remember sorrow to be at once the lot, the trial, and privilege of man.| = P5. 2. I The French accordingly took that without suspecting ^- {that he had any larger sum in his possession.) = P4 4 C'g . 2. I The French accordingly took that without suspecting him to have any larger sum in his possession.) =Py . Remarks : — IV after active V as a rule is transformable into C*. IV after passive V is almost generally not transformable into C* unless the passive expression is rendered into an active. IV immediately after *be' and 'have' is not generally trans- formable into C* when the IV is cheif in its sense or gerundial,. and the 'be' and 'have' are like auxiliaries in the combination. Grammarians admit the auxiliary character of 'have' and 'be^ when they are followed by present and past participles of the chief verbs, but this auxiliary character is disowned when the IV follows them. 264 STYLOQRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Illustrations. Am loving Have (Present part: wanting) Am loved Have loved Am to love Have to love Was to he loved Had to he loved That the IVs are chief verbs in these instances cannot be <3enied as they can by no means be transformed into a subordinate 0». IV after certain immediate neuter V cannot be transformed into a C* owing to its Gerundial and inseparable character. C* is not transformable into IV when its tenses are all potential as also indicative future and future perfect. As IVs and PVs have no future and potential tenses, while the R* and C* have (except for "may" and "might"), such trans- formations between them and each other are not allowed in the language. Joifiers as well as governed terms and governed suhor- dinate structures are therefore analogues^ and where their trans- formations are admissible they show forth slight or na anodification in their sense. For examples : — 1. He loves P,2C-^ LECTURE XV. 26T 1. (//■ we reflect upon this decay and renewing of soil) I we perceive } (tliat &c.) = C*.^ P2 2 C»^ 2. (^Sitting on the river side,S 1 1 saw a boat-passing by.} = P3. 2 {As I sat on the river side,) |I saw a boat-passing by.| = C^P3. 3. (^Hearing ihh^ {\\Q advanced.}=(:JPV|Nj)P2. 3. {As he heard this,) |he advanced. }=C*3 Pg. 3.— C» Changed into PV absolute. 1. {When you Aave a;-n<;e6? at your decision) |you have to consider} (how you shall convey it.) = 4C*2 P4 4C-3 1. (^Having arrived at your decision j {you have to con- sider} (how you shall convey it.) = c' PV S P4 4C*3 Keniarks : — C* in instances with Indicative Future and Pot. as said before are not transforn)able. 4. — PV Absolute changed into c' C"». 1. C At length see^/^^ the other rat eat so heartily, j | she rushed forward, seized a piece, and immediately retreated. } = <456)P3 1. [At length she saio the other rat eat so heartily } {that she rushed forward &c.) = 'P^ c'C'g 5.— (JPV+N I PVS United to P changed into P+PC«. 1. (^Clogged in his winiis, enfeebled in his legs, and his whole frame totally enervated.^ | he was but just able to bid his friends adieu and to lament with his latest breath | (that [though a taste of pleasure may quicken the relish of life,] [ an unres- trained indulgence brings inevitable destruction. ] = (;4,4,+ 14^P,2C(CT3C'T3)* 1. [He vms clogged in his wings, enfeebled in his legs,} and |his whole //•a?«e loas totally enervated ^\ {so that he was but &c.) = P, + P. C%2C(C'P3C^P,)« 268 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. P.— Transformation of Complex into Co-ordinate or Compound and Vice Versa. 1.— P Complex changed into CT CT or P+P. 1. (// the repast was homely) {the welcome was hearty.} = C*, P, 1. [TJiough the repast was homely] [yet the welcome was hearty.] =C'P2 C'Tj 1. I The repast was homely, | but {the welcome was hearty.}- 2. — Di-siMPLE C'P C"P changed into Complex. 1. Thus [the sea [though it hears no harvest on its bosom] yet sustains all the harvests of the world and makes all thd wilderness of the earth to bud and blossom as the rose.] = +C'T,4C«2 CT3 1. Thus {the sea (vjhich bead's no harvest on its bosom) sus- tains all &c.}= + P, 1 R«3 4C«2 3 — Di-siMPLE CT CT changed into compound P+P. 1. [[Though Isaac Newton was wiser} (than most otlier men)] [{ yet he said } (a-little-before he died) (that all his know- ledge was as nothing-when compaired with (what) he had yet to learn.)] =CT2 c' C\ C'Tj 2 C«2 2 C»3 § R2*^ 1. {Isaac Newton was wiser than most other men,} and yet [he said} (a-little-before he died) (that all his knowledge &c.) 2. [Thouffhthe magnificent romance of the sack of Rome he not fact] [yet it is certainly history and well worthy of note and r<'membrance as one of the finest extant traditions of a whole chain of Golden Deeds.] =CT3 CT3 2, {The magnificent romance of the sack of Rome may not be a fact} but {it is certainly history &c.} = Pg-fP, LECTURE XV. 2Q9 4.--COMPODND CHANGKD INTO COMPLEX. 1. {Speak the truth,} and {you need no fear.|=P3 + P3. 1. {If you speak the truth,) {you need have no fear.|=C*P5. G.— Mutual Transformation of all structures. 1. { It is necessary in reading verse to trust a great deal to car, I but { we must be careful not to do so to the detriment of the sense.} =P5 + ^5- {Compound.) 1. [Though it is necessary &c.,] [yet we must be careful &c.] = CT5 C'T- (Co-ordinate,) 1. jit is 7iot only necessary in reading verse to trust &c.,} {but we must be careful &c.) = P5 c'C"*5 (c' C"* Complex.') 1. {As it is necessary in reading verse to trust a great deal to ear,) { we must be careful &c.}=C*5 P5 (C» Complex.') 1. {To trust a good deal to ear is necessary in reading verse} (in which we must be careful &c.) = P2 R's (R' Complex.) 1. In reading verse we must necesariiy trust a great deal to ear, and be careful not to do so &c.=P5 {Simple) 1. {In reading verse we must trust &c. to ear,} T taking care not to do so &c,S = Pg (^4 5 6 tS {Simple with Absolute.) 2. { John is strong} but {he is sickly.} Pg +^2 2. [Though John is strong,] [yet he is sickly.] =C'P2 C'Pj 2. {John (who is strong) is yet sikly.}=P2 1R*2 2. {John is sickly} {though he is strong.) =P2 2C*2 2. \8uch a strong man {as John)' is sickly. } = c' Pg 0""-^ 2. John is strong but sickly. = P2 2. Being a strong man, John is yet 8ickly. = c4 5S Pj Having thus shown to you the feasible Transformations so far as above, let us now enter into more complicated structures., and try to transform them into less complicated but increased or distinct ones. H.— Transformation of more complicated into less complicated structures. 1. {The moral nature like every thing else {if it is to grow into any sort of excellence) demands a special culture ;} and {as our passions by their very nature like the winds are not easy o£ 19 270 STYLOQRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. control) and (our actions are the outcome of our passions) {i follows,} {that moral excellence will in no case be an easy affair and in its highest grades will be the most arduous, and as such the most noble achievement of a thoroughly accomplished humanity.)=P3 C*4+2C«2+2C«3 Pg 20*3 1. {The moral nature like every thing else in-order-to grow into any sort of excellence demands a special culture. J |Our passions by their very nature like the winds are not easy of con- trol} and |our actions are the outcome of onr passions.} \Moral excellence therefore will in no case be an easy affair, and in its highest grades will be the most arduous and hence the most noble achievement of a thoroughly accomplished humanity. } = P3 . P2 + P3 . C«3 2. |lt was an easy thing for Lord Byron to be a great poet ;} ^it was merely indulging his nature,} |he was an eagle and must ^y ;} but {(to have curbed his wilful humour, soothed his fretful discontent and learned to behave like a reasonable being and a gentleman)^ that was a difficult matter} (which he does not seem even seriously to have attempted.) =P5; P3;P3; -^^z^^\ 2. {It was an easy thing for Lord Byron to be a great poet} (for it was merely induli^ing his nature.) {He was an eagle and must fly.} But {(to have curbed his wilful humour, soothed his fretful discontent and learned to behave like a resonable being and a gentlemen)^ wis a difficult matter never seemingly been attempted even seriously by him.]=F^ C*^ . P3 . +P3 3. {Another flaring beacon of the rock (on which great wits are of ten wrecked ior want of a little kindly culture of unsel- fishness) is Walter Savage Lander, the most finished master of style perhaps} (that ever used the English tongue ;) but {a person at the same time so imperiously wilful and so majestically cross- grained} ( 3 £ 03 s -2 o M >• o S 03 > DO CO t3 ■5 U a- d ••-' « p 1 O o a 03 ■A ^ <^ So O < 1 i 'o 1^ 1^ 1— 1 C5 o o i 03 a o r-» O s o O 03 >* '03 Ph CD o3 O „ CU CD = § Q. 03 OQ ^ 03 o ;> OS e Q O OS 8 a eS o 'o .2 a a cu H O Ph 2§ '-+3 '35 03 1— 1 o o ca 3 cS -a cm a cincq m ow Ph S • OQ W u ■z >> b ^ a o >> 3 .2 b 1 ^ 2 0= S o 2 13 o '5 03 g >» be S.2 Is .9 a >> CQ S'3 o 9 -2 -2 o "o >i 03 '5 1 -£3 03 o6Hg i R's < N > i C, c;^> dN)) i R'2 . How to describe a Plant. Description of a flower . Orchis. — ("Flower irregular.S (JPerianth irregular, of 6 very unequal pieces. j ([Stamens, confined with the style.^ C Pistil of 3 carpels confitned into 1-celled ovary, j =(JnJ) . (JnJ) . (Jn I pvj) . (Jn I pvj) 276 STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGQAGS. Description of a fruit. Mulberry. — r A head of fruit8,S (Teach conBisting- of a dry l-seeded little indehiscent nut- inclosed in four juicy perianth pieces. J— J^. D. Hooker. {Vide also Roxburgh's Flora indica.) B.— Zoolgy. Natural system of classification. l7ifusoria. Diagnosis. — c Protozoa with a definite form and provided with an external membrane, bearing either flugella or cilia.S (TMouth and anus usually, contractile vacuole and one or more nuclei alvvavs present.S = Cj N I PV I nJ) . c| N + N I N + NJ) Sci/2yhomfidusce. Diagnosis. — (^Medusae of considerable size, with gastric filaments.S cThe edge of the umberella lobed.S (jThe sense organs covered.! jThe embryonic stages are not hydroid stocks but scyphistoma and strobila forms.} =^N)) • (Jn I pv^) • c;n I PV)) . p, Xiphoiura. Diagnosis. — (^Gigantostracaj (whose body is divided into three parts, )*(which are movably articulated together ;)2* ra large shield-shaped cephalo-thorax, j Can abdomen with five pairs of lamellar feet and a long movable caudal spine.S = c; N ;) 1 R'a R«2 ; , (;n>. A steroidea. Diagnosis.— (^EchmoihnuB with dorso-ventrally compressed pentagonal or star-shaped body.S (jThe ambulacral feet are confined to the ventral surface. S (T Internal skaletal pieces in the ambulacra articulated together like vertebrae.S — Claui- sedgwick. =(^n;) . p^ . LECTURB XVI.i 277 C— Experimental Physics. Experiment. — (JTo prove osmose.S { take two glass jars, one larger than the other ;} {put into the larger one a certain quantity ot* water, and into the other water (to which sugar and some soluble colouring matter have been added.) |Tie a ^ piece of parchment over the smaller one, and then invert it into the larger one, as shown in the figure.} {After a few hours, on removing the smaller jar the water in the larger one will be seen to be coloured, and also to be less than before,} ■whereas ]the fluid in the smaller one will be found to be lighter in colour and increased in volume.} Thus {we see that osmose has taken place.} = It may be obtained by the following process : — =P2 LECTURE XVI. Take of = P3 Santonica, bruised Slaked Lime Hydrochlor : Acid Sol : of Amrnon : Rect : spirit Purified : Anim : Charcoal Dist : water 1 pound 7 ounces a sufficiency a quarter ounce 14 f : ounces 60 grains a sufficiency. 219 Boil the santonica with a gallon of the water and 5 ounces of the lime in a copper or tinned iron vessel for an hour, strain through a stout cloth, and express strongly. Mix the residue with half a gallon of the water and the rest of the lime, boil- for half an hour, strain and express as before. Mix the strained liquors, let them settle, decant the fluid from tlie deposit, and evaporate to the bulk ot: 2 pints and a half. To the liquor while hot, add, with diligent stirring, tlie hydrochloric acid until the fluid has become slightly and permanently acid, and set it aside for 5 days that the precipitate may subside. =P3, P2+P2. P.-,, P2. P2 . P3, P4, P8+P2 . P3 2C*„ +P3 2C'2. Remove, by skimming, any oily matter which floats on the- surface, and carefully decant the greater part of the fluid from the precipitate. Collect this on a paper filter, wash it first with cold dis- tilled water (till the washings pass colourless and nearly free from acid reaction) , then with the solution of aminouia previ- ously diluted with 5 fluid ounces of the water, and lastly with cold distilled water (till the washings pass colourless.) Press the filter containing the precipitate between the folds of filtering paper, and dry it in a warm place. Scrape the dry precipitate from the filter, and mix it with the animal charcoal. Add to the mixture 9 ounces of the rectified spirit, digest for half an hour, and boil for 10 minutes. Filter while hot, wash the charcoal with an ounce of boil- ing spirit, and set the filtrate aside for 2 days in a cool dark place to crystallise. Separate the mother liquor from the crystals, and concen- trate to obtain a further product. Collect the crystals, let them drain, redissolve them in 4 ounces of boiling spirit, and let the solution crystallise aa^ before. "280 STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGK. Lastly, dry the crystals on filtering paper in the dark and preserve iheni in u bottle protected frotii light. =P, 3R'2+P3 . Ps , P3 C'2 . P3+P3. P 3+P3 • P3 + P2+K . P2 , P3 + P4 • P3 + P5 . P3 , P4 » P3 + P4 • +P8+P, Remarks : — The language of Pharmacopoeal peparations being directions, 14 out of 16 Sentences termina'ted by Period liave consequently been Imperatives , while of the remaining two, one is absolute and the other an Assertive. In the Ist imperative, the post-joining preposition phrases of V and the 3rd terms have been repeated without the intervention of punctuation or conjunction. Second term Vs have been repeated in the way of compounds from 2 to 4 in all the sen- tences with comma and conjunction (and). The imperative Mono- simples have in some instances been extended to the 4th and 5th terms. Tlieir complexities by R« and G* Subordinates are also visible. Post-joining adverbial repetitions of progressive time Jirsty then, and lastly to V were also visible in one instance with punctuation and conjuction. The last sentence is headed by oonnective "lastly" as conjunction, compounding it with all the previous sentences. There are seen no Absolutes, no Integral subordinates , no com- pounds of Subordinates, no co-ordinate Subordinates, no Sub- subordinate with these Imperatives, nor are Co-ordinate Principals i.e., Di-siuiples seen to make their possible appearance here. v.— Poetry. Rhyme. 1. {*Not I a drum | was*heard | |*not | a funeral note (A*V)} ( As I his corpse | * to the ramparts I we | hurried *; ) {*Not I a soldier | discharged * I his farewell shot *0'er the grave} (where |«our hero | we | hurried*.) — Wolfe. = P„P,Cv P3§RV 2. { Such was the sound, } (when-oft, | * at-eveniug close, * Up yonder hill | the village murmur rose * ; ) { There, (as I passed with careless * steps | * and slow, ) The mingling notes came- softened from below : } { The swain responsive (as the milk-maid sung,) The sober herd (that low'd to meet their young ;) LECTURE XVI. 281 The noisy geese (that gabbled o'er the pool,) The playful children-just let loose from school, The watch-dog's voice, ( that bayed the whispering wind, ) And the loud laugh (that spoke the vacant mind ;) These all | ♦ in sweet confusion | sought * | the shade, And filled each pause } ((R)Hhe nightingale had made.) — Goldsmiths = ?, 2 C«2 ; P^ 2 C, : (N i C% NIK',; N 1 R'^^N, N1R*3+N1R'3;)-P3 3RV Blanh Verse. 1. r Distinguished much by reason, and still more By our capacity of grace divine. From creatures |) (that exist but for our sake,) (Which C having served us, S perish,) |we are held Accountable ;} and | God, some future day, Will reckon with us roundly for the abuse Of (what| he deems (IV) no mean or trivial trust.) (*Superior | as they are ^ ) {they yet depend Not more on human help} {than we (V) on theirs.) |Their strength, or speed, or vigilence, were given In aid of our defects;};} * in some | are found* | Such teachable and apprehensive parts,} {That man's attainments in his own concerns- Matched with the expertness of the brutes in theirs. Are oft times vanquished and thrown far behind.) — Qoviper^ = (;PV> f R«, i R«, c; PV I N > P,+P, I R^. 2. I •* Of man's first disobedience, and the fruit Of that forbidden tree, ( whose mortal taste Brought death into the world, and all our woe. With loss of Eden,)* (till one greater Man Restore us, and regain the blissful seat,)^* I Sing, * } ("heavenly muse,S (that | * on the secret top •282 STYLOQBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 0£ Oreb, or of Sinai, I didst inspire * j That shepherd,)* ( who first taught the chosen seed )'» ( * In the beginning | how | the heavens and Earth R')se * out of chaos.)3» — Milton. =P2 § E-3 2 C'3 (Jn)) 1 R'3 3 R2.^ 2 CS',. Examination Questions on Stylography. 1. Constructor write down from your text-book illustra- tions of naked and clothed N , V, IV , and PV term respectively with Graphic Formula of each. 2. Exemplify from any book a Minimum Mono-simple Sen- tence with Graphic and Rational Formulse, (g. f. and r. f.) 3. Illustrate a Medium Mono-simple by 3 tevms or by 4, in which the 3rd term may or may not be absent , both gra- phically or rationally. 4. Write down from memory or otherwise an example of Maximum Mono-simple with G. F. and R. F. each. 5. How do you differentiate a Narrative from an Emper- ative e?:pression P in the G. F. ; an Interrogative from the Exclamatory also if any? 6. Unite an Interjection Absolute or a Vocative Absolute to any of the Narrative, Imperative, Interrogative, or Exclama- tory Expression P with G. F. and R. F. 7. Give a P with transposed 3rd term to the 1st seat or between 2nd term and its post- joiner in the Mono-simple with G. F. 8. Can you exemplify differentiating a Mono-simple by transposed PV term and its union with a PV Absolute with G.F. and R.F. of each. 9. Illustrate an IV absolute union to a mono-simple with Graphical and Rational formulae. 10. Give illustrations of a mono-simple each with N I PV and N | IV absolute union and their G. F. 11. Exemplify a G* and R* giving G. F. 12. Seek out PR* or PC* mono-subordinate Complex with any number of terms in the P or Subordinate giving their G. F. 13. What difference is there between a Bi-subordinate and a Di-subordinate Complex ? Exemplify. 14. Exemplify with G. and R. formulae a Poly-subordinate Complex. 15. Give an example of a Mono-simple with increase in the 1st, 3rd or any odd t^rm by Ns of Capacity intervened by a *omma-connective with G. and R. formulae. 16. Illustrate mono-simple sentences each with increased LECTURE XVI. 28$ iierms, joiners, or sub-joiners respectively with intervention of Mono-groupal conjunction connectives and punctuative commas if necessary. Give their G. F. and R. F. 17. Give similar illustrations with Bi-groupal or Co-ordinate •connectives with G. F. and R. F. 18. Give example of post- joiner 3 of second term trans- posed to 1st seat with G. F. 19. Illustrate IV I PV or alternate IV | PV Analogues of N in the 1st term of mono-simple with G. F. and R. F. 20. Exemplify N I V inversions into V | N in the 4 varieties of expressions, the Narrative, the Imperative, the interrogative, and the exclamatory with G. F. and R. F. 21. Write down from your book a complex PC* substitutive subordination, a Di-complex with C« P C* substitutive subordina- tion. 22. Exemplify from your book a complex of N absolute subordinated by R», IV or PV absolute by C« either independent or initial to a P. 23. Construct or pick out Illustrations of the following Rational Fromula without restriction of terms in each P C» C^*, P C» R2«. 24. Find out and write Graphically and Rationally a P with Parenthetic C» or R» or P. 25. Construct or write down from your text-book a Di- simple structure with G. F. and R, F. 26. Give a Di-simple P structure with equal or unequal Bubordiuation of each with G. F. and R. F. 27. Depict Graphically and Rationally a Compound oi P structures. 28. Give a Complex in which an R* or C» is compounded, with G. F. and R. F. 29. Construct a sentence in way of synthesis the R. F. of which is P2 2C«3. BO. Form a sentence of which the R. F. is Pg without heed to the joiners of each of the terms. 31. Give example of a riveted PR" with both kinds of F. 32. Find out from your text a compound of G'P C"P by* punctuation or connective with R. fromula of the whole. 33. Construct a sentence with P c' C''* or P c' W as R. F. 34. Produce a compound of Ps, and 2 other structures of compounds of R«, and C* combined with Ps with option of terms in each. 85. Convert an Assertive Direct-Narrative into continued Karrative with Formulae. 36. Wanted an Interrogative, an Imperative Direct- Narra- tive each into continued Narrative conversion with F. of them. 284 STTLOGRAPHT OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 37. Give the Graphic Formulae of the following Quotation Analogues of N, — Ex. 1. "Ask what is unjust", is a good rule where a matt hath strength of favour. Ex. 2. "Be aui^ry, but sin not : let not the sun go down iipon your anger", must be limited and contined, both in rac©^ and time. 38 Give an example of Compound Ahsolute-^ivucinre. 39. How would you turn a Principal with joiner co- ordinates into an elliptical Co-ordinate Principal. 40. Enclose the following within appropriate brackets witb their respective powers where necessary, dividing the terms by perpendicular lines and depicting the transpositions if any by asterisks — "The house fell and great was the fall there ot." 41. Write a letter to your friend on malaria in Avhich there would be 5 sentences onlv with the following structures in thein. P . PC* . PR* . CT C"P . and P+P. 42. Illustrate 3 distinct Ps with as many increase of V terms and transform them into a single P with so many terms compounded. 43. ExempUfy a P with PV or IV Post-joiner to N trans- formed into a PR*. 44. Can you convert a Negative adversative P-fP into C'P CP. 45. What are the distinctive peculiarities of style in Mathematics and Poetry. 46. " When a man is from necessity his own tailor, tent- maker, carpenter, cook, huntsman, and fishernian, it is not proba\)le that he will be expert at any of his callings." — Comment upon the peculiarity ot structure if any and give the G. F. 47. "Ninety-nine tell lies, impose on people, and rob them of their well earned money, is no reason to believe that hundreth is the same".— Give the G. F. of this sentence analogue of^ in P. 48. Turn into continued Narrative the following : — 1. He said, "We cannot be quite happy in this life." 2. He said, "The earth moves round the sun." — Comment upon the pecuharity of tense -change if any. APPENDIX. RECOaNiriON OF WORDS BY CLASSIFICATION. First series or Special Ante-joiners to Nouns. 1. Article Adjectives : — A, an, the. 2. Pronominal Adjectives :^^ (a.) Distributive : — Each, every, either, neither (no+either) several. (b.) Demonstrative : — This, that, yon, yonder, these, those. (c.) Indefinite :--None (no+one) any, one, another (an-f- other), some, such, other. {d.) Definite : — Whole, former, latter, all, both. (e.) Identical : — Same, similar, like. (/.) Interrogative and Relative: — What, which, whichever, whatever. (g.) Numeral Adjectives: — One, two, &c. (cardinal) 1st, 2nd, &c. (ordinal) single, double, &c. (multiplier). Eemarks. — Altogether the number of words in this group is 33. These words do not admit of comparison. 3. Personal pronoun, possessives :— My, mine, thy, thine, his, her, hers, its, our, ours, your, yours, their, theirs. This group has but 14 words. 4. Relative pronoun, possessive : — Whose. .5. Pi-onominal adjective, possessive : — One's, other's, another's. 6. Noun, possessive : — Recognised by suffixial 's, s' or only ('). Remarks. — The total number of words, therefore, in the first series of Ante-joiners to Nouns are 51 and two varieties of the words, recognizable. Ante-snb-joiner series to Nouns- 1. Non-recognizalle Adverbs (sub-joiners to Adjectives) : — Never, far, once, twice, often, almost, more, much, most, so, too, very, ill, well. 2. Recognizable by suffix "ly". General Remarks. — Altogether in the Ante-sub-joiner series there are 14 words and 1 variety of words. STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Comparative. Superlative. worse worst. downer downmost. farther farthest. former foremost or first. better best. inner inmost or innermost. later or lattet latest or last. less least. more most. nearer nearest or next. nigher nighest or next older or elder oldmost or eldest. upper upmost or uppermost. hinder hindmost, hindermost. outer outermost, utmost. Second Ante-joiner series to Nouns. 1. Irregular non-recognizahle Adjectives so called for the appearance of distinct words in their comparison : — Positive. Bad, evil or ill Down Far Fore Good, well In Late Little Many or much Near Nigh Old Up Hind Out The number of words in these are 59. Remarks. — Traces of regular suffixial regularity (by r, er; or st, est) in the comparison of non-recognizable Adjectives that go to form the next class begin to appear in some of these. 2. Regular non-recognizahle Adjectives — the regularity being in the suffixes of comparison (by r, er ; st, est,). (Cull out from the list of Non-recognizable Adjectives given herafter). 3. Uncomparahle Non-recognizable Positives. (Cull out from the same list). Continual, dead, empty, false, infallible, intolerable, inexpiable, void, royal, circular, perpetual, &c. 4. Uncomparahle recognizable comparatives by 'ior' or 'or'. Interior, exterior, superior, inferior, anterior, posterior, prior ulterior, senior, junior, major, minor. 5. Uncomparahle recognizable or Non-recognizable Adjective superlatives : — Almighty, chief, extreme, supreme, perfect, eternal universal, infinite. 6. Regular recognizable Adjectives. — the regularity being in their comparison by help of the irregular higher or lower compara- tives, or the highest or lowest superlatives i.e. "more" or "less" and "most" or "least" placed before them. APPENDIX. Ut> List of NON-RECOGNIZABLE ADJECTIVES. A. — Pure Adjectives. Able, adroit, adult, afraid, apt. Base, big, black, bland, blank, blind, brisk, brown, busy, blunt, broad, bleak, boon, brave, buxom. Cbaste, cheap, clean, clear, cool, crude, crump. Damp, dank, dark, dead, deaf, dear, deep, dire, divers, diverse, drab, dread, dry. Earnest, entire, even, evil. Pain, faint, fair, false, far, fat, few, fierce, fine, firm, fit, flat, fond, four, free. Gaunt, gay, gilt, glib, glad, grand, grave, gray, grey, great, green, gross, grum. Hard, harsh, high, hind, hoar, hot, hundred, hush. Idle. Just, jocund. Keen, kind. liag, lame, lank, large, lax, left, level, like, loath, long, lorn, loud, lush. Ittad, main, male, manifest, mean meek, mich, milch, mute. Near, neat, net, neither, new, neuter, nice, no. Odd, old, one, overt. Pale, parallel, perk, pert, plain, plump, poor, prime, prone, proper, proud, purblin, pure. Quaint, queer quick quiet, quit. Rank, rare, random, rash, rather, raw, ready, real rich, rife, ripe, roan, robust, rotund, round, rude, russet. Sad, safe, sage, salt, same, savage, scant, scarce, second, secret, secure, serene, set, seven, severe, sham, sharp, sheer, short, shrewd, shrill, shy, sick, sincere, six, slack, slope, solemn, some, soar, spruce, stalwart, starch, stark, steep, stern, stout, straight, strict. Tame, tart, ten, tense, thick, thin, thrice, thirty, thousand, three, thwart, tranquil, trig, twelve, twenty, two. Utmost, uttermost. Very, vague. Warm, waste, weak, werid, well, welsh, west, white, wide, whole, wise, worth. Zig-zag. T0TiLL=a226. !▼- STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. List of RECOGNIZABLE ADJECTIVES derivative & observational known by suffixes, prefixes or both with examples of each. A.— SUFFIXIAL PHONIiTIC GuOUP. (1.) Of Vowels. — y... Sorry, bloody. — ae...Blue, true. — ow... Tallow, shallow. — ough . . . Thorough. (2.) Of Consonants, D — id... Rigid, lucid. — und... Jocund, moribund. ■ — oid... Ovoid, typhoid. — ed... Sacred, kindred. — dy... Rowdy. — Id... Cold, mild. r ■ — ief... Brief, chief. —uff... Gruff. — ough... Rough, tough. a — ng... Wrong, strong. — ing. . . Governing K. — ac... Elegiac. — ic... Rustic, public. — fie... Terrific. — esque . . . Grottesque, picturesque — i que... Unique, antique !■ — al... Legal, mortal. — ical. . .Numerical, inimical. — eel... Genteel. — le... Gentle, simple. — il... Civil, tranquil — ble... Audible, treble. , . - — able... Memorable, fordable. - — ible. . . Sensible, corrigible. — el... Cruel. — ile... Fertile, futile. — pie... Couple, supple. — ail... Frail. — ly... Homely, comely, —ful... Careful, skilful. —11... Ill, well, all. — ley... — im...Dim, grim. — erne... Extreme, supreme^ — ime... Sublime, maritime. — dom... Seldom, random. N — an... Human, roman. — gn... Malign, foreign. — en... Golden, leaden. — urn... Auburn, taciturn. — ern... Modern. — ene... Serene, terrene. — ane... Mundane, profane. — een... Thirteen. — ain... Certain, vain. ■ — inc.. Devine, canine. It —gre... Meagre. — er... Eager, clever. — ar... Circular, regular. • — ere. . . Mediocre. — ary . . . Contrary, honorary- — ory . . . Migratory, illusory. —or... Minor, major. su — sh... Foolish. English. — sy... Tipsy. S — ense... Tense, dense. — arious. . . Multifarious. gregai'ious. — aneouB . . . Simultaneous.^ APPENDIX. s — erious . . . Deleteriou s. — orious... Laborious. — ous... Virtuous, curious. — ose... Verbose, comatose. — ^ise... Precise, concise. — ise... Hoarse, coarse. T — ate... Affectionate, effe- minate. — pt... Prompt, apt, abrupt. — ant... Errant, observant. — art... Inert, expert. — ute... Resolute, minute. — st... First, last. — ect... Elect, correct. — ate, eet... Complete, disci'eet. -ite... Partite. -ty...Dirtj -ent. . . Patient, indolelit. -inct... Distinct, succinct. -ute... Minute, dilute. -the... Lithe, blithe -th... Fifth, seventh. V -ive... Active, restive. X -ex... Complex, convex. By Word. -like . . . Godlike, warlike. -less... Shameless, hopeless, -some. . . Handsome, winsome, -ward... Forward, -fold... Manifold. Total=90 Varieties. Compound Adjectives. 1. Noun-f Adj.=Snow-white, sky-blue. 2. Noun +participle= Web-footed, heart-rending. 3. Adj. -f- Adj. = Red -hot, luke-warm. 4. Prep.-f-noun=Over-land, Over-time. (&). — Both preffixial and suffixial. Ab-omin-able, ab-origin-al, ad-ventur-ous, ad-vantage-ous, ag- gress-ive, Bi-pol-ar, bi-nom-ial, Com-mod-ious, coTn-merc-ial, con- geni-tal, con-form-al. cor-rupt-ible, cor-ross-ive, De-rogat-ory, de- riv-abla,di-gest-ible, di-la-tory, dis-allow-able, dis-asterous, E-duc- ible, e-jaculat-ory, en-thusias-tic, e-nunciat-ive, ex-or-bit-ant ex- haust-ible, In-fer-enc-ial, in-fert-ile, il-lustri-cus, il-logic-al, Mani- pulat-ive, mani-fest-ible, Non-sensi-cal, Ob-erv-able, ob-nox-ious, oc-curr-ant. oc-casion-al, op-press-ive, op-po-sable, or-thograph-ic, or-tho-pter-ous, Para-sit-ic, para-grapb-ic, per-form-able, per-enn- ial, pre-dict-ive, pro-nom-inal, pro-grass-ive, Re-ligi-ous, re-flect- ive Sub-servi-ent, sub-junct-ive, Trans-fer-able, tra-dition-al, tra- mont-ane.=54. (c) — Prefixal with roots, A...A-ghast, a-ware, a-verse. Ab...ab-ject, ab-rupt, ab-surd, Ad... ad-verse, ad-apt. Bi...Bi-fid. Cor...Cor-nipt. Com. ..Com- mon, cow-cise, con-crescent, Bi-lnte, dis-mal, dis-tinct, jtJn-tire, ex- empt, ex-tinct, e-lact, Jm-mense, il-licit, in-ert, Mani-ie&t, Non- discript, Obsolete, ob-tuse, o-cult, op-posite, ortho-dox, Para-llel, per-fect, ^re-cisa, pro-lix, i?e-cluse, re-mote, Sm-cere, se-cure, sub- ject, Traws -parent, fra-varse.=31. /Tl STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (d)-^PBEFIXIAL WITH WORDS. A-lien, bi-fold, corn-pound, con-cave, de-void, ex-act, in-bred,, ob-scene, pyri-form.=9 B. — Irregular participle adjectives. (Past) . Broken, chosen, cut, fallen, forbidden, hewn, hidden, known, lost, mis-shapen, said, sold, slain, sown, spent, split, spun, stolen, stung, sworn, swollen, torn, trodden, woven, won, wrought, written, =27. C. — Their compounds with adjective and adverb UNITED or UN-united. Ill-fed, long-felt, well-knit, highly-let, long-sought, best-set. Twice-told, wide-spread, newly-built.=9. List of RECOGNIZABLS NOUNS derivative and obser- vational, known by suffixes and prefixes or both with examples of each. A. — SUFFIXIAL phonetic GROUP. 1. — Of Vowels. ■a... Macula, malaria -ee... Payee, nominee -e,y... Beside, baby, -y... Party, warranty -o...Sae:o, seraglio -oo... Taboo -ow. . . Window, willow 2. — Of Consonants. c -ic... Garlic, stoic, bishop-ric -que... Marque, ceque -iac. Maniac, zodiac D -ad... Ball ad, salad -ade... Crusade, cannonade -ode... Node, geode -id... Orchid, hybrid -ide... Parricide -nd...Wind, friend -and... Viand, errand -ard... Sluggard, orchard -end... Legend — red... Kindred — aid.. .Herald, emarald — oid... Conoid, rhomboid — tude... Solitude, gratitude — ing... Learning — ling... Sapling — ong... Throng, song, gong J — age... Village, parentage — dge... Bridge, wedge — ledge... Knowledge, pledge G — logue. .Monologue, epilo- gue — gue... League, fatigue — ge... Barge —gy... Clergy Zi — al... Proposal, dismissal — el... Model, shovel APPENDIX. VII -il... Tendril, nostril -yl... Beryl, idyl -le...Chyie -ail... Detail, tail -ol... Patrol -ole... Parole, rigmarole -eel... Parcel -cle... Particle, vehicle -sel... Damsel, morsel -ule. . . Globule, plumnle -cule . . . Animalcule -ly... Contumely -em... Theorem, problem -erne ..Scheme, raceme -im... Pilgrim, maxim -yme... Chyme -om... Venom, ransom -dom . . Kingdom, wisdom -um... Opium -asm... Spasm, sarcasm -ism... Hinduism N -an... Organ, orphan -ain . . . C haplain, villain -san . . . Partisan, courtisan -en... Chicken, warden -zen... Denizen, citizen -in... Tannin, tiffin -gin... Origin, margin -lin... Goblin -ine... Turpentine, pepsine -kin... Lambkin -one... Ozone -on... Union, weapon -sin... Tocsin -oon... Cartoon, monsoon -gon... Pentagon, hexagon -une . . . Fortune, tribune ny... Tyranny -ney... Journey -mony... Testimony, sancti- mony -ern... Lantern, postern -urn... Saturn — ar...Liar, beggar ^—er... Maker, temper — ber... October, November — cer... Grocer, necromancer — der... Spider — ter... Laughter, sister — re... Ombre, sabre — ogre... Ogre — yre...Eyre, sryre, lyre — tre... Spectre, theatre — or... Curator, doctor, tenor — er... Maker, sacTdler, order — ery... Vinery, finery — our...Endavour, flavour — ier... Terrier, fusitier — ure... Verdure, tenure — ere... Nacre, massacre — chre . . .Sepulchre, ochre — ture... Signature, mature — ry... Ovary, vestry — ar... Scholar, vicar, templar — ory... Victory, wory — ary... Dignitary, vagary — ter... Daughter, laughter • — ster... Songster, youngster — ray... — cer... Necromancer, grocer — ther... Mother, weather — der... Spider, rudder — ir... Nadir — oir... Memoir — eer . . . Volunteer — ury . . . Treasury, usury — ire... Satire, empire — yr... Satyr, zephyr — acious . . . Audacius , sagacious — aceous . . Herb-aceous, farinaceous — ess... Prowess, progress — ness... Sickness, kindness — cess... Process, access — sy... Gipsy, heresy • — cy... Mercy, secrecy — us... Genius, genus — aneous . . . Extraneous STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. s — is... Basis, glottis — ise... Devise, franchiie — pse... Eclipse, ellipse -*-ous... Amorous T — t... Sight, height — at . . . Aristocrat, democrat — eight... Wei'jrht, freight —ment... Amendment, condiment — ant,,, Warrant, tyrant, infant. — ent... Talent, tangent — ette, . . Etiquette — it7...Chri8tanit7, gravidity — ^ite... Favorite, satellite — ate... Pirate, protectorate — et... Signet, wicket, tablet — ot... Zealot, patriot — it... Orbit, cubit — ute . . . S tatute, tribute — Phyte... Zoophyte, neophyte ST — ist... Linguist, botanist — ast... Enthusiast, bombast Mixed. — the... Tithe, scythe — th... Stealth, health — ics... Statistics, tactics — scape... Landscape, escape — scope . . . Telescope — ause... Pause, cause — ock...Hillock, bullock — sis . . . Oasis,- synopsis -^isk... Basilisk, asterisk -^esque . . . Burlesque ■•—ige... Vestige, prestige — ch... Church, watch, match — sh... Thrush, brush, bush —11... Bull, bell — ex... Vortex, vertex — ix. . . Matrix, affix —iff... Mastiff, bailiff Bv Words. — lock...Wed-lock, pad-lock -^Wright . . . Ship- Wright -^monger... Fish-monger — let... King-let, rivu-let "^s^p.-Friend-ship wor-ship — hood.. Boy-hood, man-hood — head. . . God-head — sphere. . . Atmo-sphere, hemi-sphere — aster. . .Poet-aster — arch. .Mon -arch, patri-arch — ph... Paragraph, epitaph ToTAL=l70 Varieties. List of RECOGNIZABLE NOUNS known by prefixes words or roots or both by prefixes and sufl&xes. or A...A-spect, a-theist Ab...Ab-use, ab-erra-tion Abs...Abs-ence, abs-trac-tion Ac.Ac-anthus, ac-cumula-tion Ad...Ad-jective, ad-mira-tion Acro...Acro-bat, acro-gen Af...Af-fix, af-flux Ag. . . Ag-grega-tion AL. Al-arm,al-cohoI Ambi... Ambi-gu-ity, ambi-tion Amphi-Amphi-theatre Ampli . . . Ampli-fica-tion An...An-archy Ana...Ana-tomy Ante... Ante-room, ant^-penult Anti.-.Antipath}' Ap...Ap-posi-tion, ap-horism Apo...Apo-logy, apo-logue Arch... Arch -duke, arch-angle Ar...Ar-x-ogance As... As-sent, as-sail-ant At...At-trac-tion, at-tempt Attto...Auto-cracy, auto-graph Be...Be-ginn-er, be-liev-er Bene...Bene-dic-tion, bene-fact-or Bi...Bi-ped Bi8...Bi-8ec-tion, bis-cuit By... Bypath, byword. APPENDIX. i* Cent... Cent-age, centi-ped Circum. . . Circum-f er-ence, circum-ci-sion Co...Co-erc-ioTi, co-herence Col...Col-leag-ue, col-loquy Com... Compass, corn-pact Con... Con-sort, con-trast Contro. . .Controversy Cor...Cor-rect-ion Coun... Council Counter... Counter-part Cis...Cis-alpine ■Cata...Cata-comb, cata-log-ue !De... De-bate, de-cad-ence Deca...Deca-gon, deca-log-ue Des...Des-sert Deuter, . . Deuter-otgami, Deutero-nomy Dexter. . . Dexter-ity Dia..,Dia-lect, dia-tribe Di£...Dif-f US-ion, dif-f er-ence Demi ... Demi-god Di...Di-lemma, di-lu-tion Dis...Dis-temper, dis-cord Dy8...Dys-entery, dys-pepsia B...E-bull-ition, e-carte Ec... Eccentricity Ec... Eclipse Ef...Ef-fect, ef-figy El...El-ixir Em...Em-blem, em-brocat-ion En. . . en-croach-ment Enter. . . Enter-prise Epi...epi-taph, epi-lepsy Es...es-cape, es-planade Eso...eso-teric Eu..,eu-phony, eu-logy Ex...ex-odus, ex-perience Exo...exo-gen, exo-tic Extra. . .extra- vasation Tor. . . f or-bearance Fore... fore-castle, fore-closure Kemi...hemi-spliere, hemi-stich Hiero...liiero-glyph, hiero-phant Homo...homo-logue, homo-type Hepta...hepta-rchy, hepta-gon Hyper... hyper-bole, hyper- trophy Hypo...hypo-tenuse, hypo-crisy I...I-gnominy II . . .Il-lumination Im...Im-port, im-post In... In-come, in-crustation Intel . . . Intel-lect, intel-ligence Inter... Inter-course, inter-jec- tion» Intro. . . Intro-duction Ir...Ir-i*egularity Juxta. . . Juxta-position mal...Mal-position, mal-aria Met. meta...Met-hod, meta- physics Mis... Mis-hap, mis-conduct Mon, mono...Mon-arch, mono- syllable Multi-Multi-plication, multi-tude Ne. . . Ne-penthe Neg, nec.Neg-ation, neg-lect nee -tar N'on...K'on-suit, non-plus Ob...0b-ject, ob-sequies Oc.Oc-currence, oc-cupation Octa...Octa-hedron, octa-gon Off... Off-set, off-spring On... On-set, on-slaught Out... Out-break, out -cry Over... Over-coat, over- weight Pan... Pan-theism, pan-orama Par, para... Par-enthesis, para- site Panto. . . Panto-mime Pen, pene...Pen-insula, pene- tration Per...Per-fection, per-fume Peri... Peri-carp, peri-phery Phono... Phono-graphy, phono- type Photo... Photo-sphere, photo- graphy Pol...Pol-lution Poly...Poly-glot, poly-gamy Post... Post-script, post-pone- ment Port...Port-manteau, port-folio Pro... Pro-cess, pro-phet Preter . . , Preter-mission Pre...Pre-caution, pre-tention Pros...Pros-elyte, pros-ody STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Proto...Proto-type. proto-zan Pseudo.^Pseudo-nyme Pur...Par-porb Retro... Retro-spect, retro-grade Re... Re-call, re-move, re-union Se...Se-cure, seduce Sed... Sedition Semi... Semi-circle, semicolon Sine... Sine-cure Sub... Sub-treasury, subject Suc...Suc-ceed Suf... Suffix Sug...Sug-gestion Subter . . . Subter-f uge Sup. ..Sup-port, sap-plication Sur...Sur-mise, sur-face Super... Super-stition Su8...Su8-pense, sus-tenauce Sys...Sy-stem Syl...Syl-lable, syl-labus Sym...SyTn-bol, sym-pathy Syn...Syn-tax, syn-thesis Tele.. .Tele-phone, tele-gram. Tra...Tra-ditionj tra-ducer Tran, trans... Tran-sit, trans- port. Tres...Trestri-pod Tres ..Tres-pass Tri...Tri-angle, tripod Ultra.. .Ultra-montanist Un...Un-animity Uni...Uni-form Vice...Vice-roy yis...Yis-count. Total=147 Varieties. Compound Nouns. 1. Nouii+noan=Ring'finger, washer-man, 2. Participle 4-iioun= Looking-glass, Shoe-making. 3. Adverb+noun=By-word, by-path. 4. Verb+noun=Tell-tale, turn-key. 5. 'Adverb + verb = Out-look, run- away. 6. Adjective-|-noun=Noble-man, strong-hold. 7. Prep.+noun=After-noon. Personal pronouns or Noun-proxies in the 1st term in the Mono-simple. — 1, we, thou, ye or you, he, they, she, it. Personal pronoun or noun-proxies in the 3rd term of the mono-simple. — Me, us, thee, you, him, them, hei', it. List of NON-RECOGNIZABLE NOUNS Ace. ache, ado, adz, adze, aerie, ail, air, ale, acme, adult, agate, april. ague. alms. aloe, aloes, alum, ankle, annals, ant, ape. apex, apple, apse, arch, arm, arson, art, ash. asp, ass, aunt, awn, axe, azote.=37. Sabe, bait, barb, bark, barn, beer. bawl. bean. bear, beard, beck, bee, belt, bay, bey. bias. bier, bin, bird, bit, bitch, bliss, blood, boar. bout, bomb, bond, boon, boor, bourse, bowels, bom, boy, bread, breeze, brill, brink, brog. brook, brink, brunt, brute, buck, buff. bug. bull, bulk, bur, burr, burin, bust. =47. Cab. cad. calx, cane, cone, car, cates. caul, cave, celt, cent, chalk, chaos, chart, cheese, chest, cheek, chick, child, chin, chit, choir, APPENDIX. XI chord, chnb, chit, clan, clause, clef, clerk, click, clock, clod, clove, clump, cob, cock, cod, coif, coke, coir, cob, column, cone, coom, coot, core, clown, clue, colt, corps, costume, cot, cote, course, cowl, crab, craft, cra»e, crane, crape, crate, crake, crane, creed, creek, creel, cress, crime, crock, croft, crone, croup, cruse, ciid, cue, culm, cult, cur, curd, casp, cyst, czar.=80. l>ace, dad, dais, dale, dam, dame, dance, dare, day, dean, dear, debt, deed, delf, den, derm, desk, duce, dew, dice, diet, dill, dint, dirge, dirt, doe, dog, doge, dole, doll, dolt, dome, don, door, dose, dough, dove, draff, drake, dregs, drone, dross, duck.=38. Earl, east, eaves, edge, eft, eld, elf, elk, ell, elm, era, eve, ewe, eye. = 14. Pact, Fad, Fair, fame, fane, fans:, farce, fast, fate, fault, faun, fawn, fay, feat, feint, fell, fen. fern, fete, fiat, fib. fief, filly, fin, firm, fisc, fist, fit, fine, flail, flask, flax, flea, fleam, fleet, flesh, flight, flint, flip, fluke, flume, fool, fop, foe, fog, folk, font, food, fort, fosse, fount, fox, fraud, fray, frenzy, fresco, friend, frieze, frock, frog, frond, front, fund, fungus, fur, fury, furze, fuss. =68. G-ail, Gale, gallows, gand, goal, gaol, gap, garb, gas, gate, gaul, gauge, gauze, gawk, germ, ghost, gist, gift, gig, gill, gimp, girl, girt, glair, gland, glass, glave, glebe, glee, gleet, glen, globe, glove, glue, gnat, goat, god, gold, golf, goose, gorse, gourd,gown, gout, grade, grail, grange, grape, grass, grate, grave, grease, greaves, grief, grig, grime, grip, grist, grit, groat, grog, groin, grot, grotto, grouse, grout, grove, gruel, grunt, guest, guild, guile, guilt, guise, gulf, gun. gust. = 78. Hades, haft, hag, hair, hake, half, hall, halt, ham, hank, hap, hare, harl, hart, hat, havoc, hay, haze, hearse, heart, heir, helix, hell, helm, hemp, hen, hop, herb, hill, hind, hoax, hob, hock, hod, holm, holt, home, hoof, horde, horn, horse, house, host, hound, hour, houri, hue, hulk, hump, humus, hurt. = 50. Ibex, idea, ides, idol, ilex, inn, iota, ire, iris, iron, ivy. =11. Jack, jag, jail, jam, jamb, jaw, jay, jean, jest, jess, jet, jen, jig. joint, jowl, juice, June, junk, jute.=19. ZLail. kale, keg, kelp, kern, kerne, key, kibe, kid, kiln, kilt, kin, kind, kine, king, kiosk, kirk, kit, knack, kite, knag, knave, knee, knife, knob, knoll, knop, knout, kyrie.=29. Lac, lad, lady, lair, lake, lamb, lamp, lar, lard, lark, lass, lava, law, lawn, lay, ledge, lee, leek, lees, leet, leg, lemur, lens, lent, lethe, liar, lias, lice, lid, lien, life, lieu, light, like, lily, links, lint, lion, lip> litmus, lobe, loch, lode, loft, log, loin, loo, loaf, loom, loon, lord, lore, loss, louse, lout, luce, luck, lump, lune, lung, lye, lymph, lynch, lynx, lyre. =64. Blab, mace, maid, main, maize, malt, mane, mange, mana. manse, mare, mart, martyr, mauve, maw, mead, menses, mere, merle, mews, mica, midge, mien, miff, mile, milt, mime, mina^ Ill STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. minx, mist, mite, mode, mole, monk, mood, moon, moor, moose, morn, mote, mow, moxa. muff, mug, mule, mum, mumps, musea, mush, myrrh. =5 50. Nag, nap, nape, naught, nave, naze, neap, neb. neck, negro, nerve, nest, news, nib, niece, nit, nob, node, nook, noon, noun, nudge, nun, nymph. =24. Oaf, oak, oar, oat, ocean, odds, ode, olive, omem, orange, ore, oven, owl, ox. =14. Pact, pail, pair, pall, palm, pan, pane, pang, pap, papa, paper, par, pard, park, part, pate, pawl, pea, peace, peak, pear, peat, pelf, pell, pelt, penny, pest, pew, phase, phlegm, phrase, pica, pier, pike, pill, pint, pip, pix, plane, plank, plea, plumb, plus, poem, poet, point, poise, pole, pome, pomp, pond, pool, pope, pore, pork, port, poult, pox, prank, prey, priest, prig, prism, prince, prod, proof, prop, prow, puck, pug, pulp, pulse, psalm, pup, pus, puss, pigmy, pyre, pyx.=79 Quack, quag, qualm, quart, quay, queen, quern, quest, quib, quid, quince, quirk, quoit, quota. =14. Itadix, raff, raft, rag, rage, raid, ram, rand, rank, rape, rash, raven, ray, realm, ream, rear, reed, reef, reel, reeve, reign, reins, rhomb, rice, rick, rind, riot, rite, road, rod, roe, rope, rood, rook, room, rose, ross, rote, rounce, roup, rout, ruck, rud, rug, rum, rump, rune, runt, ruse, rusk, ruth, rye.=51. Sac, sage, sago, saint, sake, salt, salve, scab, scall, scarp, scene, sconce, scope, scrag, scrap, scribe, scrip, script, scroll, scurf, sea, sect, sedge, see, seine, self, sense, sept, serf, serge, sex, shad, shaft, shag, shale, sham, shark, shaw, sheaf, sheave, shed, sheen, sheep, sheer, sheers, shelf, shin, shire, shive, shoad, shock, shoe, shop, shore, shot, shrew, shrift, shrimp, shrine, shrub, side, siege, sieve, silk, sill, silt, sine, sir, sire, site, skein, skull, sky, slag, slat, slaw, sleave, sled, «ledge, sleight, slime, sloe, sloop, slope, slot, slug, sluice, slut, smalt, smock, snag, snail, snake, snipe, snob, snood, snot, snout, sock, sod, sofa, soda, sol, sole, son, song, soot, sore, sot, soul, sound, soup, source, sow, space, spade, spark, specie, species, sperm, sphere, sphinx, spice, spile, spine, spire, spirit, spleen, spoon, spore, spouse, sprat, sprig, sprit, spud, spurge, squad, squib, squill, squint, stack, staff, stag, stage, stair, stamen, stanza, state, statue, stead, steak, steed, steel, step, stern, stigma, stile, stilt, stinge, stipend, stoat, stole, stone, stool, stork, strand, strap, straw, streak, stream, street, stress, stride, strife, strophe, stum, sty, suds, suet, suite, sulphur, summons, surd, surf, swab, swain, swamp, swan, swarm, swell, swine, sword. = 192. Tabby, table, taboo, tact, tail, tale, tang, tank, tape, tare, tarn, tart, tavern, tea, teak, teal, team, teat, term, text, thane, thew, thigh, thing, thole, thong, thorn, thorp, thrall, threat, throat, thug, thumb, thump, thyme, tic, tier, tierce, tiger, till, tilt, tithe, title, toad, toe, tomb, tomp, ton, tongs, tool, tooth, tope, torch, tory, APPENDIX. Xlll tour, town, tract, trait, trance, trash, trass, trave, tray, tree, tress, tret, trial, tribe, trice, tripe, trope, trough, trout, troy, truce, truck, trull, trump, trunk, trus, trust, tryse, tub, tuft, tun, tup, turk, tusk, twain, tweed, twig, twin, type, tyro.=94. Udder, ulcer, umbel, uncle, unit, urchin, urine. =7. Vails, vale, valet, valise, valley, value, valve, van, vane, vase, vat, veal, venue, verb, verge, vermin, verse, verst, verve, vesper, vessel, vesta, vestry, veto, vial, viand, vicar, vice, victim, vigil, villa, vine, viol, viper, virgin, virtue, virus, vista, vitals, vixen, void, volley, volt, vowel. =44. Wady, wafer, wager, wages, wagon, waif, wain, waist, wale, wand, ware, wart, wasp, waste, way, weal, web, week, weft, weir, weird, weld, well, wen, west, wey, whale, wharf, wheat, whelk, whey, whig, while, whim, whin, whit, white, whore, wick, wife, wig, wight, wile, wine, wisd, witch, withe, woad, woe, wolf, womb, woof, wool, world, wort, wrack, wren, wretch, wright, wrist. =50. ITacht, yak, yam, yard, yarn, yawl, year, yeash, yew, yolk, yore, yule.= 12. Zany, zeal, zeand, zenith, zero, zest, zinc, zone. =8. Total=1181. DI-PARTS OF SPEECH GROUP OF WORDS.— Adjectives and Nouns known by their Suffixes. Suffixes. Wokds. — ory...access-ory, judicat-ory, purgat-ory, sternutat-ory, suspens- ory, sudat-ory. — ary...capill-ary, centen-ary, lapid-ary. ■ — ar...capitul-ar, circul-ar, irregul-ar, mol-ar, perpendicul-ar, secul- ar, jugul-ar, faraili-ar, scapul-ar, particul-ar. — or...exteri-or, interi-or, maj-or, min-or, pri-or, superi-or. — er...bould-er, count-er, neut-er, premi-er, fronti-er. — -ure...az-ure, fut-ure, leis-ure. — ant...conson-ant, dorm-ant, expectant, expectorant, ga'lant, in- fant, instant, intolerant, irritant, litigant, malignant, men- dicant, merchant, mordant, naiant, peasant, protestant, radiant, recreant, recusant, ruminant, secant, stimulant, brilliant, conversant. • — ent... antecedent, astringent, consequent, constituent, contingent, correspondent, crescent, current, diluent, discontent, depo- nent, dissentient, dissident, efficient, effluent, emollient, expedient, gradient, impenitent, incumbent, innocent, in- surgent, intent, intercipient, lenient, malcontent, orient, patient, precedent, proficient, regent, resident, trident. XIT STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. -^ic... ascetic, catholic, caustic, characteristic, climacteric, eclesias- tic, ecboHc, ecliptic, electric, empiric, encaustic, enclitic, epic, epidemic, iambic, intrinsic, lunatic, magic, mosaic, paralytic, mystic, pacific, pontific, prognostic, sceptic, schismatic, scolastic, septic, splenitic, stoic, stomachic, styptic, sudorific, tonic, tropic, public, cynic, fanatic, rubric. — al ..cannibal, capital, ceremonial, constitutional, Corporal, cre- dential, criminal, crystal, decimal, decretal, dental, dia- gonal, fi'ontal, funeral, general, imperial, infinitismal, in- tegral, labial, lachrymal, lacteal, liberal, lingual, littoral, material, memorial, menial, numeral, nasal, neutral, normal, oval, pastoral, potential, primordial, principal, prodigal, proportional, provincial, radical, reciprocal, serial, spiral, udal, bacchanal, cordial. — ern. . . northern. —ive... conservative, correlative, dative, definitive, derivative, diminutive, dissuasive, exclusive, executive, expletive, incarnative, incrassative, interrogative, invective, laxative, lenitive, locomotive, maturative, motive, narrative, ob- jective, offensive, operative, sedative, subjunctive, sub- stantive, superlative, corrosive, fugitive. — ly... orderly. — ian... christian, indian, latitudinarian, machiavelian, plebian, pedestrian, quotidian, Sabbatarian, saurian, unitarian, meri- dian, tertian, fustian, patrician, ruffian, barbarian, hyper- borian. — an...mahomedan, pagan, partisan, republican, roman, german, — ite... exquisite, favorite, infinite, Jacobite, requisite. — o... octavo, folio, quarto. •—on... carrion, common, poltroon, saxon, felon, saffron. — ow... fallow, shallow. — ate... literate, graduate, intestate, ordinate, private, profligate. — id. ..acid, invalid, liquid, fluid, rapid, solid. — ine... intestine, libertine, saline, supine, marine, nervine, palatine, ultramarine. — in... latin, matin. — en... craven, maiden, mizzen, raven. — ile... reptile, projectile, gentile, missile. — cript . . . manuscript, conscript. — esque . . . arabesque, grotesque. — ard... bastard, coward, dastard, standard. — eate . . . chalybeate . —ing... fencing, folding, hanging, landing, living, lying, morning, mouring, parting, riding, running, saving, standing. Total=30 Varieties. ist of Adjectives and Nouns with common Sn Common suffixes. Adjectives. Nouns. — ac E^iao Maniac — al Mortal EmeraL / — ant Repentant Sergeant — ent Patient Student — ate Private Graduate — ern Southern Cistern — ary Honorary Secretary — ic Public Sceptic —id Tepid Liquid — ile Puerile Gentile — ine Divine Iodine — ing Loving Farthing — ish Outlandish Irish — le Idle Beadle — oty Prefatory Purgatory — ew Narrow- Marrow — er Bitter Timber — red Kindred Hatred —right Downright fright — ute Minute Tribute — teen Fourteen Canteen — th Fourth Month — tory Migratory Dormitory -ty Dainty Quality —ward Homeward Reward -pie Simple Example — oid Avoid Rhomboid —id Lucid Orchid -dy Rowdy Body —aid Bald Herald — ble Audible Marble —el Cruel Model — om Seldom Thralldom — an Human Organ — ign Malaign Sign —en Golden Omen — urn Auburn Saturn — ern Modern Pastern — ain Certain Villain — gre Meagre Agre —ere Mediocre Acre — or Minor Doctor — sya Tipsy Jypsy — ene Immense Sense — ise Concise Devise —tinct Extinct Instinct XT XVI STYLOGBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. [JFFIXES. Adjectives, Nouns -ithe Blithe Tithe -ough Eough Slough ex Convex Vertex -dy Bloody Body -ue Blue Hue ■ong Wrong Song -ild Wild Child. -ufe Graff Stuff ail Frail Detail ale Sable Table — ly Comely Orderly Total=57 Varieties. List of NON-RECOGNIZABLE VERBS of the Regular group. Add, amble, argue, Sable, baffle, bake, bask, baste, bathe, batter, beckon, beg^ bless, bloat, blurt, bluster, bob, bode, borrow, bow, brag, breathe^ brew, budge, busk. Calk, cancel, carry, carve, cater, cease, cede, ceil, cere, champ, chew, choke, chuckle, cite, clamber, climb, clinch, cram, crackle, craze, creak, cringe, cruise, crumble, crumple, crunch, cull, curdle, curl, curry. l>abble, daggle, dandle, daunt, dawn, daze, dazzle, deem, deign, delve, dibble, dig, dine, ding, dive, dote, douse, drape, dribble, drill, drip, drivel, drizzle, droop, drown, drowse, drudge, dub, dure, dwell, dwindle. Barn, eat, eke, err, etch. Fade, fail, feign, fell, fend, filch, fix, flay, flicker, flirt, flit, flog, flout, flutter, foist, found, founder, freeze, frizzle. G-abble, gamble, garble, geld, gender, gild, gird, gloat, gloze, gloze, gnar, gnarl, gnash, gnaw, gobble, goggle, govern, grab, grant, grapple, grasp, grave, graze, greet, grieve, grill, grain, groin, grope, grovel, growl, grumble, grunt, guide, gulp, gurgle, guzzle. Haggle, halt, halve, hamper, harass, hark, harry, heal, hew, huggle, hinder, hobble, hockle, hom, hurry, hurtle, hustle. Ignite, imagine, irk. Jam, jangle, jog, join, jostle, judge, juggle, jumble, justle, jut, Kill, kindle, knead. liave, learn, lean, levy, lick, limn, live, loathe, loll, lug, lurk. APPENDIX. XVll Blanage, mar, marry, meddle, melt, m^end, m.erge, mince, mingle, mix, mizzle, moil, molest, moot, mope, moult, mourn, mull, mumm, mump, munch, mute, mutter, maunder, mete, mumble, Nestle, nibble, nuzzle. Ope, own, owe, oust, ogle. Pamper, pant, pare, parry, parse, patter, pave, peddle, pelt, pester, piddle, pierce, pilfer, pill, pleach, plead, please, plod, ply, poach, poise, ponder, pore, potter, pour, pout, prattle, pray, preach, preen, prove, prowl, pry, pucker, puke, pule, pup, purge, purr. Quack, quaff, quash, quell, qnencb, quit, quote. R,aise, rally, rankle, rap, rase, rasp, rat, ratten, rave, ravel, raze, rear, reave, reck, reckon, reel, reeve, rely, retch, rifle rinse, rip, roam, rove. Sate, save, scan, scare, scorch, scotch, scour, scrawl, scrub, sear, seem, seethe, seize, serve, sever, sheer, shelve, shift, shirk, shove, shrive, shun, shift, shimmer, simper, singe, skim, skulk, slake, slump, smatter, smirch, snarl, sniff, snivel, snooze, snort, snub, snuffle, soak, soar, sob, solicit, solve, soothe, sound, sour, spare, spin, splay, sprawl, sprinkle, squat, squeal, stagger, stalk, stanch, stare, starve, steep, stew, stifle, still, stow, straggle, strain, strangle, stray, stretch, strip, strum, study, stun, stunt, suckle, sue, sulk, sully, sunder, swaddle, swagger, swallow, swathe, swelter, swerve, swop. Tamper, taper, tarry, tease, ted, teem, tempt, tend, tender, thieve, thrash, thwart, tickle, tilt, tinge, tingle, tipple, titter, toddle, totter, tout, trample, trash, trawl, tremble, trickle, trim, trow, truck, truckle, trudge, try, twit. Unite, urge, usurp, utter. Vary, vaunt, veer, vend, verge, vex, vie, view, visit, vouch, vow. ^Taddle, wade, waft, wag, wager, waggle, wait, waive, wander, warble, ward, warn, waul, wean, wed, ween, weigh, weld, welter, wend, wheedle, wheeze, whelm, whimper, whine, wield, wimble, win, wince, wipe, wither, wive, woo, wreak, wreathe, wrestle, wriggle, writhe. Vean, yearn, yelp, yield. Total=478. List of NON-RECOGNIZABLE VERBS of the Irregular group. A. — All three alike. (a) Terminated by D, Ind. Pres. Ind. Past. Part. Past. Read read read Rid rid rid Shed shed shed Shred shred shred Spread spread spread II xvui 8TTL0GRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. (6) Terminated by T. Beat beat beat Cast cast cast Cost cost cost Burst burst burst Cut cut cut Hit hit hit Hurt hurt hurf Knit knit knit Let let let Put put put Quit quit (quitted) quit R. Set set set Shut shut shut Slit slit (slitted) slit R. Split split split Sweat sweat sweat Thurst thurst B.— Last two alike. By adding D to 1st, thurst Hear hear-d hear-d By adding T to the 1st „ Deal deal-t deal-t Mean mean-t Mean-t Pen pen-t D changed into T. pen-t Bend bent bent Build built built Gild gilt gilt Gird girt girt Lend lent lent Bend rent rent Send sent sent Spend spent spent Double L changed into single, then adding T. Dwell dwelt dwelt Spill Spilt spilt Dropping all letters except one or two initials and adding "aught" or "ought" to the 1st. Catch c-aught c-aught Teach t-aught t-aught Beseech bes-ought besought Bring br-ought br-ought Buy b -ought b-ought APPENDIX. Fight f-ought f-ought Seek s-ought s-ought Think th-ought th-ought Work wr-ought wr-ought R. Eing rang or i rung rung Shrink shrank or shrunk shrunk Sing sang or sung sung Sink sank or sunk sunk Slink sl-ank or sl-unk sl-unk Stink st-ank or ' st-unk st-unk Swim Bw-am or sw-um sw-um Swing sw-ang or sw-ung sw-ung Spin sp-an or sp-un sp-un Sling sl-ang or ■ sl-ung sl-ung Spring sp-rang or spr-ung spr-ung Shoot shot (oo into o) shot Hang hung (a into u) hung Cling clung (i into u) clung Dig dug dug E. Fling flung flung Sting stung stung String strung strung Wring wrung wrung Stick Stuck stuck Bind bound (i into ou) bound Find found found Grind ground ground Wind wound wound Creep crept (ee into e) crept Feel felt felt Keep kept kept Kneel knelt knelt Sleep slept slept Sweep swept swept Weep wept wept Last two irregularly alike. Still terminal by D or T, rarely Phonetic. Have had had Flee fled fled Make made made Lose lost lost Shoe shod shod Stand stood stood ■ Berieve heveft hexeft Cleave cleft cleft "Leave left left XIX 8TYL0QBAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. liight Bleed Breed Feed Meet Speed Lead Hold Be-hold lit lit bled (ee into e) bled bred bred fed fed met met sped sped led (ea into e) led - held (o into e) held be-held be-Leld or be-hold- Remarks :- Past Participle. Abide Shine Win Jj&y Pay Say Sell Chide Hide Bite Slide Stride Sit Get Forget Spit Come Take Shake Forsake Shear Forbear Wear Break Steal Bear Speak Tear Swear Bid -Phonetic N appears here as termination of the- abode abode shone shone won won l&id laid pat-d pai-d sai-d sat-d sold sold chid chid or chidden hid hid or hid/?e?i, bit bit or bitten, slid slid or sli-dd-e?! strid (strode) strid or stri-dd-en. sat sat or 8i-tt-en got got or gotten. forgot forgot or forgot^e?* spit or spat spit or spiti-ew 1st and last aUke. come C. — All 3 different. took take-n shook shake-n forsook frosake-n shore shor-n forbore forbor-ne wore wor-n broke broke-n stole Btole-n bore born or borne spoke or spake spoke-n tore torn swore or swore swor-n bad or bade bid-d-en Eat ate J\L»1.\. eat-en Arise arose (i into o) arise- n Drive drove drive-n Rise rose rise-n Strive strove strive-n Thrive throve .thrive-n Stride strode Btrid-d-en Hide rode rid-d-en Smite smote smit-t-en Write wrote writ-t-en Weave wove (ea into o) woven Tread trod trod-d-en Cleave clove clove-n Choose chose (oc ) into o) chose-n Freeze froze (ee into e) froze-n Awake awoke (a into o) awake-d, awaken Blow blew (o into e) blow-n soap, sob, soil, sop, sort, sorgh, souse, sow, span, spar, spawn; spear, speed, spell, spike, spill, spin, spit, spite, splash, splicer splint, split, spoil, sponge, spool, sport, spot, spout, sprain, spread* 3CXX STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. «prig, spring, springe, sprout, spurn, spur, spurn, spurt, sputter, spy, squall, squash, squeak, squeere, squirt, stab, stack, stain, stake, stalk, stall, stamp, stand, star, stare, start, stave, stay, steam, steer, stem, slip, stew, stick, sting, stink, stint, stir, stitch, stocky stoop, stop, store, storm, stove, strike, string, stripe, stroke, stroll, strop, strut, stub, stud, stuff, stump, style, suck, suit, sum, sun, sup, surge, sway, sweat, sweep, swell, swig, swill, swim, swing, swoon, swirl, switch, swoop, swop, sabre, sacrifice, saddle', sally, salute, sample, sanction, saunter, savour, scaffold, scallop, schedule, scam- ble, scuffle, scuttle, season, sentence, serenade, settle, shadow, shelter, shingle, shiver, shower, shudder, snuffle, silence, skirmish, slander, slaughter, slumber, smother, smuggle, sojourn, solace, soldier, spangle, spume, sputter, squabble, stammer, startle, station, stencil, stockade, stomach, stopper, stopple, straddle, struggle, stucco, stumble, stutter, subpoena, substitute, succour, sugar, summer, supplement, surfeit, surmise, survey, swindle, syringe. Tack, tag, taint, talk, tan, tap, tar, task, taste, taunt, taw, tax, tear, tent, term, test, thank, thatch, thaw, thist, thread, thrill, throb, throne, throng, throw, thrum, thrust, tick, tide, tie, tile, time, tin, tint tip, tire, toast, toil, toll, tone, top, toss, touch, tow, trace, track, trade, trail, train, tramp, trap, tread, trench, trend, trick, trill, trip, troll, troop, trot, tube, tuck, tuft, tug, tune, turf, turn, twang, tweak, twill, twine, twinge, twirl, twist, twitch, table, taboo, tabor, (tabour), tackle, tailor, tallow, tally, tambour, tangle, tapestry, tattle, tattoo, teasel, temper, tenant, tenon, tentor, terrace, tether, thunder, thwack, timber, tincture, tinkle, tissue, title, today, tomhawk, torment, torture, tower, traffic, -trammel, transfer, trapan, travel, treasure, trephine, trifle, triumph, trouble, truncheon, trundle, trumble, tunnel, tutor, twinkle, twitter. Use, usher, upset. Vamp, vault, veil, vein, vent, vest, view, vaunt, vote, vow, -valance, value, vapour, veneer, venture, vermilon, veto, visit, voice, volley, vomit, voyage. Ward, waft, wail, wad, wage,|wake, walk, wall, waltz, wane, -want, war, warp, wash, watch, wave, wax, wear, wedge, weed, welt, wench, wheel, whelp, whet, whiff, whip, whir, whirl, whisk, whii, whoop, will, wind, wing, wink, wife, wire, wish, wit, witch, wood, work, word, worm, wound, wrap, wreck, wrench, wrest, wainscot, •warble, war, winter, witness, wonder, worry, worship, wrangle. ITawn, yell, yoke. Total=1691. APPENDIX. XXX 1 List of Adverbs as joiner to Verbs, Infinitives, and Participles. A. — Recognizable Group. This group has but one variety, all the words being recognized by their suflfix "ly." The minor varieties being by suffix "ward", "ling", "long", "wise" &c. B.— Non-Recognizable Group. Time : — Ago, already, always, never, now, sometimes, soon, then, to-day, to-morrw, yesterday. The words "now" and "then" become Conjunctions also.=ll. Place : — Above, apart, asunder, below, elsewhere, far, forth, hence, here, hither, near, off, thence, there, thither, up, within, ^thout, yonder. The words "above, below, near, off, up, within, without," are Prepositions forming with their subsequent Ns Prepo- sition Phrases also. The words "hence" and "thence" become Conjunctions also. The word "far" is an Adjective and "yonder" an Adjective pronoun too. =19. Number : — Once, twice, thrice,first, secondly, again, often. The word "first" is Adjective and "again" is Conjunction also. =7. Quantity: — Almost, enough, more, much, most, so, too, very. The words "more," "much," "most" are adjectives too, and "so" the first of a co-ordinate and an Integral Conjunction.=8. Quality : — How, ill, well. The word "how" is a fractional Subordinate Conjunction and "ill" is an Adjective too. =3. Affirmation, negation and doubt :— Ay, nay, yea, yes, not, nowise, doubtless, peradventure, perhaps =9. Analogy between Adverbs and Preposition Phrases. Adverbs. Preposition Phrases. Now At the present time Elsewhere In another place Very In a great degree , How In what manner Generally In a general way Di-Parts of speech group of words. Adjectives and Verbs with common suffix of "ate". Appropriate, confederate, conglobate, degenerate, desolate, duplicate, elate, glomerate, granulate, incorporate, irradiate, mediate, moderate, prostrate, regenerate, separate. =» 16. xxxu sttlography of english language. Non-recognizable onks. Wake, corrupt, diffuse, dilute, erect, exempt, expedite, lavish^ manifest, select. = 10. Crisp, complete, direct, dizzy droll, dry dull, empty, exact, faint, frank, free, further, glad, idle, lame, live, loose, malign, mature, mean, moot, muddy, near, numb, obscure open, own, patent, perfect, perk, prim, prompt, rough, secure, shy, single,, slack, slight, smooth, sober, soar, stanch, steady, supple, tame^ thin, triple, utter, weary, warm.=52. Tri-parts of speech group of words.— Noun, Adjective and Verb. Average. Bevel, base, black, blind, bond, bosom, bound, brown, bass. Calm, chance, chill, compact, converse, crank, cripple, cross. Damp, desert, dread, double, damask, deligate. Elect, equal. Fancy, fast, fat, fawn, fell, fine, fit, fleet, flush, forest, frolic,, fallow. Grave, gallant, goggle. Halt, hoiden, hallow. Initial, intimate, iron, invalid. Joint. Ziag, last, laureate, lay, lavel, light. IDTalt, manifest, marble, maroon, master, meet, miniature^ minute, mock, mother, mute. Narrow, negative, net, neighbour.. Pale, paper, parallel, prime, plumb, precipitate, present, prose, prostitute, pearl, purple. Quack, quadrat, quadruple, quiet. B.*nk, rebel, reverse, right, rival, romance, ruby. Salt, second, see, saw, set, sham, side, signal, silver, slant, slope, smart, sod, sole, sound, square, starch, state, steel, steep, stereotype, still, subject, sublime, subordinate. Taper, tabby, tender, thwart, tinsel, traverse, travesty, treble, trim, trust, twin. Volunteer, void, verge. "Wrong, wont, white, wet, welcome, waste. Tidy. APPENDIX. XXxiil Adjective, Adverb and Verb : — • Better, clear, even, long, near, thin. Adjective, Adverb and Noun : — Due, evil, enough, impromptu, naught, quarterly. Noun, Verb and Adverb: — Back. Total=151 Cluadri-parts-of-speech group of words.— Noun, Verb, Adjective and Adverb. Like, plumb, round, sheer. =4 Poly parts of speech. Above, all, but, bv, down, either, fast, off, save, so, still, the, that, till, up, what, while, will. = 18 List of Preposition with their Classification. A. — Position prepostions. Positions. Words. Below : — below, beneath, down, under, underneath. Above : — above, beyond, over, up, upon. After : — after, behind. Amid : — amid^ amidst, among, amongst, between, betwixt. With ; — along, with, besides. Without : — except, save, without, but. Across : — across, athwart, past, into, through, throughout, within. Before : — before, against. About : — about, around, round, by, toward. Beside : — beside, near, nigh, about, towards. Distant : — ^off. B. — Case Prepositions. Of, in, to, at, from, by, into, unto. C. — Time Prepositions. Until, till, since, during, before, about, after, D. — Reason Prepositions. For. E. — Participle or absolute prepositions. Notwithstanding, regarding, concerning, according, pending, excepting, touching. Ill XXXIV STYLOGRAPHY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. F. — Co-ordinate Prepositions. From- From- -to, •into, From- From- -till. -until. Classification of Conjunctions. Class 1. Conjunctions that place themselves between similar parts of speech or parts of speech and phrases or between parts of speech and their analogous phrases in a Mono-simple sentence are called *• Minor" or "Mono-simple" Conjunctions. Mono-simples with their Characters. -mono-groupal. b. — bl-groupal. Double-separate or co-ordinatb. 1.- A.- -SlNGLE. And... copulative B at . . . ad versati ve Though . . . adversative Or... alternative As...examplary and of capacity ^Namely . . . distributive 2. — Double Proximate. So as... consequential As if. ..of semblance As though. ..of semblance And partly... complex Such as...examplary ?,. — Triple Proximate. A s- well-as . . . copulative 4. — Phrasial. For exam pie... examplary For instance... Do. As for example... Do. la like manner... of semblance Either — or. . . alternative Neither — nor. . . copulative negative Whether. ..or. ..alternative, con- ditional No — nor .. .negative-copulative Not — nor... Do. Do. Not — but... negative-adversative Never — but... emphatic-negative and adversative Not — but only... neg. -adversative Never — nor. . .neg.-copulative Not only — but... emphatic- adversative Not only — but also... Do. Not merely — but... emphatic- adversative Both — and... double copulative Both — though. . .copulative- adversative Such — as ., example-co-ordinate Both as — and as... double dual copulative Adjective comparative — than... comparative Adverb ,, — than... comparative As adj. — as adj So adj. — as IV So V— as IV .comparison of equality Some of these Conjunctions are pure, and where found double- proximate, or co-ordinate, or triple, Parts of speech such as adverb, APPENDIX. XXXy :adjective, and pronominal adjective constitute to form parts of them. Hence these three parts of speech go to bear identity here with •conjunction. And the identity or closeness of Adverb is so much with conjunction that illustrations as "and besides," "but some 'times" have proved it elsewhere. Class 2. INTEGRAL (STRUCTURE) SUBORDINATES. Therefore, hence, so, sothat, consequently, as. Clasa 3. FRACTIONAL (JOINER OR TERM) SUBORDINATES. These conjunctions head the subordinate sentence whether -placed initial, intermediate, or terminal, to the principal and bear affinity to it in part. Single. Character. Pure. — If, unless, until, though, although, lest. Subjunctive. Than (always after the principal) Comparative. As, Conditional That, Assertive, objective Adverbial. — Ere, when, whenever, whilst, Of Time What (adjective.) However, Adversative. How, why, Of manner or reason. Prepositional. — Before, after, till, since, until, Of time. Except Conditional For (always after principal,) Causative. , Notwithstanding, Adversative Double. Tnre. — As-if, as-though, Of seu^blance. Adberhial and pure. — Just-as, now-that, Point of time J^articiple or prep, and pure. — According-as, Of aggrement. Phrasial. — In-case, in-so-fai'-as, Conditional. Triple. Character. Both pure with adv. intermediates.. — - As-soon-as, as-long-as, as-often-as, Of time. As-far-as, Of distance. As-oftenmuch-as, Of quantity or circumstance. Phrasial and pure. — In-order-that, Of purpose, reason. From-the-moment-thaty at-the-time-that Of time. duadruple. Preposiiiond jjJirase before 1st triple. — ' In-as-much-as, for-as-much-as, Causative, It will be seen that prepositional atid distinct adverbial con- junctions are special to this class besides the pure ones. XXXVI STYLOGRAPH Y OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Class 4. Co-ordinate Subordinate. As (before ad].) As. So (before adv. & adj.) That, Such (before noun) That Not so As. Not Unless. Not But Not merely But So much That Comparative of equality^ Quality, consequence, do. do. Negative Comparative. Do. conditional. Do. adversative- Do. do. Quantitative. Consequence. Class 5. Co-ordinate Principal (Disimple.) A. — Conjunction. 1st Co-ordinate. 2nd Co-ordinate. Character. Neither nor Negative-copulative No nor do do Either or Alternative Whether or do As so Conditional, conse- quentia¥ Though yet, still do adversativer Although yet do do Because therefore B. — Adjectives. Cause, consequence The-more the more Higher comparative. The more the less ,, Lower comparative The-less the more Lower higher com- parative The -greater the lesser C — Adverbs. Higher lower do Where there there Place When then Time Class 6. COMPOUND CONJUNCTIONS. I. A. Within Period. And... Copulative. But . . . Adversative. As-well-as..,copulative While. . . Do. B. Beyond period. Again, now, yet, or again, then, at length, accordingly, when if still, in return, however, on the contrary, here, there, nor. APPENDIX. XXXVII II. (For para Combination). The same as Integral subordinates, Class 2. Hence, so that, if then, when therefore, still, as soon as, for, if therefore, as, when, if. III. (For para compound). The same. as Compound conjunctions, class 6. Also, now, however, nevertheless, atlength, on'the other hand, at the same time, in like manner, consequently, indeed, thus, lastly, in other words, moreover, next, now, accordingly, again, ;at last, here, there. Analogy of Conjunctions in different strnctnres. FuvcTioNS. In simple structure. fl. Mono- groupal Between terras, joiners and ; Symmetrical J or singles subjoiners. unitors ] 2. Bi-groupal, or initial to do do do. [_ co-ordinates Asymmetrical ^'^' ^^^S^^^ Between terms and its joinerg unitors "^ . "^ joiners and terms. 1^2. Co-ordinates wanting. In increased structures. ri. Mono-groupal In Compounds of mono-simples, ■Svmmetrical ' Conjunctions. mono-subordinates, mono- ' " unitors i o -D- i complexes, jy. Bi-groupal (^ Conjunctions In Di-simple. ( 1. mono-groupal In Complex by mono- Asymmetrical ) subordinates. Unitors | 2. Bi-groupal In Complex by co-ordinate ( subordinates. Classification of Inteij actions. 1. Pure :— Alas, ah, ay, oh, ha, O, fy, alak, hurrah, ho, eh, lo ! 2. Adjectival: — Strange, bravoe ! 3. Noun : — Courage, Non-sense ! 5. Varbal : — Smack, see, hold, hush, hail, behold, hark I 4. Adverbial : — Yes, now, well ! -6. Phrasial: — By -heaven, farewell, good-bye, adieu! -XXXVlll STYLOGRAPHr OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE. Unrecognizable Words. Table of Enumeration of the Series. Special Ante-joiners of Noun and those common to Noun and Verb. Series. Enumeratioo. 1. Article adjective. A. A. ... ... 3 2. Pronomial adjective P. A. ... ... 25 3. Personal pronoun possessives P.P.P. ... 14 4. Pronominal adjective possessives P. A. P. ... 3 5. Relative pronoun possessive R. P. P. ... I 6. Adverbs- joiners to adjectives ... ... 15 7. Adjectives, pure ... ... 285 8. Irregular past participle adjectives ... 27 9. Advei'b prefixes of above ... ... 9 The common Ante- joiners of Noun and Verb from 6 to 9 are^ their Post- joiners. Post- joiners of Noun are Ante, Inter, and Post-joiners to Verb. 10. Prepositions, or preposition phrases ... 54 11. Un-recogni:ahle Nouns, pure Regular ... 1181 12. JJitto Verbs regular, Irregular Verbs, Auxiliaries , Defectives ... ... 562 13. Un-recognizable Jii-parts-of -speech group of noun and verb and verb-noun ... ]691 14. Un-recognizable Tri-parts-of-speech group of N, V, adjectives ... ... 139 15. Do (^uadri groups ... ... 4 16-. Personal Pronoun, nominatives ... ... 8 17. Do, objectives ... ... 8 18. Relative pronoun, nominatives ... ... 3 19. Do Relative Pronoun, objectives ... 3^ 20. Interjections, unrecognizable pure ... 18 21. Unrecognizable pure Conjunctions, Mono- groupal, Bigroupal, tri- and quadri groupal 79 ^ 22. Unrecognizabls bi-parts-of speech Adj. & V 62 23. Do Tri parts of speech Adverb, Adjective, V 6- 24. Do Do Adverb, Adjective and N 6- 25. Unrecognizable poly parts-of-speech ... 18^ Total=4275. APPENDIX. XXXIS Classification of Parts of Speech. 1. — Joiner Par-is of Spekch. ArticlfjAdveib, Adjective, {Pronominal Adjective) (Personal Pronoun, Pron. Adjective, Noiin,& Relative Pron. Possessives). 2. — Term (Chief) Parts of Speech. Noun, (Pronoun), Verbs, (Infinitive and Participle). 3. — Connective Parts of Spkech. • Conjunction, Adverb, Preposition. 4. — Absolute Parts of Si'kech. Interjection, (Vocatives). NOMENCLATURE OF STRUCTURES AND FORMULA, GRAPHIC AND RATIONAL. A.— Symbols, digits, and signs used in Graphic Formula. (a) Bt/ Syinhols. N=Noun. V=Verb. IV=Infinitive. PV=Participle. C = Conjiinction. R=ReIative. c'=Joiner first Co-ordinate. C' = Principal first Co-ordinate, C*= Principal or joiner 2nd Co-ordinate. (6) By Digits. P = Article. P=Pronorninal Adj. l^=Per8. Pron. Possess. 14= Pron. Adj. Possess. 15=Noun or Rel. Pron. Possessive. 1 = Adverb. 2 = Adjective. 3=Preposition Phrase. 4=1V or PV Joiner to N. (c) By Signs. ' { }= Principal sentence (Simple or in Complex). ()»=Subordinate. [ ] = Co-ordinate (Di-simple) Principal. C b = Absolute.